Apple Logic Pro 7.2.1 Dedicated Control Surface Support User Manual 7: (Manual) Logic7 Cntrl Info

Logic7_DedicatedCntrlSurfaceInfo

2006-05-04

User Manual: Apple Logic Logic 7: Dedicated Control Surface Support (Manual)

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 255 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

LogicPro7. 2 .1
DedicatedControl
SurfaceSupport
AppleComputer,Inc.
©2004–2006AppleComputer,Inc.Allrightsreserved.
Underthecopyrightlaws,thismanualmaynotbe
copied,inwholeorinpart,withoutthewrittenconsent
ofApple.Yourrightstothesoftwarearegovernedby
theaccompanyingsoftwarelicenceagreement.
TheApplelogoisatrademarkofAppleComputer,Inc.,
registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.Useofthe
“keyboard”Applelogo(Option-Shift-K)forcommercial
purposeswithoutthepriorwrittenconsentofApple
mayconstitutetrademarkinfringementandunfair
competitioninviolationoffederalandstatelaws.
Everyefforthasbeenmadetoensurethatthe
informationinthismanualisaccurate.AppleComputer,
Inc.isnotresponsibleforprintingorclericalerrors.
AppleComputer,Inc.
1InfiniteLoop
Cupertino,CA95014-2084
408-996-1010
www.apple.com
Apple,theApplelogo,Aqua,FinalCut,FinalCutPro,
FireWire,iBook,iMac,iPod,iTunes,Logic,Mac,
Macintosh,MacOS,PowerBook,PowerMac,Power
Macintosh,andQuickTimearetrademarksofApple
Computer,Inc.,registeredintheU.S.andother
countries.
FinderandGarageBandaretrademarksofApple
Computer,Inc.
AppleCareisaservicemarkofAppleComputer,Inc.
Othercompanyandproductnamesmentionedherein
aretrademarksoftheirrespectivecompanies.Mention
ofthird-partyproductsisforinformationalpurposes
onlyandconstitutesneitheranendorsementnora
recommendation.Appleassumesnoresponsibilitywith
regardtotheperformanceoruseoftheseproducts.

3
1
Contents
Preface 7Introduction
7
WhatAreControlSurfaces?
8
HowControlSurfaceIntegrationWorks
Chapter113 ControlSurfaceSetup
13
ControlSurfacePlug-ins
13
AboutSoftwareandFirmware
14
GettingStarted
15
ConnectingtheUnit(s)
16
InstallingandSettingUpControlSurfaces
17
ControlSurfaceGroups
19
SetupWindowParameters
25
ControlSurfacePreferences
29
CustomizingControlSurfaces
34
TheControllerAssignmentsEditor
45
AboutModalDialogs
46
Tips
Chapter247 LogicControl
47
SetUp
48
TheDisplays
50
TheChannelStrip(s)
54
TheAssignmentZone
69
FaderBankZone
71
MasterFader
71
DisplayZone
73
TheFunctionKeyZone
74
TheGlobalViewZone
75
FunctionButtonZone
79
TheTransportZone
87
TheCursor/ZoomKeyZone
88
TheJog/ScrubWheelZone
89
AssignmentOverview
4
Contents
Chapter3101 M-AudioiControl
101
SettingUptheiControl
102
Compatibility
102
ChannelViews
102
TheAssignmentButtons
105
ArrowUpandArrowDownButtons
105
TheChannelStrip(s)
106
TheJogWheel
106
TheTransportZone
107
MasterFader
108
AssignmentOverview
Chapter4111 E u C o n SupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC
111
SettingUptheMCorSystem5-MCWithLogic
112
SettingUpSoftKeyAssignments
113
Main-TracksTouchscreen
113
Main-Layouts
113
Faders
114
ChoosingAutomationModes
115
Knobsets
120
MonitorsandControlRoom
120
ClearKeys
120
TrackControlBar
120
System5-MCSpecificFeatures
Chapter5123 CMLabsMotormix
123
SetUp
123
AssignmentOverview
Chapter6131FrontierDesignTranzPort
131
SetUp
131
LCD
132
AssignmentOverview
Chapter7135 JLCooperCS-32MiniDesk
135
SetUp
135
AssignmentOverview
Chapter8141 JLCooperFaderMaster4/100
141
Requirements
141
SetUp
142
AssignmentOverview
Contents
5
Chapter9143 KorgmicroKONTROLandKONTROL49
143
SetUp
143
AssignmentOverview
Chapter10 147 MackieBabyHUI
147
SetUp
147
AssignmentOverview
Chapter11 151 MackieC4
151
SetUp
151
V-Pots,V-Selects
157
ButtonsatBottom
160
MarkerOverlay
160
TrackOverlay
160
ChannelStripOverlay
161
FunctionOverlay
Chapter12 163 MackieHUI
163
SetUp
163
AssignmentOverview
Chapter13 173RadikalTechnologiesSAC-2K
173
SetUp
173
AssignmentOverview
178
Troubleshooting
Chapter14 179RolandSI-24
179
SetUp
179
AssignmentOverview
Chapter15 185 TascamFW-1884
185
Introduction
185
SetUp
185
AssignmentOverview
Chapter16 193 TascamUS-2400
193
SetUp
194
AssignmentOverview
Chapter17 199 TascamUS-428andUS-224
199
SetUp
199
AssignmentOverview
Chapter18 203 Yamaha01V96
203
SetUp
6
Contents
204
AssignmentOverview
206
SelectedChannelSection
207
DataEntrySection
207
ChannelStrips
207
StereoChannelStrip
208
UserDefinedKeysSection
Chapter19 211Yamaha02R96
211
SetUp
212
AssignmentOverview
Chapter20 217YamahaDM1000
217
SetUp
218
AssignmentOverview
Chapter21 225YamahaDM2000
225
SetUp
226
AssignmentOverview
AppendixA235 LogicControl—Specifications
235
LogicControl(BaseUnit)
237
LogicControlXT(ExtensionUnit)
AppendixB239 LogicControl—MIDIImplementation
239
SysExMessageHeader
240
GlobalControlMessages
242
CommonControlMessages
AppendixC251 LogicControl—ControlSurfaceLayoutandIDs
AppendixD255 LogicControl—MIDIImplementationChart

7
Introduction
ThismanualcoversthecontrolsurfacesupportofLogicPro.
Pleasereaditthoroughlytomakethemostofyournew
controller(s).
AllofthefunctionsinLogicProthatarenormallyassociatedwiththeuseofananalog
stylemixercanbeperformedusingjustamouseandacomputerkeyboard.The
additionofmanycommerciallyavailablecontrolsurfacescangreatlyenhanceyour
creativeexperiencebyprovidingyouwithhands-oncontrolofmostrealtime
parametersinLogic.Moveafaderandtheon-screenfaderinLogicwillmovewithit.
Similarly,whenyoumakeafadermoveon-screen,thecontrolsurfacefadermoves(this
onlyappliestocontrolsurfacesequippedwithmotorizedfaders).AdjustEQparameters
byturningoneofyourcontrolsurface’sknobsandLogicwillupdateinstantly.
WhatAreControlSurfaces?
ControlsurfacesarehardwareunitsthatenabletheoperationofLogicProusingfaders,
rotaryknobs,switches,anddisplays.
Thereareanumberofsimplecontrolsurfacesthatfeatureconventionalfadersandno
displays.Moreprogressiveunitsareequippedwithmotorizedfaders,rotaryencoders,
LEDrings,andprogrammabledisplays.Themorefeedbackacontrolsurfaceprovides,
theeasieritistouse,asyoudon’tneedtowatchthecomputerscreeninorderto
determinewhatmodetheunitiscurrentlyin.
Controlsurfaces—dependentontheoptions(buttons,knobs,switches,displays,andso
on)available—havethepotentialto:
Â
controlallLogictransportfunctions
Âadjustinstrument,input,bus,aux,master,andaudiochannelvolumeandpanlevels
ÂcontrolChannelEQandLinearPhaseEQparameters
ÂselectandcontrolalleffectandInstrumentparameters
Âselect,solo,mute,andarmtracks
Âsetandadjustsendparameters
8 ChapterIntroduction
ÂremotelyswitchbetweenScreensets
ÂscrubMIDIandaudio
Âzoominonindividualtracks
Âcreate,delete,andmovebetweenmarkers,andmuchmore
Forliveuse,controlsurfacesareideal.Theperformingmusicianonlyneedstotakea
laptop,equippedwithsuitableaudioand/orMIDIinterfaces,akeyboard,andacontrol
surfacetoaliveevent.Someunitsavailablenowadaysincorporateakeyboard,audio
interface,controlsurface,andMIDIinterfaceintoasinglepackage.
GiventhatLogicPro’strackautomationfacilitiescanbeactive,evenwhennotinrecord
mode,youcancaptureyour“live”realtimechangesforlaterrecall.Thisensuresthat
you’llneveragainlosethat“once-in-a-lifetime”performance—onstageorinthestudio.
HowControlSurfaceIntegrationWorks
LogicProfeaturesdedicatedsupportforanumberofcontrolsurfacemodels.Thisis
achievedthroughseveralplug-insthataredirectlyintegratedintoLogic.Someplug-ins
supportmultiple,similarly-featuredcontrolsurfacemodels.
Note:Althoughmanyothercontrolsurfacesaresupported,theLogic/MackieControl,
C4,andXTcontrolsurfaceunitsarerecommendedforusewithLogic.
Logicalsoallowsyoutoreprogramexistingassignmentsforsupportedcontrolsurfaces
andtoprogramnewassignmentsforunsupportedcontrolsurfaces.Thisfacilityallows
youtoextendtheuseoffaders,knobs,andswitches,eitherdirectlyorthroughtheuse
ofmodifiercommands.
YoucanuseanycombinationofcontrolsurfaceswithLogicPro.Youwillgetmostout
ofthem,however,whenusedinaControlSurfaceGroup(providedalldevicesare
supportedbythesameplug-in).
Universalinformation,thatappliestoallcontrolsurfaces,iscoveredinthefollowing
chapter.Pleasereadthisbeforetakingalookatthededicatedsectiononyourcontrol
surface(s).
Adetailedoverviewofgroup,installation,andothercontrolsurfacesetupparameters
isfoundinChapter1,“ControlSurfaceSetup,”onpage13.Pleasereadthis,asit
containsalotofusefulinformationthatwillhelpyoutocustomizeand/ormakethe
mostofyourcontrolsurface(s).
Important:Specificinformationondevicesetupisfoundatthebeginningofthe
relevantchapterforyourcontrolsurface(seethetablebelow).
ChapterIntroduction 9
ItisassumedthatyouarefamiliarwiththebasicuseandterminologyofLogicPro.As
such,thefunctionalityandusesofindividualLogicparametersarenotcoveredinthis
documentation.PleaseconsultyourLogicPro7ReferencemanualortheOnlineHelp,if
yourequirefurtherinformation.
Youarestronglyencouragedtopressbuttons,moveslidersandturntheknobsofyour
controlsurfacewhilereadingthroughthefollowingchapters.Thiswillhelpyoutoget
a“feel”forhowyourcontrolsurfaceworks,andhowthevariouspartsofthecontrol
surfaceinteractwithoneanother,andLogic.
AlistingofcontrolsurfacesthataredirectlysupportedbyLogic(viaacontrolsurface
plug-inincludedintheLogicpackage),howtheydifferfromsimilardevices,andcross
referencestotherelevantsectionsareshownbelow.
Note:ItispossiblethatyourdevicemaybedirectlysupportedinLogicviaasuitable
controlsurfaceplug-in,suppliedbythemanufacturer.Pleasecheckthewebsiteofyour
controlsurfacemanufacturer.Followanywritteninstructionssuppliedwiththeplug-in,
ifavailable.
SupportedDevices Manufacturer Notes
01V96 Yamaha TheYamaha01V96emulatestwoHUIunits,using
twovirtualMIDIinandoutconnectionsoverits
USBcable.
See“Yamaha01V96”onpage203.
01XYamaha TheYamaha01XemulatesaLogicControl.Itdoes
notfeatureallcontrolsavailabletotheLogic(and
Mackie)units,however.Pleaserefertothe01X
documentationfordetails.
Logicrecognizesthe01Xassuchanddisplaysa
customicon,butcommunicationisaswitha
LogicControl.
See“LogicControl”onpage47.
02R96 Yamaha TheYamaha02R96emulatesthreeHUIunits,
usingthreevirtualMIDIinandoutconnections
overitsUSBcable.
See“Yamaha02R96”onpage211.
BabyHUI Mackie TheBabyHUIisastripped-downversionofthe
HUI.See“MackieBabyHUI”onpage147.
C4 Mackie TheLogicControlplug-inhasbeenextendedto
supporttheMackieC4.
See“MackieC4”onpage151 .
CM408T Euphonix See“EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem
5-MC”onpage111 .
CS-32MiniDesk JLCooper See“JLCooperCS-32MiniDesk”onpage135 .
10 ChapterIntroduction
DM1000 Yamaha TheYamahaDM1000emulatestwoHUIunits,
usingtwovirtualMIDIinandoutconnections
overitsUSBcable.
See“YamahaDM1000”onpage217.
DM2000 Yamaha TheYamahaDM2000emulatesthreeHUIunits,
usingthreevirtualMIDIinandoutconnections
overitsUSBcable.
See“YamahaDM2000”onpage225.
FaderMaster4/100 JLCooper See“JLCooperFaderMaster4/100”onpage141.
FE-8 Tascam ExtensionunitforFW-1884.See“TascamFW-
1884”onpage185.
FW-1082 Tascam Astripped-downversionoftheFW-1884,with
dedicatedsupportintheFW-1884plug-in.
See“TascamFW-1884”onpage185.
FW-1884 Tascam See“TascamFW-1884”onpage185.
HUI Mackie Important:TheHUIplug-inhasbeentestedwith
theoriginalMackieHUI.Thereareanumberof
controlsurfacesnotmentionedherewhichcan
emulatetheHUI.Wehavenottestedalldevices
capableofHUIemulation,anddon’tprovideany
supportforthem,nordoweguaranteethatthey
willworkwithLogicinHUIemulationmode.
See“MackieHUI”onpage163.
iControl M-Audio See“M-AudioiControl”onpage101.
KONTROL49 Korg AlargerversionofthemicroKONTROL,with
dedicatedsupportinthemicroKONTROLplug-in.
See“KorgmicroKONTROLandKONTROL49”on
page143.
LogicControlXT Mackie/Emagic ThisistheextensionunitfortheLogicControl.It
onlyoffersthechannelstripsection,makingit
lessusefulwithoutaLogicControl.See“Logic
Control”onpage47.
AlsoseetheAppendixformoredetails.
Logic/MackieControlMackie/Emagic See“LogicControl”onpage47.
AlsoseetheAppendixformoredetails.
MackieControl Mackie TheoriginalMackieControlhardwareissimilarto
theLogicControl.Thefrontpanellegendis
different,however.YoushouldrequestaLogic
ControlLexanOverlayfromMackie.AsLogicalso
recognizestheMackieControlprotocol,youmay
useanyfirmwareversion.Ifyouhavefirmware
version1.02orhigher,youcanfreelyuseeither
theLogicControlorMackieControlmode.
See“LogicControl”onpage47.
SupportedDevices Manufacturer Notes
ChapterIntroduction 11
MackieControlExtender Mackie MackieControlversionoftheLogicControlXT.As
LogicalsorecognizestheMackieControl
protocol,youmayuseanyfirmwareversion.If
youhavefirmwareversion1.02orhigher,youcan
freelyuseeithertheLogicControlorMackie
Controlmode.
See“LogicControl”onpage47.
MackieControlUniversal Mackie AMackieControlwithLogicControlsilk
screening(legend)andfirmwareversion2.0or
higher(includingHUIemulation).AsLogicalso
recognizestheMackieControlprotocol,youmay
useanyfirmwareversion.Ifyouhavefirmware
version1.02orhigher,youcanfreelyuseeither
theLogicControlorMackieControlmode.
See“LogicControl”onpage47.
MC Euphonix See“EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem
5-MC”onpage111 .
microKONTROL Korg See“KorgmicroKONTROLandKONTROL49”on
page143.
Motormix CMLabs See“CMLabsMotormix”onpage123.
RadikalTechnologies SAC-2.2 Thereisadedicatedplug-infortheSAC-2.2/2k’s
nativemode.
TheLogicControlplug-indetectsanSAC-2.2(in
LogicControlemulationmode)andignoresit,
avoidtwoinstallationsoftheSAC-2.2.
See“RadikalTechnologiesSAC-2K”onpage173.
RadikalTechnologies SAC-2k See“RadikalTechnologiesSAC-2K”onpage173.
SI-24 Roland See“RolandSI-24”onpage179.
TranzPort FrontierDesignGroup See“FrontierDesignTranzPort”onpage131.
US-224 Tascam Astripped-downversionoftheUS-428,with
dedicatedsupportintheUS-428plug-in.
See“TascamUS-428andUS-224”onpage199.
US-2400 Tascam LogichassupportfortheUS-2400’snativemode.
IncontrasttoitsLogicControlmode,allcontrols,
includingthejoystick,aresupported.
Seesection“TascamUS-2400”onpage193.
US-428 Tascam See“TascamUS-428andUS-224”onpage199.
SupportedDevices Manufacturer Notes
1
13
1ControlSurfaceSetup
Logicoffersdedicatedsupportforanumberofcontrol
surfaces,plustheoptiontoprogramunsupporteddevices.
Thefollowingchapterdescribesfunctionsapplicabletoallcontrolsurfacemodels.
Specificdocumentationforvariousmodelsisavailableinthefollowingchapters.
ControlSurfacePlug-ins
Dedicatedcontrolsurfacesupportisachievedthroughtheuseofspecialplug-infiles.
ThesefilesareautomaticallyaddedwhenLogicisinstalled.
Theyarelocatedinthe/Contents/MIDIDevicePlug-inssub-folderoftheLogic
applicationbundle(toviewthebundlecontents,Controlorright-clickontheLogic
applicationicon,andchooseShowPackageContentsfromthemenu).Logicalso
checksforcontrolsurfaceplug-insinthe(optional)“/Library/ApplicationSupport/
Logic/MIDIDevicePlug-ins”and“~/Library/ApplicationSupport/Logic/MIDIDevice
Plug-ins”(the“~”denotesyouruserhomedirectory)folders.
Whennewcontrolsurfaceplug-insarereleasedindependentlyfromaLogicupdate,
pleaseplacetheminthefoldersdescribedabove(orasadvisedinthedocumentation
suppliedwiththeplug-in).
AboutSoftwareandFirmware
Mostcontrolsurfaceshaveno“intelligence”oftheirown.Theirfunctionalityishost
software-based,makingthemreliantonLogictotellthemwhattodo/howtobehave.
WhatthismeansisthatcontrolsurfacescannotperformanyfunctionthatLogicitself
isn’tcapableof.ItalsomeansthatifLogicisnotbooted,mostcontrolsurfaceunitswill
donothingatall.
Thisrelianceonthehostapplicationmakesyourcontrolsurfacetheultimate
upgradablehardware.AsnewfunctionsareaddedtoLogic,oryoucreatenew
assignments(see“ControlSurfaceSetup”onpage13),yourcontrolsurfacewillbeable
toaccessandcontrolthem.
14 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
Mostcontrolsurfaceunitsdo,however,haveaformofsoftwarecalled“firmware.”This
firmwareismuchliketheBIOSfoundinyourcomputer.Newbehaviors—atahardware
level—suchasimprovedcontroloffaderservomotorsandchangestothedisplaycan
bemadeviafirmwareupdates.
ThefirmwareisusuallystoredonanEEPROM(ElectronicallyErasableProgrammable
ReadOnlyMemory)chip.ItcanoftenbeupdatedviaasimpleMIDIdumpprocedure,in
theformofaMIDIfile.
Shouldnewfirmwarebecomeavailable,youcansimplydownloadtheappropriate
MIDIfileandplayittoyourcontrolsurface(s),whichwillbeupdatedaccordingly.The
stepsrequiredtoperformafirmwareupdatewillbeoutlinedinthedocumentation
thataccompaniestheMIDIfile.Pleasereadthisbeforeattemptinganyupdate.
Note:Somecontrolsurfacesmayrequireaphysicalchipreplacementforfirmware
updates.Pleasecontactthemanufacturerofyourdevicefordetails.
GettingStarted
Tomakeuseofyourcontrolsurface,youwillrequire:
ÂAninstalled,authorizedcopyofLogicPro.
ÂIfaUSBorFireWireequippeddevice(suchasaYamaha01X)—afreeUSBorFireWire
port.ThisshouldpreferablybeadirectUSB/FireWireconnectionwiththecomputer,
ratherthanviaaUSB/FireWirehub.Pleaserefertothedocumentationprovidedby
themanufacturerofyourcontrolsurface.
ÂIfaMIDI-onlydevice(suchasaLogicControl)—afreeMIDIinandoutportforeach
unit,onanysuitableMIDIinterface.Asanexample;ifusingaUnitor8orAMT8,
whichfeature8MIDIinand8MIDIoutports,withoneLogicControlandoneLogic
ControlXT,youwillneedtousetwooftheUnitor8/AMT8’sMIDIinsandtwoofits
MIDIouts.
ÂAninstalleddriver(ifrequiredbyyourcontrolsurface)thatissupportedbythe
operatingsystemversionbeingused.
Important:YourMIDIinterfacemustfeaturedriversoftwarethatsupportsSysEx
communication.PleaseconsultthedocumentationthatshippedwithyourMIDI
interface.
Thenumberofunitsthatcanberunsimultaneouslyisdependentontheavailabilityof
freeMIDIinandout,FireWireorUSBportsonyoursystem.Inastandardsetup,asingle
controlsurfacewillbeusedalone,oraccompaniedbyoneormoreunits.Itisalso
possibletomakeuseofseveralunitstocreateControlSurfaceGroups,asdiscussedin
“ControlSurfaceGroups”onpage17 .
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 15
Theuseofmultiplecontrolsurfacesexpandsonthenumberoftracks,parameters,and
soonthatcanbecontrolledwithindividualfaders,knobs,andswitches.Asan
example,theLogic/MackieControlXTunitsarebasicallyidenticaltothechannelstrip
section(fader,V-Pot,andLCD)ofthemainLogic/MackieControlunit.TheMackieC4
featuresanumberofV-Pots,butnofaders.YoumayaddasmanyXT,C4,orother
controlsurfaceunitsasyouwishtoyourLogicsystem,providedenoughMIDIinand
outportsareavailable.
ConnectingtheUnit(s)
Connectyour(MIDI)controlsurfacesasshowninthediagrambelow.
Asmentionedearlier,eachMIDIcontrolsurfacemusthaveadiscreteMIDIinandMIDI
outconnection.Donot“daisy-chain”otherMIDIdevicesviaMIDIthrutotheMIDIinor
outportsusedbycontrolsurfaces,asthismayresultindataerrors.
FireWireandUSBunitsareconnectedviaasinglecabletothecomputer.Itisgenerally
recommendedthatthisisadirectconnectionwiththeMacintosh,ratherthanviaa
FireWire/USBhub.Daisy-chainingortheuseofhubscanresultindataerrors.
OptionalFootswitchesandPedals
Ifyourcontrolsurfacefeaturessuitableconnectors,youmayuseoptionalfootswitches
toremotelycontrolstart/stopandotherfunctions.Thismaybeusefulwhenusing
guitarsorotherinstrumentsthatrequiretwo-handedplaying.
Computer MIDIInterface
OptionalFootswitches
16 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
PowerUp
Onceeverythingisconnected,pressthepowerswitchonyourcontrolsurface.Once
powered,thedisplaysand/orLEDswillilluminateandtheLCD(ifapplicable)will
generallydisplayawelcomemessage(oftenincludingthefirmwareversionnumber).
Eachfaderwillslidetothetop,andbacktothebottomofitstravelonmostmotorized
controlsurfaces.Thisself-diagnosticpower-onprocedureindicatesthatyourunitsare
functioningcorrectly.
YourcomputerandMIDIinterfacecanbepoweredupbeforeorafterinitializationof
yourcontrolsurfaceunits.Logiccanbestartedeitherbeforeoraftertheunitshave
completedinitialization.
InstallingandSettingUpControlSurfaces
Somecontrolsurfaceunits(Logic/MackieControl,forexample)willautomaticallybe
detectedwhenLogicislaunched.Unitswhicharenotdetectedautomaticallycanbe
addedviatheSetupwindow.ThisisaccessedviatheSetupoptioninthePreferences>
ControlSurfacesmenu.
Installationisveryeasy(andiscoveredintheSetUpsectionofthechapteronyour
specificdevice).Somedevicesmayrequiredifferentoradditionalsteps,butgenerally,
allyouneedtodoisselectthedevice(s)thatyouwishtouseinLogic,asfollows:
ToinstallcontrolsurfacesusingtheScanfunctionofLogic:
1ChooseNew>Install,andintheensuingInstallwindow,selectthedesireddevicefrom
thelist.
Note:Youmayselectoneormoremodels.Toselectmorethanonemodel,selectthem
withCommandhelddown.Ifyouselectmorethanonemodel,Logicperformsthe
desiredoperationforeachmodelinturn.
2PresstheScanbutton.YoucanalsopressEnterordouble-clickthedevicename.
LogicwillthenanalyzeyourMIDIsystem,andwillautomaticallyinstallthedevicesit
finds,includingthecorrectconnectionsettings.
Note:TheScanfunctionispreferabletomanualinstallation,asLogicisabletogather
themaximumamountofinformationaboutthedevices.
Ifyoudon’twanttoselectthemodelstobescannedmanually,youcanalsoclick“Scan
all.”ThiswillsearchforallsupportedcontrolsurfaceunitsonallMIDIports.Pleasebe
awarethatthismaytakeawhile.
Somecontrolsurfacesdon’tsupportautomaticscanning.Suchdevicesmustbeadded
manuallytoyoursetup.Inthisscenario,youwillneedtomanuallysettheMIDIInand
Outportparameters.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 17
Tomanuallyaddtheselecteddevicestoyoursystem:
1SelectthedesireddevicesfromthelistintheInstallwindow.
2ClicktheAddbutton.
Note:AlternativelyyoucanOption-double-clickthedesireddevice.
Ifacontrolsurfaceoftheselectedtypealreadyexistsinyoursetup,youwillbeasked
whetherornotyoureallywanttoaddthenewdevice.Youwillneedtomanuallyalter
theMIDIInandOutportvaluesinthedeviceparameterstomatchthoseofthe
connectedunit.
Onceyouhavecompletedthescanningorinstallationofthedevices,clickDone.The
Installwindowwillclose.
RebuildingDefaults
ThePreferences>ControlSurfaces>RebuildDefaultsoptionre-initializesthesupport
ofallconnectedcontrolsurfaces.
ControlSurfaceGroups
Ifyouhavemultiplecontrolsurfaceunits,youcandefinehowtheyrelatetoeachother,
andbuildControlSurfaceGroups.AControlSurfaceGroupconsistsofanumberof
controlsurfaceunits(usingthesameplug-in)whicharecombinedtocreateasingle,
unified(andlarger)controlsurface.
Youcanbuildupto20ControlSurfaceGroups.Each“group”canconsistofanynumber
ofphysicalunits.TheonlylimitingfactoristhenumberofavailableMIDIIn/Out(or
USB/FireWire—definedasMIDI)ports.
Whenmultiplecontrolsurfaceunitsarecombined,youcanindependentlydetermine
thedefaultbehaviorforeachphysicaldevice.ThisisdiscussedintheDevice
Parameters(p.19)section.
TobuildaControlSurfaceGroupoutofseveralunits:
mSimplyarrangetheiricons(intheSetupwindow)inasinglehorizontalrow—by
draggingeachicontothedesiredonscreenlocation.
Theorderoftheiconsfromlefttorightalsodefineshowthetracksandparametersare
arrangedontheunits.
Tousetwocontrolsurfacesindependently:
mSimplyarrangetheminseparaterows—thatis,oneabovetheother.
18 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
HereisanexamplewithtwoLogicControl,threeLogicControlXTunitsandaHUI:
Computericonconnectedtothreerows,asbelow:
Thetoprow,consistingofLogicControlXT#1,LogicControlXT#2andLogicControl
#1formasingleControlSurfaceGroupwith24channels.XT#1controlschannels1to
8,XT#2controlschannels9to16,andLogicControl#1handleschannels17to24.
LogicControl#2andLogicControlXT#3formasecondControlSurfaceGroup,
displaying,sayinstruments(onchannels1to8)andbusses(onchannels9to16).
TheHUIformsasingleunitcontrolsurfacegroup.
EachControlSurfaceGrouphasindividualsettings,suchasFlipMode,FaderBankOffset,
Plug-inParameterBankOffsetandothers.Thisallowsyoutoaccess,edit,andautomate
differentsectionsoftheLogicmixer.
Inourexample,thethreeunitsinthetoprowcouldbeusedforcontroloveraudio
tracksandMIDIchannels.Inthemiddlerow,LogicControl#2couldbeusedforAudio
Instrumentchannels1to8,andXT#3couldbeusedforbusses.TheHUImightedit
groupdefinitions.Thephysicalplacementofunits,andthewayyouusethem,is
entirelyuptoyou.
Note:Theplacementofyourcontrolsurfaceunitsinrelationtoeachothershouldbe
thesameonscreenasinthereal-world.Simplydrag’ndropthedesiredicon
horizontallyinyourControlSurfaceGrouptodoso.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 19
SetupWindowParameters
ThethreeParameterboxesalongtheleftedgeoftheSetupwindowallowyouto
configureyourcontrolsurfacesetuptomeetyourneeds.
DeviceParameters
EachcontrolsurfaceunitmustbeconnectedtoanindependentMIDIinandoutport
(orcorrespondingUSB/FireWireport,designatedasaMIDIportbythedevicedriver).
TheautomaticsetuporScanprocedureshouldhavefound,andset,thecorrectMIDIin/
outportsettingsforeachunit.
IntheeventthattheMIDIinoroutportidentificationisincorrect,youcanmanually
selecttheappropriateonefortheunit.Todoso,click-holdontheMIDIInputand
Outputpull-downmenus,andselecttheappropriateport(s)ofyourMIDIinterface/
device.
SomedevicesallowyoutodefineadeviceID(orglobal/basicchannel).Thiscanbeset
inthisarea.Modulename,modelnameandfirmwareversionarealsodisplayedinthe
deviceparameters.
TheColorparameterdefinesthecoloroftheTrackControlBar—abardisplayedinthe
Arrangewindow,indicatingthetracksthatarecurrentlybeingaccessedbyyourcontrol
surface.TheTrackControlBarofeachcontrolsurfacecanbeassignedadifferentcolor.
SpecialParameters
Somecontrolsurfacesmayallowthedefinitionof“special”parameters.Anexampleof
thisisfadertouchsensitivity.SuchparameterscanbefoundintheSpecialParameters
area.Adetaileddescriptioncanbefoundinthedocumentationoftheparticular
controlsurfaceplug-in.
ControlSurfaceGroupParameters
ThefollowingparametersareshownintheSetupwindow.TheyapplytotheControl
SurfaceGroupassociatedwiththeselecteddevice,andallowyoutoseteachgroupup
tomeetyourneeds.ThisfacilityisofgreatbenefitwhenmultipleControlSurface
Groupshavebeencreated.
Many(ifnotall)ControlSurfaceGroupparameterscanalsobechangeddirectlyfrom
thecontrolsurface.TheparameterdisplayintheSetupwindowisforinformation
purposesonly.
Anychangestosettings(madehere,oronthecontrolsurface)aresavedina
preferencesfile,whichisindependentoftheLogicprogrampreferences:it’snamed
“com.apple.logic.pro.cs”,andislocatedin~/Library/Preferences/Logic.
20 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
DisplayParameters
ThefollowingsectiondescribesthedisplayparametersofaControlSurfaceGroup.
FlipMode
Manycontrolsurfacesofferbothafaderandarotaryencoderforeachchannelstrip.
FlipModeallowsyoutoswaptheencoderassignmentwiththatofthefaderforeach
channel.Alternately,youcanassignbothcontrolstothesameparameter.
Therearefour“flip”or“swap”modes.
ÂOff—disablesFlipMode,makingthefaderactasavolumecontrol.
ÂDuplicate—makesboththefaderandencoderactiveforthecurrentlyselected
encoderparameter.
ÂSwap—swapsthefaderandencoder,makingthefaderapancontrolandthe
encoderachannelvolumecontrol,forexample.
ÂMute—disablesthefaders.Thisisusefulforsituationswhererecordingistakingplace
inthesameroomasthecontrolsurface,andyouwishtoavoidthemechanicalnoise
ofthefaders.Anyexistingautomationdatawillstillfunctionaspernormal.
DisplayMode
Ifthereisinsufficientspaceavailableforthedisplayofboththeparameternameand
value(onthecontrolsurfaceLCD),youcanspecifywhatisdisplayedhere:
ÂValue—displaystheparametervalue.
ÂName—displaystheparametername.
ClockDisplay
Ifyourcontrolsurfacefeaturesasongpositiondisplay,theClockDisplayparameter
allowsyoutosetthedisplaymode:
ÂBeats—thesongpositiondisplayshowsBars/Beats/(optional)SubDivision/Ticks.
ÂSMPTE—asabove,butinHours/Minutes/Seconds/Frames.
Note:Theexactelementsdisplayed,andthustheirpositions,dependontheselected
SMPTEorbar/beatdisplayoptiondefinedintheLogicPreferences.
TrackViewMode
Thisparameterdetermineswhichtracksorchannelsaredisplayed:
ÂMixer—displayschannelsintheirorderofappearanceintheTrackMixerwindow
(whileGlobalmodeisdisabled).ChannelStrip1intheTrackMixerisequivalentto
channel1onthecontrolsurface,ChannelStrip2intheTrackMixerisequivalentto
channel2andsoon.Instruments/channelsusedbymultipletracksaremergedinto
onechannel.MixerViewisthedefaultmodeofmostdevices,includingtheLogic/
MackieControl.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 21
ÂGlobal—displaysallObjectsofcertaintype(s)—MIDIorBuschannels,forexample—
independentoftheirusagebytracks.Theymerelyneedtobedefinedas
EnvironmentObjectstobevisible.TheObjecttypestobedisplayedaredefinedby
anotherparameterwhichisnotshownintheparameterlist.Ifacontrolsurface
supportsswitchingtoGlobalView,itwillalsoallowyoutodefinewhichObjectsto
display.TheTrackMixerwindowcontentsautomaticallyfollowthestateoftheGlobal
Viewbuttons.ItalsosetsObjectfiltersinaccordancewiththeObjectclasses
activatedinGlobalView.
ÂArrange—ArrangeViewissimilartoMixerView,withoneexception:Namely,if
multipletracksplaybackviathesameEnvironmentObject,allofthesetrackswillbe
displayedonseparatechannelstrips.Thisishelpfulwhenusedinconjunctionwith
thenudgecommands,forexample.TheHidebuttonstatusistakenintoaccount,
withtrackshiddenintheArrangewindowalsobeinghiddenonthecontrolsurface.
Thesemodesaremutuallyexclusive,soifyou’reinoneViewmode,youcannotbein
theother.
ItisimportanttonotethattheMixervs.GlobalViewmodesisapropertyoftheControl
SurfaceGroup,notaglobalsetting.Soonegroupcandisplaybusses,whiletheother
showstracks,forexample.
MixerViewFaderBank
ThisparameteraffectstheTrackViewmodebyshiftingchannelsbythedefined
amount.Imaginethatyourcontrolsurfacehaseightchannelstrips,andyouwere
lookingataudiotracks1to8intheArrangewindow.Thesewouldappearaschannels
1to8onthecontrolsurface.UsingtheMixerViewFaderBankparameter,youcould
offsetthisviewbyadefinednumberofchannels,toseeaudiotracks3to11 , for
example.
GlobalViewFaderBank
TheGlobalViewFaderBankparameterperformsmuchliketheMixerViewFaderBank,
butonlyappliesifmultipleObjecttypesareenabled.WhensingleObjecttypesare
enabled,thereareseparatefaderbankparameters(thesearen’tdisplayedinthe
parameterlist).
Track/ChannelParameters
Thetrackorchannelparametersdefinethebehaviorofacontrolsurface’schannel/
trackcontrols.
TrackParameter
Definesthecurrenttrackassignmentbehaviorfortheencoders.Optionsare:
ÂVolume—encodersadjustchannelvolume.
ÂPan—encodersadjustchannelpanoramaposition.
ÂMode—encodersadjust/selectchannelmode(mono/stereo).
22 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
ÂInput—encodersadjust/selectchannelinputsource.
ÂOutput—encodersadjust/selectchanneloutput(mainouts/busses/surround).
ÂAutomation—encodersadjust/selectchannelautomationmode.
ÂGroup—encodersadjustgroupmembershipofthetrack.Editingtheparameter
allowsyoutoseteithernogrouporasinglegroup.Enablingmembershipofmultiple
groupsisnotpossiblehere.
ÂDisplayedparameter—encodersadjusttheautomationparameterdisplayedinthe
Arrangewindow.ThisisespeciallyusefulifyousetthecontrolsurfacetoArrange
Viewmode,andyourArrangewindowshowsmultiplesub-trackswithvarious
parameters.
SurroundParameter
Definesthedefaultpan/surroundassignmentbehaviorfortheencoders.Optionsare:
ÂAngle—encodersadjustsurroundangle.
ÂDiversity—encodersadjustsurrounddiversity(direction).
ÂLFE—encodersalterLFElevel.
ÂMode—encodersswitchbetweenthevarioussurroundformats.
ÂX—encodersadjustsurroundxposition.
ÂY—encodersadjustsurroundyposition.
ÂCenter—encodersadjusttheCenterLevelvaluesofasurroundoutputchannel.
Note:TheXandYparametersareadifferentrepresentationoftheAngleandDiversity
parameters,andthusareindependentfromthem.TheXandYparameterssupportthe
useofsurroundjoysticks.
EQBand
TheEQBandparameterallowsyoutoselectthecurrentEQband,ifyouwishtoedita
particularChannelEQorLinearPhaseEQparameterforalltracksintheEQMulti
ChannelView.
EQParameter
ThisparameterdetermineswhichparameteroftheselectedEQBandiseditedbythe
encodersinEQMultiChannelView:
ÂFrequency—encodersdeterminethefrequencyoftheselectedband.
ÂGain—encoderschangethegainoftheselectedEQband.FortheLowCut(band1)
andHighCut(band8)bandsoftheChannelandLinearPhaseEQ,thisparameter
controlstheslope.
ÂQ—encoderschangetheQfactoroftheselectedband.
ÂOn/Off—encodersbypasstheselectedEQband.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 23
EQParameterPage
TheEQParameterPageparameterdefinestheEQparameterdisplayedintheEQ
ChannelStripView.
Toexplain:TheChannelandLinearPhaseEQsfeature8bandsperaudiochannel,with
eachbandofferingfourparameters.Alloftheseparameterscanbeaccessedwithyour
controlsurface.
IfyouuseacontrolsurfacethatdoesnotdisplayallEQparametersatonce,youneed
tostepthroughtheparameter“pages.”Asanexample:Imagineyouareusinganeight
channelcontrolsurface.Youcandirectlyaffectparameters1to8withknobs/sliders1
to8—onceyou’veswitchedtoEQChannelStripEditView.Youthenneedtoswitchby
a“page”toaccessparameters9to16.
Send/Plug-inParameters
Theseparametersdefinehowyourcontrolsurfacecontrolssendandplug-in
parameters.
SendSlot
TheSendSlotparameterdeterminesthecurrentlyselectedSendslot.Normally,avalue
of1wouldbeused,asthisaccessesthefirst(top)Sendoneachchannel.Avalueof2
accessesthesecondSend,andsoon,toSend8.TheSendslotsareaccessedby
pressingtheUp/Downbuttonsonyourcontrolsurface—ifapplicable.
SendParameter
DefinestheSendparameter(tobeeditedwiththeencoders)whenintheSendMulti
Channelview:
ÂDestination:—encoderisusedtodeterminethebuschannelnumberfortheSend
slot.
ÂLevel—encoderisusedtoadjusttheSendlevel.
ÂPosition—encoderssetPreorPostfadermodes.
ÂMute—encodersmute/unmutetheselectedSendslot.
SendParameterPage
MuchliketheEQparameters,upto32parametersareavailableinSendChannelStrip
Viewforagivenchannel(EightSendslotsmultipliedbythefourparameterslisted
above).SendParameterPagedeterminesthecurrentpagefortheseparameters.
Split:no.ofupperparameters
Controlsurfacesthatsupportsplitmodeallowthedisplayoftwoseparateparameter
sectionswithinoneplug-in(orevendifferentplug-ins).TheyarecalledSplitUpperand
SplitLower.
24 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
ThisparameterdefineshowmanyencodersbelongtoSplitUpper,leavingthe
remainingencoderstoSplitLower.Avalueof0meansthatSplitModeisoff—withall
encodersassignedtotheSplitUpperarea.
InstrumentParameterPage
TheInstrumentParameterPageoptiondeterminestheparameter(countedfrom1)
whichisassignedtotheleft-mostencoderwheneditinganAudioInstrument.Thenext
Instrumentparameterisassignedtoencoder2,andsoon.
ThisappliestoSplitUpperwhenSplitModeisenabled.
InstParameterPage(SplitLower)
Asabove,butforSplitLower.
InsertSlot
DeterminesthecurrentInsertslotnumberforbothselectingaplug-in(inPlug-in
ChannelStripView)andeditingitsparameters.Avalueof1accessesthefirst(top)plug-
inslotoneachchannel.Avalueof2accessesthesecondplug-inslot,andsoon.
WithSplitModeenabled,thisappliestoSplitUpper.
InsertSlot(SplitLower)
AswithInsertSlot,butforSplitLower.
Plug-InParameterPage
AswithInstrumentParameterPage,butforeditingplug-ins.Havingtheseparameters
separateallowsyoutoquicklyswitchbetweeneditinganinstrumentandaneffecton
atrack,withouttheneedtoadjusttheparameterpageeverytime.
WithSplitModeenabled,thisappliestoSplitUpper.
Plug-InParameterPage(SplitLower)
AswithPlug-InParameterPage,butforSplitLower.
Track
SpecifiesthecurrentlydisplayedtrackforChannelStripViews.WithSplitMode
enabled,thisappliestoSplitUpper.
Track(SplitLower)
AswithTrack,butforSplitLower.
TrackLock
Whenthisparameterissetto“on,”selectingatrackinLogicdoesnotchangetheTrack
andTrack(SplitLower)parameters.Inotherwords,thecontrolsurfacegroupcontinues
todisplaythesametrack,independentfromthecurrentlyselectedtrack.
WhenTrackLockisdisabled,thecontrolsurfacegroupautomaticallyswitchestothe
selectedtrack,wheneveratrackisselected.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 25
OtherParameters
ThefollowingsectiondescribestheTrackNameFormat,ParameterPageShiftMode,
RelativeChangeMode,MixGroupandGroupParameterPageparameters.
TrackNameFormat
Changesthetracknamedisplaytoshowthetracknamealone,orthetrackname,and
itstracknumber.Asanexample,atracknamed“Audio1”mayactuallybeplacedon
track12intheArrangewindow.Whenavalueof#:Nameistoggled,“Audio1”wouldbe
displayedas“12:Au1”.
ParameterPageShiftMode
Defineswhethertheparameterisshiftedbyanentire“page”orbyoneparameter.
RelativeChangeMode
Thisdeterminesthebehaviorofcontrollerassignmentsthatfeaturesarelativevalue
changemode(forexamplerotaryencoders).
ÂCoarse:theparametercanbeadjustedincoarsesteps.
ÂFull:Inthismode,aturntotherightsetstheencodertoitsmaximumvalue.Aturnto
theleftsetstheencodertoitsminimumvalue.Theencoderalsostopsatitsdefault
value.Asanexample:WhenthePanknobissomewhereleftofcenter,turningthe
encodertotherightwillinitiallysetthePanparametertoitscenter(defaultvalue)
position,withafurtherright-turnsettingthefullright(maximumvalue)position.
ÂFine:thevalueisincremented/decrementedinfinesteps—byonetickor“unit,”for
example.Inthismode,thestandardadjustableresolutionisignored,andthehighest
possibleresolutionisused.Asanexample,usingtheSampleDelayparameter:every
encoderrotationtickin/decreasesthevalueby1ms,regardlessoftheresolution
value.
Note:Coarseisthedefaultmode.
MixGroup
WheninGroupEditmode,thisparameterdefinestheeditedgroup.
GroupParameterPage
AswiththeInstrumentParameterPage,butfortheparametersoftheeditedgroup.
26 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
ControlSurfacePreferences
TheControlSurfacepreferenceswindowisaccessibleviatheLogic>Preferences>
ControlSurfaces>Preferencesmenu.
Note:YoucanalsousetheglobalControlSurfacesPreferenceskeycommand.
General
ThefollowingsectionoutlinestheGeneralcontrolsurfacepreferences.
ResolutionofRelativeControls
Thisdefinesthedefaultresolutionofcontrolsthatchangevaluesinarelativemanner.
Thedefaultis128 steps.
Asanexample:adjustingtheSampleDelay(valuerange0to4000ms)in/decreases
thevalueby40mswitheveryencoderrotation“tick,”ifresolutionissetto100.
MaximumMIDIBandWidth
ThissliderdeterminesthemaximumamountofMIDIbandwidththatcanbeusedby
yourcontrolsurface.Bydefault,thisissetto50%,whichshouldbesuitableformost
situations.YoucanadjustthevalueifyoufindthatyourMIDIorautomationplaybackis
beingaffected.
Touchingfaderselectstrack
Activationofthisparameterwillautomaticallyselectthetrackthatcorrespondstothe
selectedfader.Yourequireadevicethatfeaturestouch-sensitivefadersforthis
functionalitytowork.
Jogresolutiondependsonhorizontalzoom
Ifyourcontrolsurfacefeaturesajog/shuttlewheel(orsimilar),theprecisionofany
scrubbingisaffectedbythehorizontalzoomlevelofLogic.Toretainaconsistent
resolution,regardlessofLogicwindowzoomlevels,disablethischeckbox.
PickupMode
Ifyourcontrolsurfacedoesnotfeaturemotorizedfadersandknobs,parameter
changes—causedbyplayingbackexistingautomation—arenotreflectedonits
surface.
SuchcontrolsurfacesusuallyofferaPickupmode.InPickupmode,thecurrentvalue
mustbereached(“pickedup”)bythecontrolsurfacebeforeavaluechangecanoccur.
Thispreventssudden“jumps”ofparametervaluesafterparameterchangescausedby
playingbackautomation.Adisplay(usuallyapairofLED’s)willindicatethedirection/
distanceyouneedtomovethecontrollertomatch(alsoknownas“NULL”)thesettings
showninLogic.Onceyouhavematchedtheonscreenvalues,deactivatePickupmode,
andstartautomating.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 27
WhenthePickupmodeoptionisdisabled,adjustingafadermodifiestheparameter
immediately.
MultipleControlsperParameter
Theseparametersdeterminewhetherone,ormultiple,encodersareusedper
parameterwheneditingplug-insoraudioinstruments.
Whenmultipleencodersareusedperparameter,theencodersaresubdividedinto
groups(forexample1/2,3/4,5/6,7/8).Thefirstencoderofeachsub-divisioncontrols
theparametershowninthedisplay.Theremainingencoder(s)areinactive.
Usingmorethanoneencoderperparametershowsfewerparametersatanygiven
time,butyougainspaceontheLCDtocaterforlongerparameternamesandvalues.
ThemorecontrolsurfacesyouhavewithinaControlSurfaceGroup,themoreyou
benefitfromthisfeature.
TheMultiplecontrolsperparameterpull-downmenudefinesthemaximumnumberof
encoderswhichwillbeusedforasingleparameter.
Â1:Parametersarealwaysdisplayedusingoneencoderperparameter,withtheleast
spaceavailableforparameternameandvalueintheLCD.
Â2:Oneachunit,encoders1and2areusedforthefirstparameter,encoders3and4
forthesecond,andsoon.
Â4:Oneachunit,encoders1to4areusedforthefirstparameter,encoders5to8for
thesecond,andsoon.
OnlywhenallParametersfitinonePage
Whenthisoptionischecked,thedefinednumberofencodersareonlyusedwhen
therearesufficientencodersavailabletoshowallparameterswithoutchangingpages.
Asanexample:
ÂYouhaveaLogicControlandtwoLogicControlXTs,providingyouwith24encoders.
ÂAplug-inwith13parameterswillbeshownwithoneencoderperparameter.Eleven
encoderswillremainunused.
ÂAplug-inwith11 parameterswillbeshownwithtwoencodersperparameter.Two
encoderswillremainunused(aswilltheinactiveencodersoftheabovementioned
sub-divisions).
Whentheoptionisunchecked,multipleencodersareusedforeachparameter,which
mayrequirescrolling.Thiswouldnotbethecaseifonlyoneencoderwasusedforeach
parameter.
28 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
ShowValueUnitsFor:
Allowsyoutoadjustwhetherparametervalueswillbeappendedbythemeasurement
“unit,”whereapplicable—“Hz”or“%”,forexample.Youcansetthisoptionseparatelyfor
Instrument/Plug-inparametersandVolumeandotherparameters.Ifyoucandowithout
thevalueunits,thedisplayislesscluttered.
ControllerAssignments
TheControllerAssignmentsbuttonlaunchestheControllerAssignmentsEditor.
Setup
TheSetupbuttonlaunchestheControlSurfacesSetupwindow.
HelpTags
ControlSurfacesthatofferfreelyprogrammabledisplayswithmorethansixcharacters
perline/segmentofthedisplay,canuseControlSurfacesHelpTags.TheseHelpTags
aresimilartoLogicHelpTags,showingadditionalinformationduringuse.Youcan
determinethetypeofinformationdisplayedintheHelpTagspaneoftheControl
Surfacespreferences.
WhileEditingShowLongNamesFor:
ÂParameterName—Whileeditingaparameter,theupperLCDlinedisplaysthefull
parametername,ratherthananabbreviatedformofit.
ÂParameterValue—Whileeditingaparameter,thelowerLCDlinedisplaysthefull
parametervalue.IftheShowvalueunitforparameterbox(seebelow)ischecked,it
willbeappendedbythemeasurementunit,whereapplicable—“dB”,“Hz”or“%”.
Note:Thefollowingoptionsonlyhaveaneffectifatleastoneofthetwoparameters
aboveisactive.
Displayduration(s)
UsethemousetoadjustthetimethatparameternamesandvaluesremainontheLCD
display,followingselection/adjustments.
Allowmultipleinfo
Thisdeterminesthebehaviorwhenyoueditmultipleparameterssimultaneously.When
enabled:thelongnameinforemainsinthedisplay,untilthemostrecentlyedited
parameter’sdisplaytimesout.Thismaycauseoverlappingtext.Whendisabled:the
longnamedisplayisonlyshownforthemostrecentlyeditedparameter.Thiscancause
flicker.
Showinfowhenselectingtracks
Whenthisoptionischecked,andyouselectatrack,youwillsee“Selected”intheupper
row,andtheselectedtrack’snameinthelowerrowoftheLCD.Youcandisablethis
feature,ifyoufinditdisconcerting.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 29
Showinfowheneditingvolume
Whenthisoptionischecked,andyoueditatrack’svolume,youwillsee“Volume”inthe
upperrowandthenewvolumevalueinthelowerrow.Youcandisablethisfeature,if
youfinditdisconcerting.
ShowValueUnitsFor:
Allowsyoutoadjustwhetherparametervalueswillbeappendedbythemeasurement
“unit,”whereapplicable—“Hz”or“%”,forexample.Youcansetthisoptionseparatelyfor
Instrument/Plug-inparametersandVolumeandotherparameters.Ifyoucandowithout
thevalueunits,thedisplayislesscluttered.
Note:Thisparameteronlyapplieswhileediting.
CustomizingControlSurfaces
Logicallowsyoutoreprogramexistingassignmentsforsupportedcontrolsurfacesand
toprogramnewassignmentsforunsupportedcontrolsurfaces.Thisfacilityallowsyou
toextendtheuseoffaders,knobs,andswitches,eitherdirectlyorthroughtheuseof
modifiercommands.Asanexample,ThebuttonsF1toF8oftheLogicControlare
assignedtoscreensets1to8bydefault.Whenreassigneddirectly,orcombinedwith
theShift,Option,Control,andCommandmodifiers(usedinanycombination),youcan
freelyassignanycommandtothesefunctionkeys(F1toF8).
ToassignaMIDIcontroltoaparameter:
1Clickthedestinationparameterthatyouwantto“teach”Logic.
2ActivateLearnbypressingCommand-L(default),orviatheLogic>Preferences>Control
Surfaces>LearnAssignmentfor“xxx”menuoption(theparameternameisappendedto
themenuitemtext).
3The(small)assignmenteditorwindowislaunched,withtheLearnModebutton
enabled.
ÂIfyoucontinuetoholddownthecomputer’sCommandkey(orwhatevermodifier
keyisassignedtothekeycommand),aHelpTagwillindicatewhatneedstobedone
next(movecontrol,forexample).
ÂIfMIDImessagesarereceivedwhiletheCommandkeyishelddown,releasingthe
keyclosestheHelpTagwindow,andthelearnprocedureiscompleted.
Note:IfnoMIDImessagesarereceived,releasingtheCommand(modifier)key(s)leaves
theLearnModebuttonenabled,allowingyoutoimmediatelyretrythegenerationof
theintendedcontrolmessage.YouwillneedtodisabletheLearnModebutton
manually,oncetheprocedureiscompleted.
Toabortthelearnprocedure:
mEitherpressCommand-Lasecondtime,orclicktheLearnModebutton.
30 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
Thiswill,however,resultinanew,unfinishedassignment.Youcanre-enabletheLearn
Modebuttontoassignamessage.
TodeleteaMIDIcontrolassignment:
1Clickthedestinationparameterthatyouwouldliketodelete.
2SelecttheLogic>Preferences>ControlSurfaces>DeleteAssignmentfor“xxx”menu
option(theparameternameisappendedtothemenuitemtext),pressthebackspace
key—oryoumayusetheEdit>Clearmenuoption.
Toassignacontrolsurfacebuttontoakeycommand:
1SelectthedesiredkeycommandintheKeyCommandswindow.
2ClicktheLearnNewAssignmentbutton.
3PressacontrolsurfacebuttonthatsendsaMIDImessage.
Note:Afterabout5ms,theLearnNewAssignmentbuttonisautomaticallydeactivated.
Thisisdesignedtopreventrecordingofabuttonreleasemessage.
Itisalsopossibletoassignakeycommandtoabutton/keyreleasemessage:
1Simplypressandholdthedesiredbutton/keybeforeyouenabletheLearnNew
Assignmentbutton.
2Whenyoureleasethebutton/key,theselectedkeycommandisassignedtothebutton
releasemessage.
Todeleteakeycommandassignment:
1SelectthedesiredkeycommandintheKeyCommandswindow.
2PresstheBackspacekey.
ChanginganExistingAssignment
TheLearnprocedureopenstheAssignmentEditorinEasyView,whichoffersan
overviewofthemostimportantparameters,allowingyoutotweakthenewly-created
assignmentinthefollowingways:
ÂControlName(Learnedforunsupporteddevices;nameofcontrolforsupported
devices).
ÂClass(Track,forexample).
ÂObject(FaderBank,forexample).
ÂParameter(VolumeorPlug-inparameter5—relativetotheparameterbank,for
example).
ÂValueChangemessage(Displayonly).
ÂMode(Direct,Toggle,Scaled,Relative,Rotate,X-OR).
ÂForOn/Offparameters,themodeissettoTogglebydefault.Otherwiseitissetto
Scaledifanabsolutecontrol(fader,pot)hasbeenrecognized,ortoRelativeifan
encoderhasbeenrecognized.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 31
ÂMultiply,withshortcutsfor+1and–1(–1fordecrementing).
Note:FordetailsontheabovementionedAssignmentparametersread“Assignment
Parameters”onpage35.Forafullviewofallparameters,enabletheExpertView
option.
ShortcutsforDefiningMultipleAssignments
IfyouwanttodefinemultipleassignmentsintheControllerAssignmentEditor,youcan
usethefollowingshortcuts:
Scenario1:assignfaders1to16tovolumeoftracks1to16
1Learnvolumetrack1forfader1.
2Learnvolumetrack16forfader16.
3Asthetrack“distance”(15)isthesameasthecontrollernumberdistanceforthetwo
mostrecentlylearnedassignments,a“Doyouwanttofillupinbetween?”message
appears.SelectOKtoautomaticallyfillthefaderswithcorrespondingVolume
assignmentsforeachtrack.
Note:Thisfeaturealsoworksforanyothertrackparameter(Pan,Solo,Mute,andsoon).
Scenario2:assignknobs1to16toplug-inparameters1to16
1Learnparameter1forknob1.
2Learnparameter16forknob16.
Note:TheparameterenumerationisshowninthePlug-inwindow’sControlView.
3Asthegapbetweenparameternumbers(15)isthesameasthegapbetweencontroller
numbersforthetwomostrecentlylearnedassignments,a“Doyouwanttofillupin
between?”messageappears.SelectOKtoautomaticallyfilltheknobswith
correspondingParameterassignmentsforeach.
Note:Thisfeaturealsoworksforinstrumentparameters.Currently,thisonlyworksfor
knobsthatsendasinglechannelmessage,wherethefirstdatabyteisthecontroller
numberandtheseconddatabyteisthevalue.Alternatively,thecontrollernumbercan
beencodedintheMIDIchannel,withafixedfirstdatabyte.
Zones,Modes,andAssignments
Youcandefine“groups”ofcontrolsonacontrolsurfacethatcanbeswitchedbetween
differentoperatingmodes.Asanexample,theLogicControlrotaryencoderscanbe
usedtocontrolPan,SendLevelorplug-inparameters.
Such“groups”arecalledZones.Thedifferentoperationsthatcanbeperformedwithina
ZonearecalledModes.
AZonecontainsoneormoreModes,oneofwhichistheactiveMode.AZonemayalso
containmodelessassignments—assignmentswhicharealwaysactive.
32 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
Thereasonforthisstructureisthatyoucanplacemodelessassignmentsnearertothe
modalassignmentstheyareassociatedwith.Asanexample,wherepressingand
releasingtheOptionbuttonswitchesbetweentwomodesfortheFunctionkeysofan
assignment.
AModecontainsanynumberofassignments.OnlytheactiveMode’sassignmentsare
processedforincomingMIDIandfeedback.AssignmentsofinactiveModesareignored.
AZone’sactiveModecanbeswitchedbyspecialAssignments(seebelow).
TherecanbemultipleZones.Asexamples,onefortheencodersandasecondonethat
switchestheF1toF8keystodifferentfunctions.
ZonesandModescanbedefinedacrossmultiplecontrolsurfaces,tocreateControl
SurfaceGroups.
YoucanvisualizetheControlSurfaceSystemasahierarchicallist.Asanexample:
Zone1
ÂModelessAssignment
ÂModelessAssignment
ÂMode1
ÂModalAssignment
ÂModalAssignment
ÂMode2(active)
ÂModalAssignment
ÂModalAssignment
ÂModalAssignment
ÂModalAssignment
ÂMode3
ÂModalAssignment
Zone2
ÂMode4(active)
ÂModalAssignment
ÂMode5
ÂModalAssignment
ÂModalAssignment
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 33
ReassigningaControl
Ifyouwanttoreassignacontrol,theproceduredependsonthecurrentstateofthe
control.
Case1:Controliscurrentlyactive(anassignmentforthiscontrolispartofanactive
Mode).
Ifyouattempttolearnanassignmentforan“active”controller,thefollowingmessage
isdisplayed:“Thiscontroliscurrentlyassignedtoxxx.Doyouwanttoreassignthe
control?”
ÂCancel—Deletesthelearnedassignment.
ÂParallelassignment—Retainsthenewassignment.Typicalusage:oneknobcontrols
multipleparametersasamacro.
ÂReassign—Deletesallexistingactiveassignmentsforthisparameter.Typicalusage:
reassigninganF1toF8keytoanewkeycommand.
ÂCreatenewmode—Createsanewmodeandplacestheassignmentintothenew
mode.Inthisscenario,youwillneedtolearnanassignmenttoswitchbetweenthe
oldandnewmodes.
Shouldyouchoosethelatteroption,theControllerAssignmentEditoropensinExpert
view,withthenewmodeselected,andawarningicon.Ifyoumovethemousecursor
overtheicon,aHelpTagindicatesthat:“Thereisnomodechangeassignmentyetto
switchtothismode.Pleaseclick“LearnModeChange”tocreateone.”
Case2:Controliscurrentlyinactive(anassignmentforthiscontrolispartofan
inactivemode).
Thelearnedassignmentismovedtotheactivemodeofthezonewheretheinactive
assignmentwasfound.
Typicalusageofthisfacility:Supportedcontrolsurfaceshaveemptyuserpages
available,allowingfornewencoderassignments.Youwouldselectusermode,and
thenlearnanassignmentfortheencoder.
Youcandefinemultiplepagesforacontrolsurface.
Cases1and2canoccursimultaneously.
ReassigningaParameter
LogicallowsyoutoreassignaparameterthatisalreadyassignedtoaMIDIcontrol.The
proceduredependsonthecurrentstateoftheassignment.
Case1:Assignmenttoaparameterthatiscurrentlyactive(asitispartofanactive
mode)
Ifyouattempttochangeanexisting“active”parameterassignment,thefollowing
messageisdisplayed:“Thisdestinationparameteriscurrentlyassignedforcontrolxxx.
Doyouwanttoreassigntheparameter?”
34 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
ÂCancel—Deletesthelearnedassignment.
ÂParallelassignment—Retainsthenewassignment.Typicalusage:Oneknobcontrols
multipleparametersasamacro.
ÂReassign—Deletesallexistingactiveassignmentsforthisparameter.Typicalusage:
ReassigninganF1toF8keytoanewkeycommand.
Case2:Assignmenttoaparameteriscurrentlyinactive
Ifanassignmenttoaparameteriscurrentlyinactive(asitispartofaninactivemode),
nospecialactionisrequired.
TheControllerAssignmentsEditor
TheControllerAssignmentsEditorisopenedviatheLogic>Preferences>Control
Surfaces>ControllerAssignmentsmenuitem.
ItallowsyoutoeditallassignmentsoftheControllerAssignmentstable.Thistableisa
partoftheControlSurfacesPreferencesandisstored(alongwithallothercontrol
surfacesupportsettings)inthe~/Library/Preferences/com.apple.Logic.pro.csfile.
TheControllerAssignmentsEditorofferstwoviewmodes:EasyandExpert.Theview
modescanbeswitchedviatheExpertViewoptionatthetopofthewindow.
EasymodeisdesignedtomakelearningTrackparameterassignmentsasfastand
efficientaspossible.Therefore,thiswindowonlyshowsTrackparameters—whenfirst
opened.AfterswitchingtoExpertviewandmanuallychoosinganotherparameter
class,thecorrespondingparametersarealsoshowninEasyview.Itisgenerally
recommendedthatEasyviewisonlyusedforTrackparameterassignments.
Easymodeoffersanoverviewofthefollowingparameters:
ÂParameter:Displayscleartextoftheaddressedparameter.
ÂTrack(default):Thisfieldcanbeusedtospecifythetrackparameteryouwouldlike
toassign.YoucanchoosebetweentheSelectedoption(whichisthedefault,if
creatingassignmentsontheselectedtrack)orafixedtracknumber(ifyouwantto
setupyourcontrolsasamixersurface).
ÂInputmessage:Displaystheincomingmessagedata.
Note:FordetailsontheabovementionedAssignmentparametersread“Assignment
Parameters”onpage35.Forafullviewofallparameters,enabletheExpertViewoption.
Onlyonesetofassignmentparametersarevisibleatatime.Youcanchoosethe
desiredassignmentwiththeleft/rightarrowsatthebottomofthewindow.Ifyou
activatetheFollowoptionatthetopoftheControllerAssignmentswindow,the
windowalwaysselectstheassignmentthatmatchesthemostrecentlyreceived
incomingMIDImessage.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 35
InExpertmode,therearefourre-sizablecolumns:
ÂZone—SelectstheZonethatcontainstheModesandassignmentsbeingedited.The
firstentry“(NoZone)”isforzonelessassignments.Double-clickaZonenametoedit
it.
ÂMode—SelectstheModethatcontainstheassignmentsbeingedited.Thefirstentry
“(NoMode)”isformode-lessassignments.Double-clickaModenametoeditit.
SelectingaModeinthelistalsomakesittheZone’sactiveMode.TheactiveModeis
markedwithanarrow.
ÂControl/Parameter—Selectstheassignmentdisplayedintheeditortotheright.
MultipleselectionispossibleforoperationsintheEditmenu.Inthisscenario,
however,onlythefirstselectedassignmentisdisplayed.Theleftcolumndisplaysthe
controlname,therightcolumnthecontrolledparameter(inanabbreviatedform).
ÂAssignmentParameters—Displaysallparametersofanassignment.Seethenext
section.
IfyouactivatetheFollowoptionatthetopoftheControllerAssignmentEditor,the
windowalwaysselectstheassignmentthatmatchesthemostrecentlyreceived
incomingMIDImessage.
AssignmentParameters
ThefollowingsectioncoversallparametersthatcanbeeditedintheController
AssignmentEditor.
ControlName
Nameofthecontrol(Fader1,forexample).ThisisLearnedbydefaultforassignments
createdwiththeLearnfunction(seeabove)fromsupportedcontrolsurfaces.This
nameisforinformationpurposesonlyandhasnoinfluenceonfunctionality.
Label
Textdisplayedoncontrolsurfacesthatfeatureadisplay(andaresupportedbyaplug-
in).A@characterstartsanescapesequencewhichactsasaplaceholderfor
dynamicallygeneratedtext.Theescapesequenceconsistsofthreecharacters:@and
twoadditionalcharacters:
36 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
FirstCharacter:
SecondCharacter:
Example:“Send@s#”shows“Send1”,“Send2”,andsoon.
FlipGroup
Whenset(toanyvalueotherthan“none”),thisnumberdefinesacounterpartforFlip
Mode.BysettingafaderandanencodertothesameFlipGroup,forexample,theyare
coupled.Toset“none,”enter0.
Exclusive
Onlyforsupportedcontrolsurfaces:whentheExclusivecheckboxisenabled,the
assignmentdeactivatesallotherassignmentsthathaveExclusivedisabled(forthesame
control).Thislimitstheoverwritingofamodelessassignmenttoparticularmodes.
Example:Fadersnormallycontrolvolume.Ifyouwanttocreateamodewherefaders
controlsendlevel,enableExclusive.
Class
Thispop-upmenucanbeusedtodefinetheassignmentclassor,putanotherway,
whattypeofdestinationparameteriscontrolled.Thefollowingsectionexplainsall
availableClassoptions.
Character Meaning
tTrack
r Surround
sSendslot
SAllSends
eEQband
E allEQs
pPlug-inInsertslot
iInstrument
Character Meaning
#Numberofabove(tracknumber,Sendslot,EQband,Plug-inslot)
nNameofabove
pNameofparameteraddressedbytheassignment
PNameoffirstparameter
oParameteroffset,countedfrom1
OMaximumparameteroffset,countedfrom1
bParameterbank(=parameteroffset/banksize),countedfrom1
Btotalnumberofbanks(=parameteroffset/banksize),countedfrom1
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 37
ModeChange
TheModeChangeoptionallowsyoutouseanassignmenttoactivateamodeina
Zone.AnadditionalModepop-upmenuappearsbelowtheClassmenu,offering
differentModesyoucanswitchto.Asanexample:TheAssignmentbuttonsonaLogic
ControlchooseseveralModesfortheencoders.
Note:TheModethatisrecalledalsodependsontheoptionsetintheValuesection’s
Modemenu(See“Mode”onpage43.).Thefollowingtableexplainshowthedifferent
ValueModestakeeffect.
Global
TheGlobaloptionallowsyoutouseanassignmenttocontrolglobalparameters.An
additionalGlobalpop-upmenuappearsbelowtheClassmenu,offeringtheparameters
listedinthefollowingtable.
ValueModeoption Explanation
DirectThestatedModeisactivatedintheZoneitbelongsto.Itisnotnecessaryfor
theModeChangeassignmenttobelocatedinthesameZone.
Example:WhileShiftishelddown,buttonXswitchestheencoderstoEQview.
TheShiftandXbuttonsareinZoneA,buttheencodersareinZoneB.
Allothervaluemodes:OnlytheModesoftheZonetheModeChange
assignmentislocatedincanberecalled.Thedestinationparameterminimum
isthisZone’sfirstMode,andthemaximumistheZone’slastMode.
Toggle AbuttonmighttogglebetweentheZone’sfirstModeandthestatedMode
Relative UsefulforsteppingupanddownthroughModesofaZoneusingtwobuttons,
orforchoosingamodeusinganencoder.
Rotate Usefulforsteppingthroughallmodesusingasinglebutton.Ajogwheel,for
example:Off→Scrub→Shuttle→Off
GlobalOptions Explanation
SPL SongPositionLine;Textfeedbackinformatofforegroundwindow(beatsor
timecode)
SPL(Beats) SongPositionLine;Textfeedbackinbeatsformat
SPL(TimeCode) SongPositionLine;Textfeedbackintimecodeformat
SPL(Beats,
Scrubbing)
SongPositionLine;Textfeedbackinbeatsformat.Valuechangedoesnotset
SPLdirectly,butinitiatesscrubbing.Thevaluedefinesthescrubbingspeed
MoveLocators Movesleftandrightlocators
LeftLocatorSetsleftlocator
RightLocatorSetsrightlocator
MoveDrop MovesDropInandDropOutlocators
DropInLocatorSetsDropInlocator
DropOutLocators SetsDropOutlocator
38 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
Note:Alloptionslistedinthetableaboveworkonlyinrelativemode.Seethe“Clock
Part”sub-parameter.
DependentoftheoptionchosenintheGlobalmenu,youhaveaccesstothefollowing
twoadditionalparameters:
ÂClockPart—Choosestheresolutionoftheparameterchange:Bar,Beat,Format,
Ticks,CycleLength
ÂMarkerNo—Determinesthedestinationmarkernumber
MarkerPosition Editspositionofcurrentmarker
MarkerLength Editslengthofcurrentmarker
GlobalOptions Explanation
GlobalOptions Explanation
Nudgeselected
Regions/Events
NudgestheselectedRegionsoreventsbythechosenNudgeValue(seebelow)
AnySolo Feedbackonly,usedfor“RudeSoloLight”.OnifanySolo(trackorRegion)
switchisenabled
NudgeValue NudgeValueusedforNudgeselectedRegions/Events.Possiblevaluesare:Tick,
Format,Beat,Bar,Frame,1/2Frame
ScrubStatus SetsthescrubbingstatusforparameterSPL(beats,scrubbing).Possiblevalues
are:setclock,audioscrubbing,Shuttle
Automationofall
tracks
Setstheautomationmodeofalltracks.Possiblevaluesare:Off,Read,Touch,
Latch,Write,MIDI
AlertText,Alert
Button,AlertIcon
Usedbyplug-instodefinespecialalertmode.
Dummy Nofunction;Usedtotemporarilydisableamodelessassignment,using
“Exclusive”
Cycle SetsCyclemode
Drop SetsDropmode
GotoMarker SetstheSPLtomarkernumber
GroupClutch SetstheAutomationGroupClutch;AutomationGroupsaredisabledwhenthe
Clutchisenabled.Forbuttons,settheGroupClutchto1whenthebuttonis
pressed,andsetitto0whenthebuttonisreleased
ActiveSense UsedbytheHUItoprocessincoming“ActiveSensing”messages
ShuttleSpeed SetsShuttleSpeeddirectly;Useforshuttleringsthatsendanabsolutevalue
WaveformZoom SetsWaveformzoominactiveArrangewindow,ifopenandinforeground
Quantizevalue SetstheQuantizevalueinthecurrentwindow(ifthisparameterisavailable)
FormatSetstheFormatvalueinthecurrentwindow(ifthisparameterisavailable)
HorizontalZoom Setshorizontalzoominthecurrentwindow(ifthisparameterisavailable)
VerticalZoom Setsverticalzoominthecurrentwindow(ifthisparameterisavailable)
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 39
Track
TheTrackoptionallowsyoutouseanassignmenttosetatrackparameter.An
additionalTrackpop-upmenuappearsbelowtheClassmenu,offeringtheparameters
listedinthefollowingtable.
IfyouchoosetheFaderBank,Index,Bus,Output,orMasteroptionintheTrackpop-up
menu,thefollowingtwoparametersarealsoavailable:
ÂNo.—A0-basedoffsetwhichisaddedtothetracknumber.Typicalusage:Fader1
usesoffset0,Fader2usesoffset1andsoon.
ÂParameter—Cleartextoftheaddressedparameter.CanonlybesetbytheLearn
Assignmentforxxxmenuitem.Notethatforplug-inandinstrumentparameters,
ParameterPageoffsetsapply,allowingyoutoshifttheparameteraddressingupand
down.
Key
IfyouchoosetheKeyoptionintheClassmenu,akeypressisemulated.Afieldappears
belowtheClassmenu,allowingyoutoinputthedesiredkey.
KeyCommand
IfyouchoosetheKeyCommandoptionintheClassmenu,akeycommandisexecuted.
AfieldappearsbelowtheClassmenu,wherethekeycommandthatshouldbe
executedisdisplayed.
Somekeycommandsprovideon/offorenabled/disabledfeedback.Thiscanonlybeset
byusingtheLearnNewAssignmentbuttonintheKeyCommandswindow.
TrackOptions Explanation
FaderBank ThisaddressesatrackintheControlSurfaceGroup’scurrentViewmode(Mixer,
Global,Arrange),dependingontheControlSurfaceGroup’scurrentFaderBank
valueforthisMode(seebelow).
Example:TheViewmodeisMixer,theMixerviewFaderBankisfive,andthe
numbernexttothisparameteristwo.Thus,theeighthtrackintheMixerview
isaddressed(FaderBankandNo.are0-based,soadd1)
Selected ThisnormallycorrespondstotheselectedArrangetrack.Exception:ifthe
ControlSurfaceGroup’sTrackLockparameterisenabled,then“Selected”
correspondstothetrackthatwasselectedwhenTrackLockwasenabled
Index SameasFaderBankoption,butdoesn’tdependonthecurrentFaderBank
value
Bus AnAudioBus.No.defineswhichBusisaddressed(again:0-based;toaddress
Bus2,useavalueof1)
Output SameasBusoption,butforOutputObjects
Master TheMasterOutputObject;Ifitdoesnotexistinthesong,thefirstOutput
Objectisaddressed
40 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
Ifyouwantyourkeycommandassignmenttoberepeatedlyexecuted,enabletheKey
RepeatcheckboxatthebottomoftheKeyCommandAssignmentsEditor.Forfurther
information,see“KeyRepeatCheckbox”onpage44.
ControlSurfaceGroup
IfyouchoosetheControlSurfaceGroupoptionintheClassmenu,youcanseta
propertyfortheControlSurfaceGroupthattheassignmentbelongsto.AParameter
menuappearsbelowtheClassmenu,whereyoucanchoosebetweentheoptions
describedin“ControlSurfaceGroupParameters”onpage19,withtheadditionslisted
inthefollowingtable.
Note:AssignmentsforunsupportedcontrolsurfacesalwaysbelongtothefirstControl
SurfaceGroup.
IfyouchooseaFaderBankorParameterPageoptionintheParametermenu,the
followingBankTypeoptionsarealsoavailable.
ÂByOne—Thefaderbankorparameterpageisshiftedbyonetrackorparameter.
ÂByBank—Thefaderbankorparameterpageisshiftedbythenumberofdisplayed
tracksorparameters.
ÂCSGroupSetting—Thefaderbankorparameterpageisshiftedbythevaluedefined
bythe“ParameterShiftMode”ControlSurfaceGroupParameter.
ParameterOption AdditionalInfo
CurrentModeFaderBank MapstotheFaderBankforthecurrentlyusedViewmode(Mixer,Global,
Arrange).Thisway,youneedonlyoneassignmentperleft/rightbuttonfor
allViewModes.
GlobalViewFilter Whenthisparameterisselected,eightadditionalswitchesfortheeight
objectclassesaredisplayedwhentheViewmodeisGlobal.Dependingon
theValueMode,theseswitchesdefinewhichobjectsaredisplayed(by
using“Direct”mode)orwhicharetoggled(byusing“X-OR”mode).
MIDITracksFaderBank;
InputsFaderBank;
AudioTracksFaderBank;
InstrumentsFaderBank;
AuxFaderBank;
BussesFaderBank;
OutputFaderBank;
UserFaderBank;
TheseFaderBankparametersareusedinGlobalViewwhenonlyone
objectclassisdisplayed.Thisway,youcanswitchbetweenseveralobject
classeswhileretainingthecurrentFaderBankforeachclass.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 41
AutomationGroup
IfyouchoosetheAutomationGroupoptionintheClassmenu,youcanusethe
assignmenttosetanautomationgroupparameter.
AParameterGroupfieldthatallowsyoutodeterminetheeditedgroupappearsbelow
theClassmenu.Current(enteredwith“0”)meansthegroupselectedintheAutomation
GroupControlSurfaceGroupparameter.
TheadditionalParametermenuallowsyoutosettheautomationgroupparameter.For
furtherinformation,seetheGroupSettingssectionintheLogicPro7ReferenceManual.
MIDIInput
IncomingMIDImessagesareonlyprocessedonMIDIInput.Whenthisparameteris
changed,allotherassignmentsusingthesameinputwillalsohavetheirinputchanged
accordingly.Iftheassignmentbelongstoasupportedcontrolsurface,thedevice’sMIDI
InputwillalsochangeintheSetupwindow.Thisfeatureallowsyoutocreatedefault
assignmentsforanewcontrolsurface,whichotheruserscanuseimmediately.Todo
so,theysimplyneedtoplaceyourcom.apple.Logic.cspreferencesfileintotheir
Preferencesfolder,opentheControllerAssignmentsEditorandchangeone
assignment’sMIDIInputparameterinaccordancewiththeirMIDIsetup.
ValueChange
TheincomingMIDImessage(s)thatcauseavaluechangeinthedestinationparameter
aredisplayedhere.ToedittheseMIDImessages,switchtotheExpertViewbyactivating
thecorrespondingcheckboxintheupperrightcorneroftheControllerAssignments
Editor.
IntheExpertViewyou’llfindtwofields:theloweroneisonlyadisplaythatshowsthe
ValueChangemessageinplaintext.Theupperfielddisplayallowsthemessagestobe
viewedandeditedasasequenceofbytes,displayedinhexadecimal.Thereare
placeholdersforthevariablepart:
ÂLo7:Low7bitsofthevalue
ÂHi7:High7bitsofthevalue
IfthereisonlyaLo7placeholderinthemessage,thevalueistreatedas7bit.Ifthereis
alsoaHi7placeholder,thevalueistreatedas14bit.TheorderofLo7andHi7is
honored,andtheremaybeconstantbytesinbetween.Thisallowsyoutodefine
ControlChangeLSBandMSBportions.Asanexample:B008Hi7B028Lo7
Note:WhenenteringmultipleMIDImessages,donotuseRunningStatus.Alwayswrite
downtheentireMIDImessage(s),ensuringthatyourepeatthestatusbyte,evenifit’s
thesame.
42 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
IfthemessagedoesnotcontainLo7orHi7placeholders,anincomingvalueof1is
assumed.Thisistypicalforpressedorreleasedbuttons.Alsoseethe“Multiply”section
below.
Touch/Release
TheincomingMIDImessage(s)causesachangeinthetouched/releasedstatusofthe
destinationparameter.Anonzerovaluemeanstouched;avalueof0meansreleased.
ThemessagesaredisplayedandenteredinthesamewayastheValueChangefield(see
the“ValueChange”sectionabove).
Note:ThisonlyappliestotheTrackassignmentclassandparametersthatcanbe
automated.
Min/Max
DefinestheminimumandmaximumrangeforincomingvaluesrepresentedbyLo7
andHi7.Typically,thefullrangeof0–127isused,butsomecontrolsurfacesmayusethe
samemessagewithdifferentvaluerangesfordifferentcontrols(CMLabsMotorMix,for
example).
Format
Definesthewaynegativevaluesareencodedinthe7-bitportionssentoverMIDI.You
canchoosebetweenthefollowingoptions:
ÂUnsigned—Nonegativevaluesarepossible.Thefull7or14bitrangeistreatedasa
positivenumber.Thisresultsinavaluerangeof0to127 or0to16383.
Â2'scomplement—Ifthemostsignificantbitisset,thevalueisnegative.Toobtainthe
absolutevalue,invertallbitsandadd1.Thisresultsinavaluerangeof–128to12 7 or
–8192to8191.
Â1'scomplement—Ifthemostsignificantbitisset,thevalueisnegative.Tosetthe
absolutevalue,invertallbits.Notethatthisallowstwopossibleencodingvaluesfor
zero.Thisresultsinavaluerangeof–127to127 or–8191to8191.
ÂSignMagnitude—Ifthemostsignificantbitisset,thevalueisnegative.Tosetthe
absolutevalue,clearthemostsignificantbit.Notethatthisallowstwopossible
encodingvaluesforzero.Thisresultsinavaluerangeof–127to127 or–8191to8191.
Theappropriateformatthatshouldbeusedisusuallydocumentedinyourcontrol
surfaceusermanual.Ifunavailable,checkthecontrolsurfacemanufacturer’swebsite,
orcontactthemviaphone.
Multiply
Allowstheincomingvaluetobescaled.Especiallyusefulforbuttonpressesthathavea
valueof1.Examples:tosettheautomationmodetoWrite,setMultiplyto4.00and
ModetoDirect.Todecrementaparameterby1withabuttonpress,setMultiplyto
−1.00andModetoRelative.The1and–1menuitemsinthecombobox’smenu
convenientlyenterthemostcommonlyusedvaluesof1and–1
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 43
Mode
Definesthewaytheincomingvaluemodifiesthecurrentparametervalue.Youcan
choosebetweenthefollowingparameters:
ÂDirect—Theincomingvalueisthenewparametervalue.
ÂToggle—Iftheparameter’scurrentvalueis0,itissettotheincomingvalue.
Otherwiseitissetto0.Thisoptionisusefulforbuttonswhichtoggleavalue:Mute,
Solo,andsoon.
ÂScale—Theincomingvalueisscaledfromitsvaluerangetothedestination
parameter’svaluerange.Mostusefulforfadersandrotarypots.
ÂRelative—Theincomingvalueisaddedtotheparameter’scurrentvalue.Usedby
encoders,butalsoforbuttonsthatincrement/decrementbyacertainamount(setby
theMultiplyparameter).
ÂRotate—Theincomingvalueisaddedtotheparameter’scurrentvalue,cycling
betweenmaximumandminimumvalues.Thisisusefulforbuttonpressesthatcycle
betweenmodes:automationmode,forexample.
ÂX-OR—Thevaluedefinesabitmaskwhichisappliedtotheparameter’scurrentvalue
withthe“exclusiveor”Booleanoperation.Usefulforenabling/disablingsingleObject
typesinGlobalView.
Feedback
Definesthewaytheparameter’scurrentvalueisdisplayedonthecontrolsurface.You
canchoosebetweenthefollowingoptions:
ÂNone—Nofeedbackissent.
ÂSingleDot/Line—LEDrings:onlyoneLED;LCDs:asingleverticalline.
ÂLefttoRightBar—Abarfromtheminimumtothecurrentvalue.
ÂRighttoLeftBar—Abarfromthecurrentvaluetothemaximum.
ÂQ/Spread—Abarfromthecentertothecurrentvalue.
ÂAscendingBarLCDs—Abarfromthebottomtothecurrentvalue.
ÂDescendingBarLCDs—Abarfromthetoptothecurrentvalue.
ÂTextOnly—LEDrings:nofeedback;LCDs:nofeedbackasagraphicelement.
ÂAutomatic—Dependentonthecurrentlyassignedparameter,themostsuitable
feedbackmodeisused:Plug-inandInstrumentparameterscarrythisinformation,
PanusesSingleDot/Line,allotherparametersuseLefttoRightBar.
Note:Feedbackonlyworksforsupportedcontrolsurfaces,andnotallsettingsare
availableforallcontrols.
TextFeedbackCheckbox
Ifenabled,atextualrepresentationofthecurrentvalueissenttothecontrolsurface’s
display.Theplug-indeterminesthedisplaypositionandnumberofcharactersthatare
used.
44 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
LocalFeedback(Fader/Knob)Checkbox
Ifenabled,nofeedbackissentwhiletheparameterisinTouchedmode.Thisprevents
motorizedfadersfrom“fighting”againsttheuser.
KeyRepeatCheckbox
WhenyouenabletheKeyRepeatcheckbox,theassignmentisrepeatedlyexecuted.
TheKeyRepeatRateslider—setintheMacOSXKeyboard&Mousepreferences—
determineshowquicklyLogicrepeatstheassignment.Thedurationthatthebutton/
controllermustbeheldfor,beforetheassignmentisrepeated,issetwiththeDelay
UntilRepeatsliderintheKeyboard&Mousepreferences.
Example:Thisfacilityisparticularlyusefulforthezoomfunction:Ifyouassignakey
repeatcommandtotheZoombuttonsontheLogicControl,forexample,youcan
simplyholddowntheZoomInbutton.LogicwillzoominuntiltheZoomInbuttonis
released.ThismirrorsthebehavioroftheZoomkeycommands.Inearlierversions,you
hadtorepeatedlypressthe(LogicControl)Zoombuttonstozoomin/outmorethan
onelevel.
Note:TheKeyRepeatcheckboxisonlyavailableforkeycommands,keypressesand
relativevaluechanges.Ifanyotherassignmentclassisselected,thecheckboxis
dimmed.
LogicProfactorykeycommandassignmentsalreadysupporttheKeyRepeatfunction
(ifusefuland/orapplicabletothecontrolsurface/device)—makingchanges
unnecessaryforuseofthisnewfunctionality.
IfyouwanttoenabletheKeyRepeatfunctionforyourownassignments,youmay
needtousethere-learnoptionfortheassignedmessage.KeyRepeatmessagesmust
includetheLo7byte,whichprovidesinformationontheup(released)ordown
(pressed)stateoftheassignedbutton.
Logicguidesyouthroughthere-learningprocess:ThecurrentMIDImessageis
automaticallycleared,Learnmodeisactivated,andaHelptagpromptsyoutosendthe
desiredMIDImessage.
Releasingtheassignedbutton—afterlearningtheMIDImessage—automatically
createstheLo7byte,andassignstheLo7valueforthebuttonreleasemessagetothe
Minparameter.TheLo7valueforthe„buttonpressed“messageisautomatically
assignedtotheMaxparameter.
Typically,thevaluerangeof1–127isusedforthebuttonpressedmessage.Thezero(0)
valueisgenerallyusedforbuttonreleased.
Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup 45
Note:Somecontrolsurfacesmayusedifferentvalueranges(CMLabsMotorMix,for
example).AssigningtheusedvaluerangetothedesiredMinandMaxvaluesensures
thatkeyrepeatalsoworkswithsuchdevices.This,however,alsomeansthatyouneed
totakecarewhenmanuallychangingtheMinorMaxvalueforakeycommand(in
caseswheretheMinandMaxvaluesdonotmatchthebuttononandbuttonrelease
(off)states,thecompleteassignmentwillnotwork).Pleaseconsultyourcontrolsurface
manualforfurtherinformationaboutthevaluesused.
AboutModalDialogs
Allmodaldialogs(exceptfileselectorboxes)areshownoncontrolsurfacesthatfeature
textdisplays.
Modaldialogsdonotallowyoutoperformactionsinanyotherwindowwhenvisible.
Asexamples,authorizationwarnings,editconfirmations,orerrormessages.
Whenthesewindows“popup”on-screen,theupperLCDrow(ifapplicable)showsthe
firstpart,orall,ofthealerttext.
IfthedialogtextdoesnotfitintotheLCD’supperrow,itwillstartscrollingafterthree
seconds.Youcanscrollthedialogtextmanuallywiththeappropriatecontrol(see
assignmenttablesintheappropriatechapter).Onceyoustartdoingso,automatic
scrollingisdisabled.
ÂIfthereisanEnterorOKbuttononthecontrolsurface,ittriggersthedialog’sdefault
button,whereapplicable.
ÂIfthereisaCancelorExitbuttononthecontrolsurface,ittriggersthebuttonlabeled
CancelorAbort,whereapplicable.
ÂAllbuttons(pushbuttons,includingEnter/defaultandCancel,aswellascheckboxes
andradiobuttons,butnotpop-upbuttons)areshowninthedisplay’slowerrow.
Pressingacontrolsurfacebuttonbelowthedisplaytriggerstheappropriatebutton/
functioninthedialog,ifapplicable.FollowinguseoftheEnter/Cancelbuttononthe
controlsurfaceorwiththemouse,thedialogwilldisappear,andallcontrolsand
displayswillreturntotheirpreviousstate.
Whenafileselectboxisonscreen,aThere is a file select dialog on the screen
messageappearsontheLCDorotherdisplay(ifapplicabletoyourcontrolsurface).
46 Chapter1ControlSurfaceSetup
Tips
ControlsurfaceschangethewayyouuseLogic,andaremosteffectiveifyoumakea
fewsmallmodificationstoyourworkingmethods.Thefollowingcollectionofhintswill
helpyoutoworkmoresmoothlyandefficientlywithyourcontrolsurface/Logicsystem.
CustomizeyourTemplate/AutoloadSongs
ÂSetupScreensets1–7toyourliking.Thesecanbeaccesseddirectlywithsome
controlsurfaces(onaLogic/MackieControl—viaFunctionKeys—F1toF7.Function
Key8(F8)willclosethetop-mostwindow).
ÂItisrecommendedthatafull-screenArrangewindow,withTrackAutomationView
settoon,isamongyourScreensets.
ÂAfull-screenTrackMixerwindowisalsorecommended.
MakeUseofMarkers
Notmuchmorecanbesaid.Markersallowyoutoquicklynavigatefromlocationto
locationinaproject.Mostcontrolsurfacesfeatureanumberofshortcutsthatallow
youtorapidlyswitchbetweenMarkers.
Markersareveryusefulforthecreation/selectionofCycleareasandanumberofother
tasks,suchasDropInandReplace.
Ifyoutendtofollowaparticularsongstructure,orliketoworkwithaparticular
numberofbars(4,8,16bars,andsoon)forverseandchorussections,thensetupa
numberofMarkersatsuitablelocationsinyourTemplate/Autoloadsongs.
AlwaysuseProjects
AssoonasLogicislaunched,andthedesiredTemplateorAutoloadsongisloaded,you
shouldroutinelycreateanewprojectfolder,andnameit.Thiswillprovideadefault
folderstructure/filepaththatcontainsthesongfileandallaudiofilesassociatedwith
theproject.
Youcanalsochoosetoincludeplug-inSettingsfiles,videofiles,SpaceDesignerIRfiles
andEXSInstrumentsintoyourProjectfolder,ifdesired.
ThebuttonassignedtoSaveoperationsonyourcontrolsurfacewillopentheFileSave
dialog.Oncetheproject/songhasbeensavedonce,pressingthe“Save”buttonwill
incrementallysavetheprojectwithoutlaunchingtheFileSavedialogwindow.
2
47
2LogicControl
ThischapterwillintroduceyoutousingLogicwithaLogic/
MackieControlunit.
TheLogicControlandMackieControlUniversalunitsarefunctionallyidentical.All
informationinthischapter(asappropriateforthedevice)appliestotheMackieControl
Universal,theMackieExtender,andtheC4.
TouseLogicwithaLogic/MackieControlunit,youneed:
ÂaLogic/MackieControlunit.
ÂLogicPro7.1 , ornewer.
SetUp
ApoweredLogic/MackieControlunitwillbeautomaticallydetectedwhenLogicProis
launched.YoucanusetheLogic/MackieControlinanindependentcontrolsurface
group(withothercontrolsurfaceiconsplacedabove/belowtheLogic/MackieControl
icon),orcombinedintoonecontrolsurfacegroupwithoneormorecontrolsurfaces
(suchasLogic/MackieControlXTorC4units—placetheicon(s)totherightofthe
existingicon(s).
FootSwitches
Thefootswitchsocketscanusemomentaryfootpedalswitheitherapositiveor
negativepolarity.Bydefault:
ÂUSERSWITCHAisassignedtoStart/Stop.
ÂUSERSWITCHBisassignedtoRecord(notethatatrackmustbeselectedandarmed
forrecordingtotakeplace),
ÂEXTERNALCONTROLisassignedtotheMASTERfaderlevel.Onlyuseanexpression
pedalwiththissocket.
48 Chapter2LogicControl
ThepolarityofthefootswitchesisdeterminedbytheLogicControlwhenpoweredup.
Assuch,youshouldfirstconnectthefootswitches,thenturnthepoweron.
Topicsinthischapterarebrokendowninto“Zones”oftheLogicControlsurface.
TheDisplays
TheLogicControlfeaturesfourdisplays,inadditiontoLEDsassociatedwithindividual
switches:
ÂMainLCD
ÂAssignmentLED
ÂSongPosition/SMPTETimedisplay
ÂSoloLED
Thefollowingsectiondiscussesthesedisplays.
LCD Assignmentdisplay Timedisplay
V-Pots
RecRdy,Solo,Mute,
andSelectbuttons
Faders
JogWheel
Cursorbuttons
Transport
Controlbuttons
Assignmentbuttons
Displaybuttons
Channelbuttons
Functionkeys
Chapter2LogicControl 49
LiquidCrystalDisplay(LCD)
Eachchannel/parametercanbeindicatedbyanameorvalue.Ingeneral,theupper
rowofeachchannel/parameterwilldisplayanabbreviatedformofthetrackname,and
thelowerrowwilldisplaythe(abbreviated)parameternameand/orvalue.
Insomemodes,along(full,inotherwords)parameterorothernamewillbedisplayed
brieflyon-screen,whenadjusted.Thedisplayoflongnames,andthedurationofthis
display,issetintheControlSurfacespreferences.Thesesettingsarediscussedinthe
LogicReferencemanual.
Note:8-bitASCIIcharacterssuchascurlyquotesandumlautcharactersarereplacedby
thebest-possible7-bitASCIIequivalent.Asexamples:ä=ae,ö=oe,ü=ue,á=a,ø=oe,
œ=oe,ß=ss,å=a.
AssignmentLED(ModeDisplay)
TheLogic/MackieControlfeaturesatwodigit,seven-segmentLEDdisplaywhich
indicatesthecurrentassignmentstatus(alsoreferredtoasthemodedisplay).
Aperiodisshownatthebottom-rightofthedisplaywheneveraChannelStripviewis
active.
SongPosition/SMPTETimeDisplay
TheLogic/MackieControlincludesamulti-digit,seven-segmentLED.Itisaccompanied
bytwosmallLEDswhichprovideaquickvisualindicationofthecurrentlyactive
displayformat:SMPTEorBEATS.
WhenBEATSmodeisselected,thePosition/TimeDisplayisdividedintofoursegments,
separatedasfollows:
Bars/Beats/SubDivisions/Ticks
WhenSMPTEmodeisselected,thePosition/TimeDisplayisdividedintofoursegments,
separatedasfollows:
Hours/Minutes/Seconds/Frames
Thedisplayformatcanbeviewedinanumberofways.Thiscanbealteredinthe
Displaypreferences.
SoloLED
ThisLEDindicatesthateither:anaudiotrackissettosolo,orthetracksolomodeis
enabled.Itisahelpfulvisualaidinsituationswhereatrackhasbeensoloedandthe
faderbankhasbeenshifted—makingthesoloedtrack’sSoloLEDinvisibleonthe
controlsurface.
50 Chapter2LogicControl
TheChannelStrip(s)
Aseachchannelstripisidentical,theinformationdiscussedinthissectionapplies
equallytoalleightchannelstripsontheLogicControlandLogicControlXTunits.
V-Pot/V-Select
This“soft”potentiometercanbeusedtoadjustthesendlevelandpan,plusanyother
parameterforEQ,instruments,effects,andsoon.TheV-Potcanalsobeusedtoscroll
throughandchooseitems—suchasplug-ins,AudioInstrumentsandmore—from
menus,andtodeterminedestinationsforsends.
TheV-PotalsocontainsanintegratedV-Selectpushbutton.Thisbuttongenerallysetsa
“default”parametervalue(whereaparameterhasmorethantwopossiblevalues),or
switchesbetweentwoparametervalues(on/off).TheV-Selectcanalsobeusedto
activateafunction,selectedthroughuseoftheV-Pot.Asanexample,theV-Potcanbe
rotatedinordertoselectaneffectplug-inforaparticularchannelInsertslot.Oncethe
desiredeffectisdisplayedintheLCD,asimplepressdownwardsonthetopoftheV-
PotwillactivatetheV-Selectbutton.Intheexamplegiven,thiswouldselect,andinsert,
theeffectandlaunchthePlug-inwindow.Onoccasion,theV-Selectisusedtoswitch
toaspecialAssignmentmode.
ThecurrentvalueofanyparameterbeingadjustedbytheV-PotisdisplayedontheLCD
(dependentontheName/Valuesetting),andisalsoindicatedbytheringofLEDswhich
surroundit.ThevariousLED“ring”displaysareshownhere:
Thiswillvaryasfollows,dependentontheselectedparameter:
ÂConnectedseriesofLEDsegmentsfromlefttoright(sendlevel,forexample)
ÂSinglesegment(panoramaorfrequency,forexample)
ÂConnectedseriesofLEDsegments,startinginthecenterpositionandfanningtothe
leftorright(EQgain,forexample)
ÂSeriesofconnectedLEDsegments,startinginthecenterpositionandfanningtothe
leftandright(Q-Factor,forexample)
ÂAnLEDdotbelowtheV-Potindicatesthecentered/defaultpositionoftheparameter
Chapter2LogicControl 51
Holdingdownthex/ALTbuttonsetstheV-Potstohighresolutionparameter
adjustment(fine)mode,whereapplicable.
HoldingdowntheOPTIONbutton,andturningtheV-Pot,switchesbetweenthe
minimum,default,andmaximumparametervalue.
Rec/Rdy(Record/Ready)Button
Thisbuttonarmsordisablesthechannelforrecording.Eachchannelfeaturesan
independentRec/RdyLEDwhichislitwhenatrackisarmedforrecording.
HoldingdowntheOPTIONbutton,whilepressinganychannel’sREC/RDYbuttonwill
disarmalltracks.
InGlobalview,ifyouarmanaudiochannelwhichiscurrentlynotusedbyanytrackin
thesong,andthenstartrecording,youwillbeaskedifyouwanttocreateanewtrack
withthisaudiochannelinthecurrentrecordingfolder.
SignalLED
IndicatesthepresenceofanyoutgoingMIDIoraudiosignal.Whenrecording,the
presenceofanincomingsignalwillbeindicated.
SOLOButton
Forisolatingachannel’ssignal.EachchannelfeaturesanindependentSoloLEDwhich
illuminateswhenatrackissoloed.TheRudeSoloLED—justtotherightofthePosition/
TimeDisplayLED—alsoilluminateswheneveranytrackissoloed.
HoldingdowntheOPTIONbutton,whilepressinganychannel’sSOLObuttonwill
disablesoloforalltracks.
52 Chapter2LogicControl
IntheSendDestination/Levelviews(see“SendAssignmentModes”onpage61),the
SOLObuttoncontrolsthePre/Postmodeselection—inbothMultiChanneland
ChannelStripviews.
MUTEButton
Usedtodefeatthetrack’ssignal.EachchannelfeaturesanindependentMuteLED
whichilluminateswhenatrackismuted.
HoldingdowntheOPTIONbutton,whilepressinganyMUTEbuttonwillunmuteall
tracks.
IntheEQFrequency/GainandSendDestination/Levelviews,theMUTEbuttoncontrols
theEQbypassorSendmutefunction.ThisaffectsbothMultiChannelandChannel
Stripviews.
SELECTButton
Thisbuttonisusedtoselectachannelforchannel-basededitingorassignment
commands.EachchannelfeaturesanindependentSELECTLEDwhichilluminateswhen
atrackisselected.
WhenholdingdowntheSHIFTbutton,pressinganychannelSELECTbuttonwillsetthe
track’svolumetounitylevel(0dB).
WhileholdingdownSHIFT,aSELECTbutton’sLEDindicatesifthetrack’svolumeisset
to0dB.
WhenholdingdowntheOPTIONbutton,pressinganychannelSELECTbuttonwill
createanewtrack(assignedtothesameinstrumentoftheselectedtrack),andswitch
toArrangeview.
WhenholdingdowntheSHIFTandOPTIONbuttons,pressinganychannelSELECT
buttonwillcreateanewtrack(withthenextinstrument,followingtheselectedtrack),
andswitchtoArrangeview.
Chapter2LogicControl 53
Touch-SensitiveMotorFader
These100millimeterfaderscontrolchannellevels.WhenFlipmodeisactivated,the
parametercurrentlyassignedtotheV-Potcanbecontrolledwiththefader.Thisallows
youtomoreeasilycontrolpans,auxreturns,MIDItrackparameters,EQs,plug-in,Audio
Instrument,orotherchannelparameterlevels/values.Movementoftheeightfadersis
relativetotheactivityofthecurrentlychosenbankofon-screenfaders.Thefaderbank
isshiftedwhenoneoftheFADERBANKbuttonsispressed.
Faderbehaviorinothermodes
ÂInFlipmode:duplicatesorswapswithV-Potofsamechannel.
ÂInSurroundAngle/Diversityview:adjustssurrounddiversity.
ÂInEQFrequency/Gainview:adjustsgainofselectedEQband.
ÂInSendDestination/LevelMultiChannelview:adjustssendlevelofselectedsend.
ÂInSendDestination/LevelChannelStripview:adjustssendlevelofsendonselected
track.
ChangingParametersandValues
IndividualparameterscanbeadjustedviatheassociatedV-Pot(orfader,iftheFLIP
buttonisactive),locateddirectlybelowtheparameterentryintheLCD.
Todoso,simplygrabandturnthedesiredV-Pot.Oncetherequiredparametervalueis
visibleintheLCD,simplyreleasetheknob.
PresstheV-Selectbuttontosetthedefaultvalue(forparametersthathavemorethan
twovalues),orswitchbetweentwovalues(forparameterswithonlytwopossibilities,
suchason/off).
54 Chapter2LogicControl
Someparametersrequireconfirmation,suchastheselectionofplug-ins,Audio
Instruments,sends,inputs,outputs,andsoon.Forthesetypesofparameters,pressthe
V-Selectbutton(pressdownonthetopoftheV-Pot)toactivate/selectthedesired
value.Inthecaseofaplug-inorAudioInstrument,thiswillautomaticallylaunchthe
Plug-inwindowinLogic.Forasend,theconfirmedchannelsenddestinationwillbe
activatedintheLogicmixer(s).
Whenavaluehasbeenpre-selected,butnotconfirmed/instantiated(suchassend
destination,plug-ininsertionandsoon)thevaluewillflashuntiltheV-Selectbuttonis
pressed.
AnexponentialincreaseinvaluechangeswilloccurasaV-Potisrotatedmorequickly.
TheAssignmentZone
Thesmalllightgrayareajustbelowthemodedisplaycontainssixbuttons.
TheseASSIGNMENTbuttonsworkinbothTrackandGlobalviewmodes.Viewmodes
arediscussedin“TrackViewMode”onpage20.
Whenthesebuttonsarepressed,themodedisplay,plustheLEDassociatedwitheach
button,willupdatetoreflectthecurrentlyselectedassignmentmode.TheLCDwillalso
updatetodisplaytheparametersrelevanttotheselectedassignment.These
parametersare,ofcourse,assignedtothecorrespondingV-Pots.
AllASSIGNMENTbuttonsworkasswitches,whichmeansthatifyouclickthem
repeatedly,theywillswitchbetweentheMultiChannelandChannelStripviewmodes.
ÂMultiChannelview—youseethesameparameterformultiplechannels.InMulti
Channelview,themodedisplaydoesnotshowaperiod—Example:P1
ÂChannelStripview—youseemultipleparametersforasinglechannel.InChannel
Stripview,themodedisplayshowsaperiodtotheright—Example:P1.
SwitchingbetweenMultiChannelandChannelStripviewsisachievedbypressingthe
selectedASSIGNMENTbuttonmultipletimes.
IfyoupressanASSIGNMENTbuttonwhichisnotcurrentlyselected,theAssignment
modechanges,andtheviewswitchestoMultiChannelview.Exception:Switching
betweenInstrumentEditviewandPlug-inEditviewretainstheChannelStripview.
Chapter2LogicControl 55
TheNAME/VALUEbuttonalsohasaneffectonwhatisshownontheLCDwheninthe
MultiChannelandChannelStripviews.Moreinformationcanbefoundin“Display
Zone”onpage71.
TrackAssignmentModes
TheTRACKbuttonselectsAssignmentmodeswhichallowtheeditingofanumberof
globaltrackparameters.Itswitchesbetweenalldisplayedchannelsandtheindividual
parametersoftheselectedchannel(TrackMultiChannelvieworTrackChannelStrip
view).TheparametersinTrackMultiChannelviewinclude:Volume,Pan,Trackmode,
TrackInput,TrackOutput,andAutomation.InTrackChannelStripviewyouwillseean
overviewofthemostimportanttrackparameters:Volume,Pan,Instrument,Insert1,
Insert2,Send1Level,Send2Level,andSend3Level.
TrackMultiChannelView
TrackMultiChannelviewallowsyoutoeditasingle“global”trackparameterforall
tracks:Volume,Pan,Trackmode,Input,Output,orAutomation.Theparameterbeing
editedwillbedisplayedbrieflywhenswitchingtothismode.
ÂThemodedisplaywillshowtr(for“Track”).
ÂTheupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
PressingNAME/VALUEswitchesthedisplaymodetoshowparametervaluesinthe
lowerrow:
AsthesedisplayvariantscanbeswitchedinallMultiChannelStripviews,the
followingwillonlyshowdisplaysinValuemode.
ÂTurningtheV-Potschangestheassociatedtrackparameter.
ÂPressingaV-Selectsetstheparametertoitsdefaultvalue.
ÂCursorLeft/Rightbuttonsswitchtothenextorprevioustrackparameter.The
selectedparameterwillbedisplayedbrieflyintheupperLCDrow.
Audio1 Audio2 Audio3 Audio4 Audio5 Audio6 Audio7 Audio8
V
olume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Audio1 Audio2 Audio3 Audio4 Audio5 Audio6 Audio7 Audio8
+0.1dB
-1.8dB
+01.dB -30.0
+0.0dB -50.2
-24.7
-1.2dB
56 Chapter2
LogicControl
ChannelStripView
TrackChannelStripviewallowsyoutoeditallparameterslistedabove,fortheselected
track.
Â
Themodedisplaywillshowtr.(trackchannelstrip).
Â
TheupperLCDrowshowsthenameofthetrackand“Trackparameters.”
PressingNAME/VALUEswitchesthedisplaymodetoshowparameternamesinthe
upperrowandparametervaluesinthelowerrow:
AsthesedisplayvariantscanbeswitchedinallChannelStripviews,thefollowingwill
onlyshowdisplaysinValuemode.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select1—editsVolume.ThelowerLCDrowshowsthecurrenttrackvolumes,
eitherindBornumericformat,dependingonthesettingsoftheunderlying
EnvironmentObjects.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select2—editsPanposition.ThelowerLCDrowshowsthecurrenttrackpan
value,rangingfromminus64toplus63.Avalueof0isthecenteredposition.If
SurroundisselectedastheOutputvalue,thiscontrolstheSurroundAngle.
Â
V-Pot3—selectstheinstrumentofAudioInstrumenttracks.ConfirmwithV-Select3.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select4and5—selectstheplug-inusedinInsertslots1and2(onaudioand
AudioInstrumenttracks).ConfirmwithV-Select.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select6to8—editstheSendLevelofSends1to3.
HoldingSHIFTwhilepressingoneoftheMUTEorV-Selectbuttonsswitchesbetween
muteorbypass:
Â
1and2—activates/deactivatesthetrack’sMutebutton.
Â
3—activates/deactivatesMuteoftheAudioInstrumentusedonthetrack.
Â
4and5—activates/deactivatesBypassofplug-insusedinInsertslots1and2(of
AudioandAudioInstrumenttracks).
Â
6to8—activates/deactivatesMuteofSends1to3.
ShortcutsMenu
HoldingdowntheTRACKbuttonaccessesafurthersub-menuintheLCD.
Â
Themodedisplaywillshowt_(Track)
Â
V-Select1orF1—switchestoTrackMultiChannelviewandselectsVolume.
Track 1 "Audio 1"
Track parameters
V
olume
Pan
Inst
Ins.1
Ins.2
Send 1
Send 2
Send 3
V
olume
Pan
Inst
Ins.1
Ins.2
Send 1
Send 2
Send 3
+0.5dB
0
ES2
Dstrtn
AutFlt -54.0
-27.0
-oo
dB
V
olume
Pan
TrkMod
Input
Output
Auto
Setup
Chapter2
LogicControl
57
Â
TheLCD’slowerlineshowsthecurrentvolumeofthetracks,indBornumerically,
dependingonthesettingoftheunderlyingEnvironmentObject.
Â
TurningaV-Potchangesthevolume.
Â
pressingaV-Selectsetsthevolumetothedefaultvalue.
Â
V-Select2orF2—switchestoTrackMultiChannelviewandselectsPan.
Â
V-Select3orF3—switchestoTrackMultiChannelviewandselectsTrackmode.
Â
V-Select4orF4—switchestoTrackMultiChannelviewandselectsInput.
Â
V-Select5orF5—switchestoTrackMultiChannelviewandselectsOutput.
Â
V-Select6orF6—switchestoTrackMultiChannelviewandselectsAutomation
mode.
Â
V-Select7orF7—switchestoTrackMultiChannelviewanddisplaystheautomation
parameterselectedintheArrangewindow.AlsoswitchestoArrangeview.
Â
V-Select8orF8—switchestoTrackSetupChannelStripview(seebelow).
TrackSetupChannelStripView
Inthismode,rarelyusedparameterscanbeeditedfortheselectedtrack.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select1—editsTrackmode(mono,stereo,left,right).
Â
V-Pot/V-Select2—selectstheSurroundmode.ConfirmwithV-Select2.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select3—selectstheTrackInput.ConfirmwithV-Select6.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select4—selectstheTrackOutput.ConfirmwithV-Select7.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select5—editsAutomationmode.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select6—editstrackgroupmembership.Youcanonlychooseonegroupor
“Off.”Tomakeatrackamemberofmultiplegroups,useGroupEditmode(see
below).
Pan/SurroundAssignmentModes
BrieflypressingthePAN/SURROUNDbuttonswitchesbetweenPan/SurroundMulti
ChannelandPan/SurroundChannelStripview.
MultiChannelView
Pan/SurroundMultiChannelviewallowsyoutoeditonepan/surroundparameteron
alltracks:AngleorPan(onnon-surroundtracks),Radius(diversity),LFE,Surround
mode(onsurroundtracks).Theparameterbeingeditedwillbedisplayedbrieflywhen
switchingtothismode.Regardlessofwhichsurroundparameterisselectedandactive,
non-surround
tracksalwaysdisplaythestandardPancontrol.
Inasongthatcontainsbothsurroundandnon-surroundtracks,youcanedita
specifiedsurroundparameterforsurroundtracks,whiletheV-Potofnon-surround
trackswilleditpanning,asusual.
Â
ThemodedisplaywillshowPn(Pan).
Â
TheupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
58 Chapter2
LogicControl
Â
TurningtheV-Potschangesthepan/surroundparameter.
ÂTheSurroundAngleparameterrotatesbetween0and359degrees,avoidingany
anglelimit.
ÂPressingaV-Selectsetstheparametertoitsdefaultvalue.
ÂCursorLeft/Rightswitchestothenextorprevioussurroundparameter.Theselected
parameterwillbedisplayedbrieflyintheupperLCDrow.
ChannelStripView
Pan/SurroundChannelStripviewallowsyoutoeditallsurroundparametersforthe
selectedtrack.
ÂThemodedisplaywillshowPn.(Pan/Surroundchannelstrip).
ÂTheupperLCDrowshowsthenameofthetrackand“Pan/Surround.”
ÂV-Pot/V-Select1—editsangle(orpanonnon-surroundtracks).
ÂV-Pot/V-Select2—editsdiversity.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select3—editsLFElevel.
ÂV-Pot4—selectsthesurroundmode.ConfirmwithV-Select4.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select5—editsSurroundX.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select6—editsSurroundY.
TheAngle/DiversityandX/Ypairsinfluenceeachother.OnlytheAngle/Diversity
parametersareautomatedandrecorded.
AlternateModeOptions
HoldingdownthePAN/SURROUNDbuttonaccessesafurthersub-menuintheLCD:
ÂV-Select1orF1—switchestoPan/SurroundMultiChannelviewandselectsangle.
ÂV-Select2orF2—switchestoPan/SurroundMultiChannelviewandselectsdiversity.
ÂV-Select3orF3—switchestoPan/SurroundMultiChannelviewandselectsLFElevel.
ÂV-Select4orF4—switchestoPan/SurroundMultiChannelviewandselectssurround
mode.
ÂV-Select6orF5—switchestoPan/SurroundChannelStripview.
ÂV-Select7orF6—switchestoSurroundAngle/DiversityMultiChannelview:
ÂthemodedisplaywillshowAd(Angle/Diversity).
Track 1 "Audio 1"
Pan/Surround
SrrAng
SrrDvr
SrrLFE
mode
Angle
Radius
LFE
mode
CStrip
Ang/Dv
Chapter2
LogicControl
59
Â
theupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
Â
thelowerLCDrowshowsthesurroundanglecurrentlyassignedtoeachtrack.
Â
turningaV-Potchangesthesurroundangle(oradjustspanpositiononnon-
surroundtracks).
Â
pressingaV-Selectsetsthesurroundangletoitsdefaultvalue.
Â
thefaderseditsurrounddiversity.
Â
V-Select8orF7—switchestoSurroundX/YMultiChannelview:
Â
themodedisplaywillshowXY(X/Y—theXcharacterisnotavailableona
7segmentdisplay).
Â
theupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
Â
thelowerLCDrowshowsthesurroundXvaluecurrentlyassignedtoeachtrack.
Â
turningaV-PotchangesthesurroundXvalue(oradjustspanpositiononnon-
surroundtracks).
Â
pressingaV-SelectsetssurroundXtoitsdefaultvalue.
Â
thefaderseditsurroundY.
NotesonSurroundX/YEditing
XandYhaveavaluerangeof–1000to
+
1000,buttheresolutionisnotthathigh,as
surroundpositionsarecurrentlyrecordedas7bitdata.
Note:
TheXandYparametersarelimitedtoarectangularcoordinatesystem.Assuch,
valuepairsoutsidethesurroundcirclearenotpossible.Whentryingtosetavalue
whichwouldleadtoaninvalidposition,theothercoordinateisautomaticallyadjusted
toavalidposition.Example:movingYto
+
1000willresultinanXcoordinatevalueof
0.
Wheneditingonlyonecoordinate,theothercoordinateofthemostrecentlytrackis
remembered.Thisaidsinthecreationoflinear(straight)linesofmovement.
EQAssignmentModes
BrieflypressingtheEQbuttonswitchesbetweenEQMultiChannelvieworEQChannel
Stripview.
Note:
IfnoChannelorLinearPhaseEQispresentontheselectedtrack,aChannelEQ
willbeinsertedautomaticallywhentheEQChannelStripviewisentered.
MultiChannelView
EQMultiChannelviewallowsyoutoeditoneequalizerparameterforall
tracks:Frequency,Gain,Q,orEQbypass.TheEQbandnumber,andparameterbeing
editedwillbedisplayedforonesecondwhenswitchingtothismode.
Â
ThemodedisplaywillshowE1toE8,dependentontheselectedEQbandnumber.
Â
TheupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
Â
TurningtheV-PotschangestheEQparameter.
60 Chapter2
LogicControl
Â
PressingaV-Selectsetstheparametertoitsdefaultvalue.
Â
CursorUp/DownswitchestothenextorpreviousEQband.
ÂCursorLeft/RightswitchestothenextorpreviousEQparameter.Theselected
parameterwillbedisplayedbrieflyintheupperLCDrow.
ÂPressingaMUTEbuttonwhiletheSHIFTbuttonishelddownswitchesthecurrentEQ
band’sBypassstatus.
ÂWhenFlipmodeisenabled,theMUTEbuttonsdisplayandeditthecurrentEQband’s
Bypassstatus.
ChannelStripView
EQChannelStripviewallowsyoutoeditallEQparameters—inallbands—forthe
selectedtrack.
ÂThemodedisplaywillshowEQ.(EQchannelstrip).
ÂTheupperLCDrowshowsthenameofthetrack,“EQs,”thepagenumberandtotal
numberofpages—Example:“Page1/2”.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select1—editstheFrequencyofodd-numberedEQbands.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select2—editsGainofodd-numberedEQbands.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select3—editsQ-Factorofodd-numberedEQbands.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select4—editsBypassofodd-numberedEQbands.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select5—editstheFrequencyofeven-numberedEQbands.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select6—editsGainofeven-numberedEQbands.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select7—editsQ-Factorofeven-numberedEQbands.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select8—editsBypassofeven-numberedEQbands.
ÂCursorLeft/RightswitchestothenextorpreviousEQband.ThenumberofEQbands
displayedontheLCDdependsonthenumberofLogicControl(XT)units(twoEQ
bandsareshownperunit)available.
AlternateModeOptions
HoldingdowntheEQbuttonaccessesafurthersub-menuintheLCD:
ÂThemodedisplayshowsE_orE_.,dependentonwhetheryouwereinEQMulti
ChannelorEQChannelStripview.
ÂV-Select1orF1—switchestoEQMultiChannelviewandselectsFrequency.
ÂV-Select2orF2—switchestoEQMultiChannelviewandselectsGain
ÂV-Select3orF3—switchestoEQMultiChannelviewandselectsQ.
ÂV-Select4orF4—switchestoEQMultiChannelviewandselectsBypass.
ÂV-Select6orF6—switchestoEQChannelStripview.
Chapter2LogicControl 61
ÂV-Select7orF7—switchestoFrequency/GainMultiChannelview.Inthismodeyou
canedittheFrequencyandGainparametersofaspecificEQband(1to8)forall
tracks.
ÂthemodedisplaywillshowF1toF8,dependingontheselectedEQband.
ÂtheupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
ÂthelowerLCDrowshowstheFrequencyoftheselectedEQ.
ÂturningaV-PotchangesEQFrequency.
ÂpressingaV-SelectsetstheEQFrequencytoitsdefaultvalue.
ÂusetheMutebuttonstoBypasstheEQ.
ÂusethefadersadjusttheEQGain.
ÂV-Select8orF8—switchestoFrequency/GainChannelStripview.Inthismodeyou
canedittheFrequencyandGainparametersforallEQbandsoftheselectedtrack.
EachpairofchannelstripscorrespondstooneoftheEQbands.
ÂthemodedisplaywillshowFG.
ÂV-Pots1to8controltheFrequencyofEQbands1to8.
ÂMutebuttons1to8controltheBypassofEQbands1to8.
ÂFaders1to8controltheGainofEQbands1to8.
Notethatthefadersformafrequencyresponsecurveinthismode,iftheEQbands
haveascendingfrequencyvalues.
Youcaneditanothertrack’sEQ,withoutleavingthisviewmode,bysimplyselecting
thetrack.
SendAssignmentModes
BrieflypressingtheSENDbuttonswitchesbetweenSendMultiChannelorSend
ChannelStripview.
MultiChannelView
SendMultiChannelviewallowsyoutoeditoneSendparameterforall
tracks:Destination,Level,Position,andMute.TheSendslotnumber,andparameter
beingeditedwillbedisplayedforonesecondwhenswitchingtothismode.
ÂThemodedisplaywillshowS1toS8,dependingontheselectedSendslot.
ÂTheupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
ÂTurningtheV-PotschangestheSendparameter.
ÂPressingaV-Selectconfirmsthepre-selectedSendDestinationandsetstheother
sendparameterstotheirdefaults.
ÂCursorUp/DownswitchestothenextorpreviousSendslot.
62 Chapter2LogicControl
ÂCursorLeft/RightswitchestothenextorpreviousSendparameter.Theselected
parameterwillbedisplayedbrieflyintheupperLCDrow.
ÂPressingaMUTEbuttonwhiletheSHIFTbuttonisheldswitchesthecurrentSend’s
Mutestatus.
ÂWhenFlipmodeisenabled,theMUTEbuttonsdisplayandeditthecurrentSend’s
Mutestatus.
Note:EnsurethattheZOOMbuttonisn’tactivewhenusingthecursorbuttons.
ChannelStripView
SendChannelStripviewallowsyoutoeditallSendparametersfortheselectedtrack.
ÂThemodedisplaywillshowSE.(Sendchannelstrip).
ÂTheupperLCDrowshowsthenameofthetrack,“Sends”,thepagenumberandtotal
numberofpages—Example:“Page1/4”
ÂV-Pot/V-Select1—editsDestinationofodd-numberedSends.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select2—editsLevelofodd-numberedSends.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select3—editsPosition(pre/post)ofodd-numberedSends.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select4—editsMuteofodd-numberedSends.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select5—editsDestinationofeven-numberedSends.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select6—editsLevelofeven-numberedSends.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select7—editsPosition(pre/post)ofeven-numberedSends.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select8—editsMuteofeven-numberedSends.
ÂThehorizontalcursorbuttonsshiftbetweenpages.ThenumberofSendsdisplayed
simultaneouslyisdependentonthenumberofLogicControlXTsyouhave.
AlternateEditModeOptions
HoldingdowntheSENDbuttonaccessesafurthersub-menuintheLCD:
ÂThemodedisplayshowsS_orS_.,dependingonwhetheryouwereinSendMulti
ChannelorSendChannelStripview.
Track 1 "Audio 1"
Sends
Page 1/2
Snd3Ds
Send 3
Snd3Ps
Snd3Mt
Snd4Ds
Send 4
Snd4Ps
Snd4Mt
Dest
Pos
Level
Mute
CStrip
CSt2
Ds/LvM
Ds/LvC
Chapter2
LogicControl
63
Â
V-Select1orF1—switchestoSendMultiChannelviewandselectsDestination.
Â
V-Select2orF2—switchestoSendMultiChannelviewandselectsSendLevel.
Â
V-Select3orF3—switchestoSendMultiChannelviewandselectsPosition.
Â
V-Select4orF4—switchestoSendMultiChannelviewandselectsMute.
Â
V-Select5orF5—switchestoSendChannelStripview.
Â
V-Select6orF6—switchestoSendChannelStrip2view:
ThismodeissimilartoSendChannelStripview,butparametersarearrangedina
slightlydifferentway.YoucancontroloneparameterofallSendslotsfortheselected
track.
Â
ThemodedisplaywillshowSE.(Sendchannelstrip).
Â
TheupperLCDrowshowsthenameofthetrack,“Sends”,thepagenumberand
totalnumberofpages.
Â
V-Pot/V-Select1to8—editsthedisplayedparameter.
Â
Thehorizontalcursorbuttonsshiftbetweenpages.Thenumberofparameters
displayedsimultaneouslyisdependentonthenumberofLogicControlXTsyou
have.
Â
V-Select7orF7—switchestoDestination/LevelMultiChannelview:
Inthismode,youcancontroloneSendslotforalltracks.Eachchannelstrip
correspondstothetrackshownintheupperLCDrow.
Â
themodedisplaywillshowd1tod8,dependingontheselectedSend.
Â
theupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
Â
thelowerLCDrowshowsthedestinationoftheselectedSend.
Â
turningaV-Potpre-selectstheSendDestination.
Â
pressingaV-Selectconfirmsthepre-selectedSendDestination.
Â
theSOLObuttonseditSendPosition—alitSOLOLEDindicatesPreFadermode.
Â
theMUTEbuttonseditSendMute.
Â
thefaderseditSendLevel.
Â
V-Select8orF8—switchestoDestination/LevelChannelStripview:
YoucancontrolallSendslotsfortheselectedtrackinthismode.Eachchannelstrip
correspondstothe(embossed)SendnumbershownbelowtheLCD.
Â
themodedisplaywillshowdL.
Â
turningaV-Potpre-selectsthecorrespondingSendDestination.
Track 1 "Audio 1"
Sends
Page 1/2
Snd1Ds
Snd2Ds
Snd3Ds
Snd4Ds
Snd5Ds
Snd6Ds
Snd7Ds
Snd7Ds
64 Chapter2
LogicControl
Â
pressingaV-SelectconfirmsapreselectedSendDestination.
Â
theSolobuttonseditSendPosition—alitSoloLEDindicatesPreFadermode.
Â
theMUTEbuttonseditSendMute.
Â
thefaderseditSendGain.
IfoneormoreSendsareactivatedonmultiplechannels,youcanswitchbetweenthem
intheChannelStripviewsbysimplypressingtheSELECTbuttonforthedesired
channel.
Plug-inAssignmentModes
PressingPLUG-INswitchesbetweenPlug-inMultiChannelorPlug-inChannelStrip
view.
Note:
Thereisoneexceptiontothisbehavior:ifyouareinInstrumentEditview,
pressingthisbuttonswitchestoPlug-inEditview.
MultiChannelView
Thismodeshowstheplug-insassociatedwithaparticularInsertslotforallchannels.
Â
ThemodedisplaywillshowP1toP9,orsimply10to16,dependentontheselected
Plug-inInsertslotnumber.NotethatifanAudioInstrumentchannelisselected,the
displaywillshowP1toP9and10to15.
Â
TheupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
Â
ThelowerLCDrowshowsthecurrentlyselectedplug-inforthisInsertslot.Muted
plug-insareshownwithanasterisk
*
thatprecedestheplug-inname.
Â
TurningtheV-Potspre-selectsanewplug-in.Theplug-innameflashesuntil
confirmedwiththeV-Select.
Â
Turninganotherchannel’sV-Potwillcancelanyearlierpre-selection,andwillstart
pre-selectiononthenewlyselectedtrack.
Â
PressingaV-Select:
Â
confirms/activatesthepre-selectedplug-in(assumingthatyou’vemadeyourpre-
selectionbyturningtheV-Pot).
Â
opensaPlug-inwindow,ifnoneareopened.IfaPlug-inwindowisopen,andLink
modeisenabled,theselectionofanotherplug-inwillreplacetheexistingPlug-in
window.
Â
switchestoPlug-inEditview.
ÂTheCursorUp/Downbuttonschangethecurrentlydisplayedplug-inInsertslot(1to
15).
ÂPressingaV-SelectortheMUTEbuttonwhiletheSHIFTbuttonishelddownwill
mute/unmutetheplug-in.
Chapter2LogicControl 65
Toremoveaplug-in:
1Pre-selectthe“--”value(byturningtheV-Potfullycounter-clockwise)
2PresstheV-SelectoftheappropriateInsertslot.
LogicControlwillnotswitchtoPlug-inEditview,andnoPlug-inwindowwillbe
launched.Ifonewaspreviouslyopened,itwillbeclosed(ifLinkmodeisinactive).
ChannelStripView
Thismodeshowstheplug-insassociatedwithallInsertslotsfortheselectedchannel.
ÂThemodedisplaywillshowPL.
ÂTheupperLCDrowshowsIns1PlthroughIns8Pl
ÂThelowerLCDrowshowstheplug-inwhichiscurrentlyselectedforthisinsertslot.
Mutedplug-insareindicatedbyanasterisk*,whichprecedestheplug-inname.
ÂTurningtheV-Potspre-selectsanewplug-in.Theplug-innameflashesuntil
activated.
ÂTurninganotherchannel’sV-Potwillcancelanypreviouspre-selectionandwillstart
pre-selectiononthenewlyselectedtrack.
ÂPressingaV-Select:
Âactivatesthepre-selectedplug-in(assumingthatyou’vemadeyourpre-selection
byturningtheV-Pot).
ÂopensaPlug-inwindowifnoneareopened(ifaPlug-inwindowisopenandLink
modeisenabled,theselectionofanotherplug-inwillreplacetheexistingplug-in).
ÂswitchestoPlug-inEditview.
ÂPressingaV-SelectwhiletheSHIFTbuttonisheldwillmute/unmutetheplug-in.
Toremoveaplug-in:
1Pre-selectthe“--”value(byturningtheV-Potfullycounter-clockwise).
2PresstheV-SelectlinkedtotheappropriateInsertslot.
LogicControlwillnotswitchtoPlug-inEditview,andnoPlug-inwindowwillbe
launched.Ifonewaspreviouslyopened,itwillbeclosed(ifLinkmodeisinactive).
Plug-inEditView
ÂThemodedisplaywillshowP1.toP8.,dependingonthenumberoftheselected
plug-inInsertslot.
ÂDependentontheName/Valuebutton,theLCDdisplaywillchangeinthefollowing
waysbetweenthetwomodes:
ÂName:TheupperLCDrowshowsthetrack’sname,insertnumber,plug-inname,
currentparameterpageandtotalnumberofparameterpages.
ThelowerLCDrowshowsthenameoftheparameterwhichcanbeeditedviathe
V-Potlocatedbelow.
66 Chapter2LogicControl
ÂValue:TheupperLCDrowshowsthenameoftheparameterwhichcanbeedited
viatheV-Potpositionedbelow.
ThelowerLCDrowshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparametereditedwiththeV-Pot.
Ifthereissufficientonscreenspace,theunittypewillbeadded—Example:Hz.
ÂTurningtheV-Potschangesparameters.
ÂPressingaV-Selectsetstheparametertoitsdefaultvalue,exceptwherethe
parameteronlyhastwovalues(on/off,forexample).Inthiscase,pressingtheV-
Selectswitchesbetweenthesevalues.
ÂTheCursorLeft/Rightbuttonsswitchtothenextorpreviousparameterpage.
Note:Whenshiftingbya“page”ofparameters,thedisplayis“quantized”tointeger
pages.Asanexample:
Âtheplug-inhas19parameters.
ÂLogicControlshowsparameters1to8.
ÂCursorRightshiftstodisplayparameters9to16.
ÂCursorRightshiftstodisplayparameters12to19.
ÂCursorLeftshiftsbacktodisplayparameters9to16,notparameters4to11.
Thisway,youalwaysreverttothepagepositionsyouexpecttofind,andare
comfortablewith.
ÂToswitchbyasingleparameter,ratherthanby“page,”holddownthex/ALTkey
whilepressingtheCursorLeft/Rightbutton.
ÂTheCursorUp/Downbuttonschangethecurrentlydisplayedplug-inInsertslot(1to
15).
Note:IfyouhaveacontrolsurfacegroupconsistingofseveralphysicalLogicControl
andXTunits,theparametersaredistributedacrosstheirdisplays.Thenumberof
parametersshownisdependentontheMultipleControlsPerParametersettingsinthe
Preferences>ControlSurfaces>Preferences,asdiscussedintheControlSurfaceSetup
chapter.
WhenexitingPlug-inEditview,thePlug-inwindowwillbeclosed.
Chapter2LogicControl 67
Compatibility
LogicControlcaneditallplug-insthatcanbeautomated.Theplug-intype(Logic
native,TDM,AudioUnits)isirrelevant.
Somethird-partymanufacturerplug-insunfortunatelydon’tprovideparameternames
and/orvaluesastext.Insuchcases,parametersareenumeratedas“Control#1,”
“Control#2”andsoon,withvaluesdisplayedasnumbersrangingbetween0and1000.
Pleasecontacttheplug-inmanufacturertoobtainaversionwhichsupportsthis
feature.
InstrumentAssignmentModes
PressingtheINSTRUMENTbuttonswitchestoInstrumentMultiChannelview.
PleasenotethatwheninPlug-inEditview,pressingtheINSTRUMENTbuttonwill
switchtoInstrumentEditview.
Ifyoucan’tseetheAudioInstrumentObjects,usetheBANKorCHANNELbuttonsin
theFADERBANKSzone,orswitchtoGlobalviewbypressingtheAUDIOINSTRUMENT
button.(ThisassumesthatyouhavecreatedatleastoneormoreAudioInstrument
ObjectsintheEnvironment.)
MultiChannelView
ThismodeshowstheInstrumentslotforallchannels.
ÂThemodedisplaywillshowIn(Instrument)
ÂTheupperLCDrowshowstracknames.
ÂThelowerLCDrowshowsthecurrentlyselectedinstrument.Mutedinstrument
namesareprecededbyanasterisk*.
ÂTurningtheV-Potspre-selectsanewinstrument.Thepre-selectedinstrumentname
flashesuntilactivated.
ÂTurninganotherchannel’sV-Potwillcancelanypreviouspre-selectionandwillstart
pre-selectiononthenewlyselectedtrack.
ÂPressingaV-Select:
Âactivatesthepre-selectedinstrumentplug-in(assumingthatyou’vemadeyour
pre-selectionbyturningtheV-Pot).
ÂopensaPlug-inwindow,ifnoneareopened.IfaPlug-inwindowisopen,andLink
modeisenabled,theselectionofanotherInstrumentplug-inwillreplacethe
existingone.
ÂswitchestoInstrumentEditview.
ÂPressingaV-SelectorMUTEbuttonwhiletheSHIFTbuttonishelddownmute/
unmutestheInstrument.
68 Chapter2LogicControl
Toremoveaninstrument:
1Pre-selectthe“--”value(byturningtheV-Potfullycounter-clockwise)
2PresstheV-Selectbutton.
LogicControlwillnotswitchtoInstrumentEditview,andnoPlug-inwindowwillbe
launched.Ifonewaspreviouslyopened,itwillbeclosed.
InstrumentEditView
ÂThemodedisplaywillshowIn.
ÂDependentontheNAME/VALUEbutton,theLCDchangesinthefollowingways:
ÂName—TheupperLCDrowshowsthetrack’sname,instrumentname,current
parameterpageandtotalnumberofparameterpages.ThelowerLCDrowshows
thenameoftheparameterthatcanbeeditedwiththeV-Potdirectlybelowit.
ÂValue—TheupperLCDrowshowsthenameoftheparameterthatcanbeedited
withtheV-Potbelowit.ThelowerLCDrowshowsthecurrentvalueofthe
parameterbeingedited.IfthereissufficientspaceontheLCDrow,theunittypeis
shownafterthevalue.Example:Hz.
ÂTurningaV-Potchangesthecorrespondingparameter.
ÂPressingaV-Selectsetstheparametertoitsdefaultvalue,exceptwherethe
parameteronlyhastwovalues(on/off,forexample).Inthiscase,pressingtheV-
Selectswitchesbetweenthesevalues.
Compatibility
LogicControlcaneditallinstrumentsthatcanbeautomated.Theplug-intype(Logic
native,TDM,AudioUnits)isirrelevant.
Somethird-partymanufacturerinstrumentsunfortunatelydon’tprovideparameter
namesand/orvaluesastext.Insuchcases,parametersareenumeratedas“Control#1,”
“Control#2,”andsoon,withvaluesdisplayedasnumbersrangingbetween0and1000.
Pleasecontacttheplug-inmanufacturertoobtainaversionwhichsupportsthis
feature.
Chapter2LogicControl 69
FaderBankZone
ThisareaoftheLogicControlsurfacecontainssixbuttons.
BankLeft/Right
Movesupordownby“banks”ofchannels/tracks.Toquicklyexplain,asingleLogic
Controlisonlycapableofviewingeighttracksatatime,ineithertheGlobalorMixer
view.Tosee,andeditormixmoretracks,simplypresstheRight/LeftBANKbuttonsto
switchbetweentracks1–8,9–16,17–24,andsoon.
TheBANKbuttonpairshiftstheviewsectionbythenumberofchannelsinthecontrol
surfacegroup.Asanexample;ifyouhaveaLogicControlandtwoLogicControlXT
units,theviewshiftsby24channels.
Whenshiftingbybank,thedisplayis“quantized”tointegerbanks.Asanexample:
Âyoursonghas19tracks.
ÂLogicControlshowstracks1to8.
ÂBANKRightshiftstotracks9through16.
ÂBANKRightshiftstotracks12 through19.
ÂBANKLeftshiftsbacktotracks9through16,nottracks4to11.
Thisway,youalwaysreverttothebankpositionsyouexpect,andareusedto.
ChannelLeft/Right
AspertheBANKbuttons,butmovesupordowninincrementsofasinglechannel.
NotesonFaderBankEditing
WhenholdingdowntheOPTIONbutton,pressingtheBANKLeftorCHANNELLeft
buttonjumpstothefirst,andpressingtheBANKRightorCHANNELRightbutton
jumpstothelast,tracksinthesong.Asanexampleina64tracksong,tracks1through
8ortracks57through64.
70 Chapter2LogicControl
ThefaderbankoffsetisindependentlymemorizedforGlobalviewswhereonetrack
classisdisplayed(MIDI,Inputs,AudioTracks,Instruments,Auxes,Busses,Outputs,and
Master).Thereisalsoaseparatefaderbankoffsetmemorylocationforcombinationsof
multipletracktypes.Thisfeatureallowsyoutoscrolltoaudiotracks2through9in
GlobalAudioTrackview,andthenscrolltoinstruments5through12inGlobal
Instrumentsview.Youcanswitchbetweentheseviewswithoutlosingthefaderbank
offset.
Flip
TheFLIPbuttonenables/disablesthefollowingFlip,Swap,orZeromodes:
ÂIftheLEDbesidetheFLIPbuttonisoff,Flipmodeisoff.Thefaderscontrolvolume.
ÂPressingtheFLIPbuttonenablesFlipmode(theLEDislit):inthismode,thecurrent
assignmentsoftheeightV-Potsaremirroredbytheeightchannelfaders.Pressing
theFLIPbuttonasecondtimedisablesFlipmode.
TurningaV-Potinthismodewillalsomovethecorrespondingfader.
ÂPressingtheFLIPbuttonwhiletheSHIFTbuttonisheldenablesSwapmode(theLED
willflash):inthismode,theencoderassignmentsareswappedwiththefader
assignments.PressingSHIFTandFLIPagaindisablesSwapmode.AstheLCD’slower
rowshowsthecurrentvalueoftheencoders,itwilldisplayvolumeswheninthis
mode.
ÂPressingFLIPwithoutSHIFTheldrevertstoFlipmode.
ÂPressingCONTROLandFLIPswitchestoZeromode.PressingCONTROLandFLIPa
secondtimedisablesZeromode.Inthismode,thefadersaresettozeroanddon’t
move.Thisisusefulforacoustic/microphonerecordingsifLogicControlislocatedin
therecordingbooth,andyoudon’twanttohear/captureanymotornoise.
BothFlipandSwapmodesworkinallviewmodes.
Flipmodehasthefollowingadvantages:
ÂYoucaneditanytypeofparameterwithafader,ratherthanaV-Pot,whichallows
moreaccurateedits.
ÂYoucaneditwithtouch-sensitivefaders.TheV-Potsarenottouch-sensitive,andthus
don’tallowexisting(controllerautomation)movementstobeoverwrittenwitha
constantvalue.
GlobalView
Thisbuttonisdiscussedin“TheGlobalViewZone”onpage74.
Chapter2LogicControl 71
MasterFader
ControlstheleveloftheMasterfaderintheLogicmixers.Thisreducesthelevelofall
tracks,butdoesnotaffecttheirrelativepositions.
WhenthereisnoMasterVolumeObjectinthesong,LogicControl’sMasterfaderis
mappedtoOutput1-2.
YouneedtoselectthisObject(Master)inordertosettheautomationmodeofthe
Masteroutput.Todoso,presstheOUTPUTSbuttonandselectthemasteroutputwith
thecorrespondingSELECTbutton.
Ifyouusemultipleaudiosystemssimultaneously,theMASTERfaderonlycontrolsthe
firstdevice’sMasterVolume(intheordershownintheAudioPreferenceswindow).
DisplayZone
ThesebuttonsaffectwhatyouseeintheLCDandPosition/TimeDisplay.
Name/Value
ToswitchbetweenthetwoDisplayformats—NameorValue—repeatedlypressthe
NAME/VALUEbuttonintheLogicControlDisplaysection—justbelowtheSMPTE/
BEATSLEDs.Formoreinformation,see“LiquidCrystalDisplay(LCD)”onpage49.
PressingtheNAME/VALUEbuttonwhileholdingtheSHIFTbuttoncyclesthroughthree
levelmetermodes:
ÂVertical—Inthismode,thesixth(last)characterofeachchannelinbothLCDrowsis
overlaidbyaverticallevelmeterbar.Thetextcharacterreappearswhenthelevel
meterisnotvisible.Thelast,ratherthanthefirst,characterwaschosenforthelevel
meter,asthischaracterisoftenunused,sonovaluableinformationis“blockedout”
bythelevelmeter.
Note:IfyoufindtheflickeringDofthedBunitdisturbingwhenlevelsaredisplayed,
youshouldswitchoffthedisplayofunits.See“ControlSurfacePreferences”on
page25.
ÂHorizontal—withPeakHold.Inthismode,thesecondrowisreplacedbyhorizontal
levelmeterbars.PeakHoldisshownasahollowboxwhichdisappearsafterthree
seconds.Overload(clipping)isdisplayedasanasterisk.ItremainsontheLCDuntil
cleared(seebelow).
ÂOff—Inthismode,nolevelmetersaredisplayedintheLCD.
72 Chapter2LogicControl
Inallthreemodes,theSIGNALLEDsfunctionasperusual,indicatingthepresenceofa
signal.
Note:TheMIDIbandwidthrequiredforthedisplayoflevelmetersisthesameinall
threemodes—andisverylow.ThePosition/TimeDisplayupdatesrequiremuchmore
MIDIbandwidththanthelevelmeters.
PressingtheNAME/VALUEbutton,whileholdingtheCONTROLbutton,clearsoverload
(clipping)inboththeLogicmixers,andthehorizontallevelmetersontheLogic
Control.
PressingtheNAME/VALUEbutton,whileholdingthex/ALTbutton,entersControl
SurfaceGroupSettingsmode.Thismodeenablesyoutoeditseveralcontrolsurface
groupsettings,someofwhicharenotaccessiblewithasinglebutton:
ÂV-Pot/V-Select5(label“TrkNam”)—setstracknamedisplayformat
“Name”—tracknameonly
“#:Name”—tracknumberandname
ThisparametercanalsobeswitchedwithOPTIONandNAME/VALUE.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select6(label“Lock”)—switchesChannelStripviewtracklock
“Off”—asyouareusedto:selectingatrackalsoswitchesthecurrentlyedited
ChannelStriptrack.
“On”—thecurrentlyeditedChannelStripTrackisnotaffectedbyselectingatrack.
WhenyouswitchfromOntoOff,thisalsoupdatestheChannelStriptrack.
ToeditanothertrackinLockedmode,firstdisableLock,thenselectthedesiredtrack,
thenre-enableLock.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select7(label“Disply”)—switchestheLCDdisplayformat.
“Name”—upperlinedisplaysglobalinfo,lowerlinedisplaysparameternames.
“Value”—upperlinedisplaysparameternames,lowerlinedisplaysparametervalues.
ThisparametercanalsobeswitchedwithNAME/VALUE.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select8(label“Clock”)—switchestheClockdisplayformat.
“Beats”—clockisdisplayedinformatbars/measures/beats/ticks.
“SMPTE”—clockisdisplayedinSMPTEformat.
ThisparametercanalsobeswitchedwithSMPTE/BEATS.
ControlSurfaceGroupSettingsmodecanbeexitedbypressingNAME/VALUE,orby
enteringoneoftheMarkerorNudgemodes.
SMPTE/Beats
ToswitchbetweenthetwoTimeformats,repeatedlypresstheSMPTE/BEATSbuttonin
theDisplaysectionatthetopoftheLogicControl—justbelowtheSMPTE/BEATSLEDs.
Formoreinformation,see“SongPosition/SMPTETimeDisplay”onpage49.
Chapter2LogicControl 73
TheFunctionKeyZone
TheeightFunctionkeys—F1toF8—areassignedasfollows:
ÂF1toF7recallsScreensets1to7.
ÂF8closesthetop-mostwindow,with“floating”windowsclosedfirst.
WiththeSHIFTkeyhelddown,theFunctionkeysopen/closeparticularwindows:
ÂF1—Arrangewindow
ÂF2—TrackMixer
ÂF3—EventEditor
ÂF4—ScoreEditor
ÂF5—HyperEditor
ÂF6—MatrixEditor
ÂF7—Transportwindow
ÂF8—Audiowindow
Withthex/ALTkeyhelddown,theFunctionkeystriggercommonkeycommands:
ÂF1—Cut
ÂF2—Copy
ÂF3—Paste
ÂF4—Clear
ÂF5—SelectAll
ÂF6—SelectAllFollowing
ÂF7—SelectSimilarObjects
ÂF8—SelectInsideLocators
Inmodaldialogs,theFunctionkeysareequivalenttothecomputer’snumberkeys:
ÂF1—1
ÂF2—2
ÂF3—3
ÂF4—4
ÂF5—5
ÂF6—6
ÂF7—7
ÂF8—8
74 Chapter2LogicControl
ThefollowingbuttonsdirectlybelowtheFunctionkeyssupplementthenumericinput
functions:
ÂMIDITracksbutton—9
ÂInputsbutton—0
Insomeother“modes,”theFunctionkeysperformotherduties,suchasshortcutsto
markers.Pleasesee“Marker”onpage79.Alsoseethetablesin“AssignmentOverview”
onpage89.
TheGlobalViewZone
TheGlobalviewmodeisactivatedbypressinganyoftheGLOBALVIEWbuttons.When
anyisactivated,thegreenLEDtotherightoftheGLOBALVIEWbuttonwillilluminate.
PressingmultipleGLOBALVIEWbuttonssimultaneouslywilldisplaythechannelsofthe
selectedclasses.
Todoso:
mHolddownanyGLOBALVIEWbutton,andaddorremoveotherObjectclassesby
pressingtheotherdesiredGLOBALVIEWbuttons.
ThedisplayordermatchestheorderofthesebuttonsonthefrontpaneloftheLogic
Control.
Youcanselectmultipleclassesbyclickingonmultiplebuttonssimultaneously.The
OUTPUTSbuttonactivatesbothOutputandMasterObjects.
Asanexample:Toseethebussesandtheoutputs,holddownBUSSES,andthenpress
OUTPUTS.
Chapter2LogicControl 75
FunctionButtonZone
Therearethreeareasinthiszone—Modifiers,Automation,andUtilities.
ModifierButtons
Thefourbuttonsinthisareaaresimilartothosefoundonyourcomputerkeyboard
(butareindependentfromthekeyboardmodifiers).ManyLogicfunctionsbehave
differentlywhenoneormore“modifier”key(s)ispressed,inconjunctionwithanother
keyormouseclick.ThisalsoappliestotheLogicControl.All“modified”LogicControl
commandsarecoveredineachfunction’sdescription.
Agenericdescriptionofeachbuttonfollows:
ÂSHIFT—analternatefunction/meaningforabutton.
ÂOPTION—thefunctionappliestoallobjects.Forrelativevaluechanges:thevalueis
settotheminimum,default,ormaximumvalue,dependingonwhetheryou
increase/decreaseit.
ÂCONTROL—whilehelddown,theGroupClutchisengaged—TrackGroupsare
temporarilydisabled.
Âx/ALT—finetuning/variationofthefunction.
AutomationButtons
Thefivebuttonsinthisareaactivate/deactivatethevariousautomationmodesof
Logic.TheseworkinconjunctionwiththechannelSELECTbuttons.Simplychoosethe
channelyouwishtoautomate,selecttheAutomationmodeviaoneofthesesix
buttons,andmovethecorrespondingfader.Themodesareoutlinedbelow:
ÂREAD/OFF—PressingthisbuttonrepeatedlyswitchesbetweentheReadandOff
automationmodes.
76 Chapter2LogicControl
ÂOff—Automationisoff.Thefaderwillneithersendnorreceiveautomationdata.
Existingautomationdataremainsuntouched.Itwillstillbehaveasafader,
however,andwilladjustthevolumeorpanpositionandsoonasusual.
ÂRead—Thefaderwillread(follow)anyexistingautomationdata,butwillnotwrite
data,regardlessofanymovementsyoumakewiththemouseorexternalcontrol
device.
ÂTOUCH—Writesnewparameterchangeswhenthefaderis“touched”orV-Potturned
duringplayback.Anyexistingtrackautomationdata(ofthecurrentfadertype)will
bereplacedbynewmovementsaslongasthecontrolisactive—whilethefaderis
beingtouchedorV-Potisbeingturned.
ÂLATCH—SimilartoTouchmode,butthecontrolremainsactivated,evenwhenthe
faderisnolongerbeing“touched”orV-Potbeingturned.Inotherwords,following
thereleaseofthefader,thecurrentfadervaluewillreplacetheexistingautomation
dataforaslongasthesequencerisinplaybackmode.PressSTOPtofinish.
ÂWRITE—Overwritesallexistingautomationdata,orcreatesnewautomationdata.
Onlyuseitifyouwishtodestroyallexistingautomationdata.
ÂTRIM—Notcurrentlyenabled.
PressingoneoftheAUTOMATIONbuttonswhileholdingtheOPTIONkeyassignsthe
selectedautomationmodeforalltracks.Whenanautomationmodehasbeenselected
foralltracks,thebutton’sLEDwillilluminatewhenevertheOPTIONkeyisheld.
Important:Thisbehaviorisslightlydifferentforthe“Off”automationmode,when
holdingdowntheOPTIONbutton.Whiledoingso,allautomation“writing”buttonswill
beturnedoff,butthisdoesnotnecessarilymeanthatalltracksareactuallyinOff
mode—theycouldalsobeindifferentmodes.Toensurethatyouhavesetalltracksto
Offmode,pressREAD/OFFtwice(itsLEDgoeson,thenoff),whileholdingdownthe
OPTIONkey.
Group
PressingtheGROUPbuttonentersGroupEditmode:
ÂGROUPbutton’sLEDison.
ÂTheAssignmentdisplayshowsthecurrentlydisplayedgroup—“G1”,forexample.
Chapter2LogicControl 77
ÂTheTimedisplayshowsthegroupname(tenlastcharactersifnameislongerthan
tencharacters).
ÂTheupperLCDlinedisplaystracknames.
ÂThelowerLCDlinedisplaysgroupparameters.
ÂGroupparameterscanbeswitchedwithV-Selects.
ÂCursorUp/Downselectsprevious/nextgroup.
ÂCursorLeft/Rightshiftsgroupparameterdisplay.
ÂSELECTbuttonsdisplayifatrackisamemberofthegroup.PressingaSELECTbutton
enables/disablestrackmembershipofthegroup.
WithGroupEditmodeoff,holdingdownGROUPandpressingoneormoreSELECT
buttonsallowsyoutocreateanewgroup.
PressingtheGROUPbutton,whiletheSHIFTbuttonishelddown,createsanewgroup,
openstheGroupwindowandentersGroupEditmode.
PressingtheGROUPbutton,whiletheTRACKbuttonisheld,switchestoTrackMulti
Channelview,withtheTrackGroupparametershown.Itdisplaysthegroupthatthe
instrumentbelongsto.MultiplegroupmembershipisdisplayedasintheTrackMixer
window.TurningaV-Potchangesgroupmembership.Notethatyoucanonlyselect
onegroup(or“Off”)withthisfunction.
UtilitiesButtons
Thefourbuttonsinthisareatriggerfunctionsthatareoftenusedwhenworkingwith
Logic.
Save
Savesthecurrentsongfile.Whenpressed,afilesavedialogwillopenonyour
computerscreen,awaitinginputofafilename.
TheLogicControlLCDwilldisplayThere is a file select dialog on the screen
andthePosition/TimeDisplaywillshowALERT.AllLEDsareunlit.
Oncethefilesavehasbeenconfirmed—inLogic—theLogicControlwillreturnall
controlstotheirstatuspriortouseoftheSavecommand.
Oncethesonghasbeensavedandgivenaname,youmayfreelyusetheSAVEbutton
tosaveanysubsequentchanges.Thiswilloccurwithoutthealertmessagesandfile
savedialogappearingonscreen.
Asageneralworkingtip,youshouldalwayssaveyourAutoload/Templatesongundera
differentnameasthefirststepinanyproject.Ifthispracticeisadheredto,youwillbe
abletosimplypresstheSAVEbuttonontheLogicControltoincrementallysaveyour
work.
78 Chapter2LogicControl
TheSAVELEDilluminatesassoonasanysave-ablechangehasbeenmadeinLogic.
HoldingdowntheOPTIONbuttonwhilepressingSAVEopensthe“SaveAs”fileselector
box.
Undo
PressingtheUNDObuttonundoesthelastundo-ableeditingstep.AsLogicsupports
near-unlimitedmultipleundo/redo,thegreenUNDOLEDdoesnotilluminateto
indicateanundo-ablestep,butrathertoindicatethatRedoisavailable.Thisservesasa
warningthatperformingareversibleeditingstepwouldrenderallRedosteps
unavailable.
HoldingdowntheSHIFTbuttonwhilepressingUNDOperformsa“Redo.”
HoldingdowntheOPTIONbuttonwhilepressingUNDOopenstheUndoHistory
window.
Cancel
Ifanalertisopenon-screen,ittriggerstheCancel(orAbort)button.Moreinformation
onalertsisfoundin“AboutModalDialogs”onpage45.PressingtheCANCELbutton
whennoalertisopenedwilllaunchtheToolboxatthecurrenton-screenpositionof
themousecursor.Alternately,itwillperformanyfunctioncurrentlyassignedtothe
computerkeyboard’sEsckey.
Ifnoalertisopen,andLogicControliscurrentlyshowingthecontentsofafoldertrack,
useoftheCANCELbuttonexitsthefolder.
CANCELalsoenablesyoutoinvalidatea(blinking)parametervaluepre-selection.
Enter
Ifanalertisopen,theENTERbuttontriggersthedefaultbutton.See“AboutModal
Dialogs”onpage45formoreinformation.
Ifnoalertisopen,andtheselectedtrackisafoldertrack,theENTERbuttonopensthe
folder.
Chapter2LogicControl 79
TheTransportZone
ThissectionoftheLogicControlfeaturestwelvebuttons.Allareequippedwitha
dedicatedLEDtoindicatetheircurrentstatus.
Itshouldbenotedthatthesebuttonscanbeusedindependently,orinconjunction
withoneanother,tonavigateandedityoursongs.
Thefunctionalityofthesebuttonsisasfollows:
Marker
TheMARKERbuttonenablesyoutojumpto,create,anddeletemarkers.
MarkerandNudgemodearemutuallyexclusive;activatingonedeactivatestheother.
SmallMarkerMode
Whenactive,theMARKERbuttonreassignsthebehavioroftheFASTFWDandREWIND
buttons.Theseallowyoutojumptothenextorpreviousmarker.
DeactivationoftheMARKERbuttonrevertstothedefaultbehavioroftheFASTFWD
andREWINDbuttons(see“Rewind”onpage85and“FastFwd”onpage85).
SmallMarkermodeisusefulifyouwanttojumptomarkers,butwishtocontinueusing
theV-Potsforotherpurposes.
LargeMarkerMode
PressingtheMARKERbuttonwhileholdingdownSHIFTshowsthree“create”options
ontheLCD,assignedtothelastthreeV-Selects.Oncemarkershavebeencreated:
80 Chapter2LogicControl
ÂV-Select1to5—displaysthefirstfivemarkersbyname.PressingaV-Selectmoves
theSPLtothisMarker.Whenthecurrentsongposition(indicatedbytheSPL)is
insideamarker,thelowerlinedisplaysINSIDE,andtheV-PotLEDringislit.
ÂV-Select6—Crw/o—Createsamarkerwithoutroundingtothenearestbar.
ÂV-Select7—Create—Createsamarkerroundedtothenearestbar.
ÂV-Select8—Delete—DeletesthemarkerabovethecurrentSPLlocation.
Tocreateordeleteamarkeratthecurrentsongposition,simplypresstheappropriate
V-Selectswitch.
ThecreationordeletionofmarkersisbestusedinconjunctionwiththeJog/Scrub
Wheel.Simplymovetothedesiredsongpositionbydialingwiththewheel,andthen
presstheappropriateV-Pot.
ÂForcoarseplacement,simplyusethewheeltomovetheSPL.
ÂForfineplacement,presstheSCRUBbutton,thenusethewheeltopreciselyposition
theSPL.(Onlyappropriateifcreatingordeletinganun-roundedmarker).
FormoreinformationontheJog/ScrubWheel,pleasereferto“TheJog/ScrubWheel
Zone”onpage88.
LargeMarkermodeisterminatedbypressingMARKER.
TemporaryMarkerMode
IfyouwanttoenterMarkermodetemporarily(toquicklyperformafewmarker
functions),holddowntheMarkerbuttonandpressone(ormore)oftheV-Selects:this
willexecutethemarkerfunctionandleavemarkermodeassoonasyoureleasethe
MARKERbutton.
ÂWheninthismode—withtheMARKERbuttonheld—pressingtheFunctionkeys
F1—F8“jumps”tothefirsteightmarkers(ifcreated).Asanexample,tonavigateto
marker3,press-holdMARKERandpressF3.
ÂTojumpbetweenmarkers,with(orwithout)theMARKERbuttonheld,simplypress
theFASTFWDorREWINDbuttons.
Chapter2LogicControl 81
Nudge
TheNUDGEbuttonenablesyoutomove(nudge)selectedAudioorMIDIRegions,or
events.
MarkerandNudgemodearemutuallyexclusive;activatingonedeactivatestheother.
SmallNudgeMode
UseoftheNUDGEbuttonreassignsthebehavioroftheFASTFWDandREWIND
buttons.TheynudgetheselectedRegionsoreventsbythevaluedefinedinLarge
Nudgemode(seebelow).
PressingtheNUDGEbuttonagainrevertstothedefaultbehavioroftheFASTFWDand
REWINDbuttons(see“Rewind”onpage85and“FastFwd”onpage85).
SmallNudgemodeisusefulifyouwanttonudgeRegionsorevents,butstillusetheV-
Potsforotherpurposes.
LargeNudgeMode
PressingtheNudgebuttonwhileholdingdownShiftupdatestheLCDtodisplayeight
options,assignedtotheV-PotsandV-Selects.Allfunctionsallowyoutomovethe
selectedRegionorevents.
Asanindicator,thepositionofthefirstselectedRegionoreventisdisplayedaboveV-
Pots3and4.Ifnothingisdisplayed,either;awindowthatdoesnotallowselectionof
Regionsoreventsisopen,ornoRegionsoreventsareselected.
Thefunctionsareasfollows:
ÂV-Pot1—Nudge—selectsthenudgevalueusedbytheREWINDandF.FWDbuttons.
Thesebuttonsmovetheselectedobject(s)backwards/forwardsbythedefinedvalue.
ÂV-Select2—Pickup—movestothecurrentSPLlocation.
ÂV-Pot3—Bar—movesbyonebar.
ÂV-Pot4—Beat—movesbythecurrentsongdenominatorvalue(beats).
ÂV-Pot5—Format—movesbythecurrentsongformatvalue(sub-divisions—1/16th
andsoon).
ÂV-Pot6—Ticks—movesbysingleticks.
ÂV-Pot7—Frames—movesbyoneSMPTEframe.
ÂV-Pot8—Fram/2—movesbyhalfaSMPTEframe.
82 Chapter2LogicControl
ÂThecursorbuttonsemulatethecomputerkeyboard’scursorkeys,allowingeasy
selectionofaRegionorevent.
LargeNudgemodeisterminatedbypressingNUDGE.
TemporaryNudgeMode
IfyouwanttouseNudgetemporarily(foroneortwosmallmoves),holddownthe
NUDGEkey,anduseoneormoreoftheV-Pots: thiswillexecutetheselectedfunction
andexitTemporaryNudgemodeassoonasyoureleasetheNUDGEbutton.
InTemporaryNudgemode,thecursorbuttonsemulatethecomputerkeyboard’s
cursorkeys,allowingeasyselectionofaRegionorevent.
TheNudgevaluefortheREWINDandF.FWDbuttonscanalsobedefinedwiththe
functionbuttons:
ÂF1—setsTicks.
ÂF2—setsFormat.
ÂF3—setsBeat.
ÂF4—setsBar.
ÂF5—setsFrames.
ÂF6—setsFrames/2.
Cycle
Activates/deactivatesCyclemode.Bydefault,thecycleareawillfallbetweenthefirst
twomarkers.
Subsequentmarkerscanactasleft/rightboundariesforfurthercycleareas.
To“jump”betweenCycleareas—definedbythemarkers:
1PresstheMARKERbutton.
2PresstheCYCLEbutton,andwhenactive,presstheREWINDorFASTFWDbuttons.
Tosettheleftorrightlocatortothecurrentsongposition:
mHolddownCYCLEandpressREWINDorFASTFWD.ThisalsoenablesCycle.
Thefastestwaytodefineanewcycleareaisto:
1NavigatetotheleftlocatorwiththeJog/ScrubWheel.
2PressCYCLEandREWIND.
3NavigatetotherightlocatorwiththeJog/ScrubWheel.
4PressCYCLEandFASTFWD.
Chapter2LogicControl 83
CycleView
PressingtheSHIFTandCYCLEbuttonsactivatesCycleviewmode:
ÂThemodedisplaydisplaysCy
ÂV-Pot/V-Select1—showsandeditsthecurrentCyclestatus(offoron);youcanalso
usetheCYCLEbutton.
ÂV-Select2—BySel—setsthecurrentCycleareabytheselectionmadeintheArrange
window(selectedAudioorMIDIRegion).
ÂV-Pot3—Move—movesthecurrentCyclebyabarwitheach“click”whenturning
theV-Pot
ÂThedisplayshowstheleftandrightlocatorsaboveV-Pots5and7.
ÂPressingV-Select5picksupthecurrentsongpositionfortheleftlocator.
ÂTurningV-Pot5changestheleftlocatorinbars.
ÂTurningV-Pot6changestheleftlocatorinbeats(denominatorsteps).
ÂPressingV-Select7picksupthecurrentsongpositionfortherightlocator.
ÂTurningV-Pot7changestherightlocatorinbars.
ÂTurningV-Pot8changestherightlocatorinbeats(denominatorsteps).
ToreturntoaregularAssignmentmode,pressoneoftheAssignmentbuttons.
Drop
Activates/deactivatesDrop-Inmode.
Tonavigatebetweendrop-inareas:
1PresstheMARKERbutton.
2PresstheDROPbutton,andwhenactive,presstheFASTFWDorREWINDbuttons.
TosettheDropInorDropOutlocatortothecurrentsongposition:
mHolddownDROPandpressFASTFWDorREWIND.ThisalsoenablesDrop.
ThefastestwaytodefineanewDropInareaisto:
1NavigatetotheDropInlocatorwiththeJog/ScrubWheel.
2PressDROPandREWIND.
3NavigatetotheDropOutlocatorwiththeJog/ScrubWheel.
4PressDROPandFASTFWD.
DropView
PressingtheSHIFTandDROPbuttonsactivatesDropview:
84 Chapter2LogicControl
ÂThemodedisplayshowsdr
ÂV-Pot/V-Select1showsandeditsthecurrentDropstatus(offoron);youcanalsouse
theDROPbutton.
ÂV-Pot3—Move—movesthecurrentDropregionbyabarwitheach“click”when
turningtheV-Pot.
ÂThedisplayshowstheDropInandDropOutlocatorsaboveV-Pots5and7.
ÂPressingV-Select5picksupthecurrentsongpositionfortheDropInlocator.
ÂTurningV-Pot5changestheDropInlocatorinbars.
ÂTurningV-Pot6changestheleftlocatorinbeats(denominatorsteps).
ÂPressingV-Select7picksupthecurrentsongpositionfortheDropOutlocator.
ÂTurningV-Pot7changestheDropOutlocatorinbars.
ÂTurningV-Pot8changestherightlocatorinbeats(denominatorsteps).
ChangingadroplocatorwiththeLogicControlenablesDropmode.
ToreturntoaregularAssignmentmode,pressoneoftheAssignmentbuttons.
Replace
Activates/deactivatesReplacemode.
Click
Enables/DisablesMIDI(orKlopfgeist)metronomeclick.Thereareindependentclick
settingsforplayandrecord.Theclicksettingsareenabledordisabled,dependenton
thecurrentRecordstate(seethe“MIDI/MonitorMetronomeClick”keycommand).
PressingSHIFTandCLICKbuttonsactivates/deactivatesbothExternalSyncmodeand
TransmitMMC.
Solo
TheSOLObuttonbehavesaspertheSolokeycommand.Individualchannelscanbe
soloedviathechannelSOLObuttonsoneachchannelstrip.MIDIorAudioRegionscan
beselectedandsoloedalongwiththeselectedchannels.Eachchannelfeaturesan
independentSOLOLEDwhichislitwhenatrackissoloed.TheRUDESOLOLED—just
totherightofthePosition/TimeDisplay—islitwheneveranytrackissoloed.
PressingtheSHIFTandSOLObuttonsenablesSoloLockmode.
Chapter2LogicControl 85
Rewind
Rewinds/shuttlesthroughthesong.Ifpressedrepeatedlywhilerewinding,therewind
speedisaccelerated.IftheFASTFWDbuttonispressedwhileREWINDisengaged,the
fastrewindwillbeslowed.RepeatedpressesoftheFASTFWDbuttonwillslowdown,
stop,andeventuallyreversetheshuttledirection.PressingtheSTOPbuttonwillhalt
therewind.UsingtheJog/ScrubWheelwillalsoexitshuttlemode.
WhenoneoftheMarkermodesisactivated,repeatedpressesoftheREWINDbutton
willmovetheSongPositionLine(SPL)tothepreviousmarker.
WhenoneoftheNudgemodesisactivated,theREWINDbuttonwillmovetheselected
Region(s)orevent(s)backwardbythevaluedefinedinLargeNudgemode.
FastFwd
Fastforwards/shuttlesthroughthesong.Ifpressedrepeatedlywhilefastforwarding,
theshuttlespeedisaccelerated.IftheREWINDbuttonispressedwhileFASTFWDis
engaged,thefastforwardwillbeslowed.RepeatedpressesoftheREWINDbuttonwill
slowdown,stop,andeventuallyreversetheshuttledirection.PressingtheSTOPbutton
willhaltthefastforward.UsingtheJog/ScrubWheelwillalsoexitshuttlemode.
WhenoneoftheMarkermodesisactivated,repeatedpressesoftheFASTFWDbutton
willmovetheSongPositionLinetothenextmarker.
WhenoneoftheNudgemodesisactivated,theFASTFWDbuttonwillmovethe
selectedRegion(s)orevent(s)forwardbythevaluedefinedinLargeNudgemode.
Asatip,youcancombinemarkerswithCycleareasbypressingtherespectivebuttons
ontheLogicControl.This,inconjunctionwithnavigationbetweenmarkers(usingthe
REWINDandFASTFWDbuttons),willmovetheSPLandautomaticallysetacyclearea
betweenadjacentmarkers.Trythis,andotheroptions,withvariousbutton
combinations.
86 Chapter2LogicControl
Stop
StopsallotherTransportfunctions.PressingtheSTOPbuttonasecondtimewillreturn
tothesongstartpoint,orthebeginningofthenearestcyclearea,ifCycleisactive.
Repeatedpresseswillswitchbetweenthetwo.
Play
Playsfromthecurrentsongposition.Ifpressedrepeatedly,itwilljumptothe
beginningofthenearestcyclearea,ifCycleisactive.
SHIFTandPLAYworksasaPausecommand.
Record
ActivatesrecordingontheselectedMIDI,audio,orAudioInstrumenttrack.
Aspecialnoteforaudiotracksifyouhavenot“SavedasProject”:Whenthefirstaudio
trackisarmedbypressingtheREC/RDYbuttononthedesiredchannel,afilesave
dialogwillopenonyourcomputerscreen,awaitingentryofafilename.TheLogic
ControlLCDdisplayshowsThere is a file select dialog on the screenandthe
Position/TimeDisplaywillshowALERT.AllLEDswillgooff.
Oncethefilenamehasbeenentered—inLogic—theLogicControlwillreturnall
controlstotheirpriorstatus.
Oncethe“default”audiofilenamehasbeenentered,youmayfreelyselectandarmany
Audiotrack,andthenpresstheRECORDbutton.Thiswillhappenwithoutthealert
messagesandfilesavedialogappearingonscreen.
Asageneralworkingtip,youshouldsaveyourAutoload/Templatesongasaproject
immediately.Thiswillavoidtheneedtodefinefilenames,andmakeshandlingfaster
andeasier—particularlywhen“driving”LogicwiththeLogicControl.
Chapter2LogicControl 87
TheCursor/ZoomKeyZone
Thiscollectionoffivebuttonsservesanumberofpurposes.
NormalOperation
WhentheZOOMbutton’sLEDisoff,thesebuttonsselectthecurrentparameter,shift
thecurrentparameterpageorSend/EQ/Insertslot,dependingonthecurrentV-Pot
assignment.
WhenholdingdowntheOPTIONbutton,theCursorLeft/Rightbuttonsscrolltothe
first/lastpage,andtheCursorUp/Downbuttonsscrolltothefirst/lastslot.
Whenholdingdownthex/Altbutton,theCursorLeft/Rightbuttonsshiftthe
parameterdisplaybyoneparameter,ratherthanonepage.
Inviewmodeswhichdon’trequirepageorslotshifts,theyemulatethecomputer
keyboard’scursorkeys.Example:TrackMultiChannelview.
InLargeandTemporaryNudgemode,theCursorLeft/Rightbuttonsemulatethe
computerkeyboard’scursorkeys,allowingeasyRegionoreventselection.
ZoomMode
PressingtheZOOMbuttonenablesZoommode.Thecursorbuttonsarethenusedto
changetheverticalorhorizontalzoomfactoroftheactivewindow.
IntheArrangewindow:
ÂOPTIONandCursorUp/Downchangesthezoomfactoroftheselectedtrack.
ÂOPTIONandCursorLeftresetsthezoomfactoroftheselectedtrack.
ÂOPTIONandCursorRightresetsthezoomfactorofalltracksofthesameclass(audio,
MIDI,andsoon)astheselectedtrack.
88 Chapter2LogicControl
ComputerCursorKeyEmulation
Tousethecursorbuttonsasareplacementforthecomputerkeyboardcursorkeys,
holddowntheSHIFTkey.
BypressingSHIFTandZOOM,thecursorbuttonsgotoPermanentCursorKeymode—
theymimicthecomputercursorkeyswithouttheneedtoholddownSHIFT.TheZOOM
buttonLEDflasheswheninthismode.
YoucandeactivatethismodebypressingtheZOOMbutton.
TheJog/ScrubWheelZone
TheJog/ScrubWheelandSCRUBbuttoncanbeusedtonavigatethroughthesong,
whichisusefulforanumberofTransporttasks.Simplyturnthedialtouseit.The
followingScrubmodeschangethebehavioroftheJog/ScrubWheel.
ÂScrubmodeoff:theJog/ScrubWheelmovestheSPL.
ÂScrubmodeon:theJog/ScrubWheelperforms“scrubbing,”whichallowsyouto
hearthedataoftheselectedtrackwhilescrolling/movingthroughthesong.
Audiotracksarenormallyplayedbackattheiroriginalspeed.Ifyouwouldpreferto
hearthematdoublespeed,choosePreferences>Audio>Drivers,andsetMaximum
ScrubSpeedtoDoubleinthepull-downmenu.
Note:YoucanalsousetheSCRUBbuttonforPausefunctionality.
ÂSHUTTLEmode(ScrubbuttonLEDflashing):theJog/ScrubWheelshuttlestheSPL—
turningitincreasesordecreasesthespeedofSPLmovement.
Chapter2LogicControl 89
AssignmentOverview
Thefollowingassignmenttablesarebrokendowninto“zones”oftheLogicControl.
ChannelStrip(x8)
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
V-Pot — ModifyparameterdisplayedinLCD.
OPTION Setparametertominimum,default,ormaximumvalue.
x/ALT Modifyparameterathighresolution.
V-Select — SetparameterdisplayedonLCDtodefaultvalue,or:Switchbetween
twopossiblevalues.
Flashingpre-selection:
—Enterthepre-selectedvalue.
Menuoptions:
—Enterwhateveroptionisvisibleindisplay.
Iftrackisfolder:
—Enterfolder.
REC/RDY — Activate/DeactivateRecordEnablebuttonoftrack.
OPTION DisableRecordEnablebuttonforalltracks.
SOLO — Activate/DeactivateSolobuttonoftrack’sAudioObject.
OPTION DisableSolobuttonforallAudioObjects.
InSendDestination/LevelMultiChannelview:
—Switchpre/poststatusofselectedsend.
InSendDestination/LevelChannelStripview:
—Switchbetweenpre/postofsendonselectedtrack.
90 Chapter2LogicControl
MUTE — Activate/DeactivateMutebuttonoftrack’sAudioObject.
OPTION DisableMutebuttonforallAudioObjects.
InTrackMultiChannelview:
SHIFT Activate/Deactivatemute/bypassoftheshownparameter.
InEQMultiChannelview:
SHIFT Activate/DeactivatebypassofthecurrentEQband.
InEQFrequency/Gainview:
—Activate/DeactivatebypassofselectedEQband.
InSendMultiChannelview:
SHIFT Activate/Deactivatebypassofselectedsend.
InSendDestination/LevelMultiChannelview:
—Activate/Deactivatebypassofselectedsend.
InSendDestination/LevelChannelStripview:
—Activate/Deactivatemuteofsendonselectedtrack.
InPlug-inMultiChannelview:
SHIFT Activate/Deactivatebypassofplug-in.
InInstrumentMultiChannelview:
SHIFT Activate/Deactivatebypassofinstrument.
SELECT — Selecttrack.
SHIFT Settrackvolumetounitylevel(0dB).
OPTION Createsanewtrackwiththesameinstrumentastheselectedtrack
andswitchestoArrangeview.
SHIFT+
OPTION
Createanewtrackwiththenextinstrument(followingtheselected
track)andswitchestoArrangeview.
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
Chapter2LogicControl 91
ASSIGNMENTSection
Holddowntoshowsoft-buttonmenu;releasetoswitchV-PotstoMultiChannelor
ChannelStripviewsfor:
FADER — Adjustvolume.
InFlipmode“Duplicate”:
—SamefunctionasV-Potofsamechannel.
InFlipmode“Swap”:
—SwapfunctionwithV-Potofsamechannel.
InSurroundAngle/Diversityview:
—Adjustsurrounddiversity.
InEQFrequency/Gainview:
—AdjustgainofselectedEQband.
InSendDestination/LevelMultiChannelview:
—Adjustsendlevelofselectedsend.
InSendDestination/LevelChannelStripview:
—Adjustsendlevelofsendonselectedtrack.
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
TRACK — Trackparameters
PAN/SURROUND — Pan/Surroundparameters
EQ — EQparameters
SEND — Sendparameters
PLUG-IN — Plug-inselectionorPlug-inEditmode
INSTRUMENT — InstrumentselectionorInstrumentEditmode
BANK<> — Shiftfaderbankleft/rightbynumberofchannelstrips.
OPTION Shiftfaderbanktobeginningorend.
CHANNEL<>—Shiftfaderbankleft/rightbyonechannel.
OPTION Shiftfaderbanktobeginningorend.
FLIP — SwitchFlipmodebetweenOffandDuplicate.
SHIFT SwitchFlipmodebetweenOffandSwap.
CONTROL SwitchFlipmodebetweenOffandZero(turnsfadermotorsoff ).
GLOBALVIEW — SwitchbetweenMixerviewandGlobalview.
SHIFT SwitchbetweenMixerviewandArrangeview.
92 Chapter2LogicControl
DISPLAYParameters
FunctionButtons
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
NAME/VALUE — Switchbetweenparameternameandparametervaluedisplay.
SHIFT Cyclethroughlevelmeterdisplays:vertical,horizontal,andoff.
OPTION Switchbetweentracknameandtracknumber:namedisplay.
CONTROL Clearclip/overloadflags.
x/ALT Entercontrolsurfacegroupsettingsmode.
SMPTE/BEATS — SwitchbetweenSMPTEandbeatformatinclockdisplay.
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
F1 — RecallScreenset1.
SHIFT Open/CloseArrangewindow.
x/ALT Cut
TRACK SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Volume.
PAN/
SURROUND
SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Pan/surroundangle.
EQ SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Bypass.
SEND SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Destination.
MARKER Createmarkerwithoutrounding.
NUDGE Nudgevalue:Tick
Inmodaldialog: F1keyisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard1key.
F2 — RecallScreenset2.
SHIFT Open/CloseTrackMixerwindow.
x/ALT Copy
TRACK SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Pan.
PAN/
SURROUND
SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Pan/surroundradius.
EQ SwitchtoMultiChannelview—EQType.
SEND SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Level.
MARKER Createmarkerwithrounding.
NUDGE Nudgevalue:Format
Inmodaldialog: F2keyisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard2key.
Chapter2LogicControl 93
F3 — RecallScreenset3.
SHIFT Open/CloseEventEditor.
x/ALT Paste
TRACK SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Trackmode.
PAN/
SURROUND
SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Pan/surroundLFE.
EQ SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Frequency.
SEND SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Position.
MARKER Deletemarker.
NUDGE Nudgevalue:Beat
Inmodaldialog: F3keyisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard3key.
F4 — RecallScreenset4.
SHIFT Open/CloseScoreEditor.
x/ALT Clear
TRACK SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Input.
PAN/
SURROUND
SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Pan/surroundmode.
EQ SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Gain.
SEND SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Mute.
NUDGE Nudgevalue:Bar
Inmodaldialog: F4keyisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard4key.
F5 — RecallScreenset5.
SHIFT Open/CloseHyperEditor.
x/ALT SelectAll.
TRACK SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Output.
PAN/
SURROUND
SwitchtoChannelStripview.
EQ SwitchtoMultiChannelview—QFactor.
SEND SwitchtoChannelStripview.
NUDGE Nudgevalue:Frame
Inmodaldialog: F5keyisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard5key.
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
94 Chapter2LogicControl
F6 — RecallScreenset6.
SHIFT Open/CloseMatrixEditor.
x/ALT SelectAllFollowing
TRACK SwitchtoMultiChannelview—Automation.
PAN/
SURROUND
SwitchtoAngle/Diversityview.
EQ SwitchtoChannelStripview.
SEND SwitchtoChannelStrip2view.
NUDGE Nudgevalue:1/2Frame
Inmodaldialog: F6keyisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard6key.
F7 — RecallScreenset7.
SHIFT Open/CloseTransportwindow.
x/ALT SelectSimilarRegions/events.
TRACK SwitchtoMultiChannelview—DisplayedParameter
PAN/
SURROUND
SwitchtoSurroundX/Yview.
EQ SwitchtoFrequency/GainMultiChannelview.
SEND SwitchtoDestination/LevelMultiChannelview.
Inmodaldialog: F7keyisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard7key.
F8 — Closetop-mostfloatingwindow.
SHIFT Open/CloseAudiowindow.
x/ALT SelectInsideLocators.
TRACK SwitchtoTrackSetupview.
EQ SwitchtoFrequency/GainChannelStripview.
SEND SwitchtoDestination/LevelChannelStripview.
Inmodaldialog: F8keyisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard8key.
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
Chapter2LogicControl 95
GLOBALVIEWButtons
MODIFIERS—WhileHeldDown:
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
MIDITRACKS — SwitchtoGlobalviewandshowMIDItracks.
SHIFT Settofaderbankno.1(tracks1to8,forexample).
Inmodaldialog: MIDITRACKSbuttonisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard9key.
INPUTS — SwitchtoGlobalviewandshowAudioInputObjects.
SHIFT Settofaderbankno.2(tracks9to16,forexample).
Inmodaldialog: INPUTSbuttonisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard0key.
AUDIOTRACKS — SwitchtoGlobalviewandshowAudioTrackObjects.
SHIFT Settofaderbankno.3(tracks17 to24,forexample).
Inmodaldialog: AUDIOTRACKSbuttonisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard’speriod
key.
AUDIO
INSTRUMENTS
—SwitchtoGlobalviewandshowAudioInstrumentObjects.
SHIFT Settofaderbankno.4(tracks25to32,forexample).
Inmodaldialog: AUDIOINSTRUMENTSbuttonisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard/
key.
AUX — SwitchtoGlobalviewandshowAuxObjects.
SHIFT Settofaderbankno.5(tracks33to40,forexample).
Inmodaldialog: AUXbuttonisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard*key.
BUSSES — SwitchtoGlobalviewandshowBusObjects.
SHIFT Settofaderbankno.6(tracks41to48,forexample).
Inmodaldialog: BUSSESbuttonisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard–key.
OUTPUTS — SwitchtoGlobalviewandshowOutputsandMasterObjects.
SHIFT Settofaderbankno.7(tracks49to56,forexample).
Inmodaldialog: OUTPUTSbuttonisequivalenttocomputerkeyboard+key.
USER — Currentlyunassigned.
SHIFT Settofaderbankno.8(tracks57to64,forexample).
LogicControl Function/Comments
SHIFTSwitchtosecondfunction.
OPTION Applyfunctiontoalltracksorsetparametertominimum,default,ormaximum
value.
CONTROL DisableGroupfunctionswhilehelddown.
x/ALT Enablefinemode;shiftparameterpagebyoneparameterinsteadofpage.
96 Chapter2LogicControl
AUTOMATIONButtons
UTILITIESButtons
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
READ/OFF — Setselectedtrack’sautomationtoReadorOff.
OPTION Setalltracks’automationtoReadorOff.
TOUCH — Setselectedtrack’sautomationtoTouch.
OPTION Setalltracks’automationtoTouch.
LATCH — Setselectedtrack’sautomationtoLatch.
OPTION Setalltracks’automationtoLatch.
WRITE — Setselectedtrack’sautomationtoWrite.
OPTION Setalltracks’automationtoWrite.
TRIM Currentlyunassigned.
GROUP — EnterGroupEditmode.
SHIFT Createanewgroup,opentheGroupwindowandenterGroupEdit
mode.
TRACK SwitchtoTrackMultiChannelview,displayingTrackGroupparameter.
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
SAVE — SaveSong.
OPTION SaveSongas.
UNDO — Undo
SHIFT Redo
OPTION OpenUndoHistory.
CANCEL — Leavefolder.
Flashingpre-selection:
—Cancelpre-selection.
Inalerts:
—ExecuteCancelbutton.
ENTER — Enterfolderofselectedtrack.
Inalerts:
—Executedefaultbutton.
Chapter2LogicControl 97
TRANSPORTButtons
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
MARKER — SwitchSmallMarkermodeon/off.
SHIFT SwitchLargeMarkermodeon/off.
NUDGE — SwitchSmallNudgemodeon/off.
SHIFT SwitchLargeNudgemodeon/off.
MARKER Createamarker.Thisallowsyoutocreateamarkerwithonehand
withoutenteringLargeMarkermode.
CYCLE — Activate/DeactivateCycle.
SHIFT SwitchtoCycleview.
DROP — Activate/DeactivateDrop.
SHIFT SwitchtoDropview.
REPLACE — Activate/DeactivateReplace.
CLICK — Activate/Deactivatemetronomeclick(separatelyforplaybackand
record).
SHIFT Activate/Deactivateinternal/externalsyncandMMC.
SOLO — Activate/DeactivateSoloLockfunction.
SHIFT EnableSoloLockfunction.
REWIND<< — Shuttlerewind.
MARKER Gotopreviousmarker.
NUDGE Nudgeleftbychosenvalue.
CYCLE EngageCyclefunctionandsetleftlocatortoSPL.
DROP EngageDropandsetDropIntoSPL.
InMarkermode:
—Gotopreviousmarker.
InNudgemode:
—Nudgeleftbychosenvalue.
F.FWD>> — Shuttleforward.
MARKER Gotonextmarker.
NUDGE Nudgerightbychosenvalue.
CYCLE EngageCyclefunctionandsetrightlocatortoSPL.
DROP EngageDropandsetDropOuttoSPL.
InMarkermode:
—Gotopreviousmarker.
InNudgemode:
—Nudgerightbychosenvalue.
STOP—Stop.
98 Chapter2LogicControl
CursorKeysandScrubWheel
PLAY—Play
SHIFT Pause
RECORD—Record
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
CursorLeft/Right IfinMultiChannelview:
—Selectprevious/nextparameterofcurrentview.
ZOOM Scrollwindowhorizontallybypage.
IfinChannelStripEQ,SendvieworPlug-in/InstrumentEditview:
—Shiftcurrenteditorpagebyonepage.
x/ALT Shiftcurrenteditorpagebyoneparameter.
ZOOM Scrollwindowhorizontallybypage.
Otherwise(alwaysinNudgemode):
—MimiccomputerkeyboardLeft/RightArrowkeys.
ZOOM Scrollwindowhorizontallybypage.
InZoommode:
—Changehorizontalzoomlevel.
SHIFT Resetindividualtrackzoomofcurrenttrack(CursorLeft)oralltracksof
sameclass(CursorRight).
CursorUp/Down InChannelStripEQ,SendvieworPlug-In/InstrumentEditorview:
—Selectprevious/nextEQband,Send,orInsertslot.
ZOOM Scrollwindowverticallybypage.
Otherwise(alwaysinNudgemode):
—MimiccomputerkeyboardUp/DownArrowkeys.
ZOOM Scrollwindowverticallybypage.
InZoommode:
—Changeverticalzoomlevel.
SHIFT Changeindividualtrackzoomofcurrenttrack.
ZOOM — Switchbetweendefaultcursorbuttonbehavior(seeabove)andZoom
mode.
SHIFT Switchbetweendefaultcursorbuttonbehaviorandpermanently
mimickingcomputerkeyboardarrowkeys.
SCRUB — Activate/DeactivateScrubmode.
SHIFT EnableShuttlemodeontheJogWheel(SCRUBbuttonLEDflashes)
Chapter2LogicControl 99
ExternalInputs
JogWheel—Movesongpositionline.
CYCLE SettheLeftlocatortothecurrentSPL,advancetheSPLasnormally,
thensettheRightlocatortotheSPL.FurtherJogWheelturnswhile
stillholdingdownCYCLEadvancestheSPLandsetstheRightlocator
again.Tip:RotatingtheJogWheelcounterclockwisewhileholding
downCYCLEdefinesaskip-cyclerange.
DROP SettheDropInlocatortothecurrentSPL,advancetheSPLas
normally,thensettheDropOutlocatortotheSPL.FurtherJogWheel
turnswhilestillholdingdownDROPadvancestheSPLandsetsthe
Dropoutlocatoragain.
InScrubmode(SCRUBbuttonLEDon):
—Scrub
InShuttlemode(SCRUBbuttonLEDflashing):
—Shuttle
LogicControl Modifier Function/Comments
LogicControl Modifier Function
USERSWITCHA— Play/Stop
USERSWITCHB— DropIn/Out
EXTERNAL
CONTROL
—MasterVolume
3
101
3M-AudioiControl
ThischapterwillintroduceyoutousingLogicProwiththeM-
AudioiControl.
TheiControlsupportinLogicProhasbeendesignedtoensurefullGarageBand
compatibility.WhenaGarageBandsongisimportedintoLogic,theiControlcanbe
usedtoeditthesonginexactlythesamefashionasitwouldinGarageBand.
Logic,however,offersmanymorefunctionsthanGarageBand,leadingtosomeiControl
buttonsnotbeingassignedasyoumightexpectinLogic.Butdon’tworry:youcan
easilyreassignthesebuttonsusingthesophisticatedControlSurfacesAssignments
EditorofLogic(seetheControlSurfacechapterformoreinformation).
TouseLogicwithaniControlunit,youneed:
ÂaniControlunit
ÂLogicPro7.2,orlater
ÂafreeUSBport
SettingUptheiControl
SettingupyouriControlforusewithLogicisasimpleprocess:ConnecttheiControlto
anyofyourcomputer’sUSBports.
LogicautomaticallydetectsaconnectediControl.YoucanusetheiControlinan
independentcontrolsurfacegroup(withothercontrolsurfaceiconsplacedabove/
belowtheiControlicon),orcombinedintoonecontrolsurfacegroupwithoneormore
controlsurfaces.
IfCyclemodeisenabledinyoursongoranytracksaremuted,thecorrespondingLEDs
willbeilluminated,reflectingeachtrack’scurrentstatus.
Thefollowingsectionswillprovideyouwithinformationonaccessingparametersand
functionsthatmaynotbeapparentatfirstglance.Youarestronglyencouragedto
experimentwiththeseparametersandfunctions—thiswillhelptofamiliarizeyouwith
iControlsupportinLogic.
102 Chapter3M-AudioiControl
Compatibility
TheiControlcaneditallplug-insthatofferparameterswhichcanbeautomated.
ManyLogicplug-ins—effectsandAudioInstruments—plusthoseofthird-party
manufacturers,featuredozensofparameters.Everyoneoftheseparameterscanbe
accessedbytheiControl.
Togiveyouanexampleofhowthisworks,imagineaplug-inthatcontains,say,16
parameters.
Onceyou’veswitchedtotheappropriateChannelStripViewoftheplug-inyouwishto
adjust,youcandirectlyaffectparameters1to8withencoders1to8.Youcanthen
switchbya“page”toaccessparameters9to16.
SimplypresstheArrowUporArrowDownbuttontostepup/downtothenext“page”
ofparameters.
Shouldyoufindthatyourthird-partyplug-indoesnotsupportremoteeditingorother
featuresmentionedinthisdocument,pleasecontacttheplug-inmanufacturerto
obtainanupdatedversionthatsupportsthesefacilities.
ChannelViews
Thechannelssection(theeightchannelstripsontherightsideofyouriControl;each
channelstripcomprisesofaSelect,RecordEnable,Mute,andSolobuttonplusarotary
encoder)operatesintwoview“modes”—MultiChannelandChannelStripView.
Switchingbetweenthesemodesonlyaffectstherotaryencoders,withtheother
channelcontrolsalwaysremaininginMultiChannelView.
ÂMultiChannelView—accessesoneparameterforeighttracks,suchaspanorvolume
(normallyasectionoftheTrackMixerwindow).
ÂChannelStripView—accesseseightparametersoftheselectedtrack.
SwitchingtoaMultiChannelorChannelStripviewisachievedbypressingoneofthe
Assignmentbuttons(seethefollowingsection).
TheAssignmentButtons
Thetwobuttonareaslabelled“AllTracks”and“SelectedTrack”areusedtodefinethe
behaviorofthechannelstripbuttons.
Volume
PressingtheVolumebuttonentersVolumeMultiChannelView;youcanusetherotary
encoderstocontroltheVolumefaderoftheeightactivetracksinthismode.
Chapter3M-AudioiControl 103
TheotherchannelstripbuttonsmaintainthedefaultMultiChannelViewfunction:
ÂSelbuttons:Selectsthetrackforediting.
ÂRecordEnablebuttons:Enables/disablesthetrackforrecording.
ÂMutebutton:Activates/deactivatestheMutebuttonoftheAudioObjectthat
correspondswiththetrack.
ÂSolobutton:Activate/deactivatestheSolobuttonoftheAudioObjectthat
correspondswiththetrack.
Pan
PressingthePanbuttonentersPanMultiChannelView;youcanusetherotary
encoderstocontrolthePanknoboftheeightactivetracksinthismode.
TheotherchannelstripbuttonsmaintainthedefaultMultiChannelviewfunction:
ÂSelbuttons:Selectsthetrackforediting.
ÂRecordEnablebuttons:Enables/disablesthetrackforrecording.
ÂMutebutton:Activates/deactivatestheMutebuttonoftheAudioObjectthat
correspondswiththetrack.
ÂSolobutton:Activate/deactivatestheSolobuttonoftheAudioObjectthat
correspondswiththetrack.
TrackInfo
PressingtheTrackInfobuttonentersTrackChannelStripView.Inthismode,youcan
usetheSelbuttonsandrotaryencodersoftheeightchannelstripstoeditglobal
parametersoftheselectedtrack.TheRecordEnable,Mute,andSolobuttonsmaintain
theirdefaultMultiChannelviewfunctions.
ÂSelbutton1to5:SwitchesthebypassstatusofthefirstfiveInsertslots.
ÂSelbutton6and7:SwitchesthebypassstatusofthefirstandsecondSendslots.
Note:ASelectbuttonisilluminatediftheInsertorSendslotisenabled,andunlitifthe
effectisbypassed.
ÂSelbutton8:Notassigned.
ÂEncoder1:InGarageBand,everyRealInstrumenttrack(RealInstrumenttracksare
audiotracksinLogic)containsaNoiseGateplug-in.Giventhisdefaultplug-in
assignment,encoder1isassignedtocontrollingtheThresholdparameterofthe
NoiseGateinTrackChannelStripmode(ifinsertedintheselectedchannelstrip).
ÂEncoder2:InGarageBandsongs,everyRealInstrumenttrackcontainsaCompressor
plug-in.Again,inTrackChannelStripmode,encoder2isassignedtocontrollingthe
Compressor’sRatio(ifinsertedintheselectedchannelstrip).
ÂEncoders3and4arenotassigned.
ÂEncoder5controlsthePanknobofthechannel.
ÂEncoder6controlstheSendlevelofthefirstSend.
104 Chapter3M-AudioiControl
ÂEncoder7controlstheSendlevelofthesecondSend.
ÂEncoder8controlstheVolumefaderofthechannel.
Generator
PressingtheGeneratorbuttonallowsyoutoeditallsoundgenerationparametersof
thesoftwareinstrumentfortheselectedtrack.TheArrowUpandArrowDownbuttons
switchtothepreviousornexteightparameters.
Note:Thismodecanonlybeaccessediftheselectedchannelstripcontainsanaudio
instrument.
Effect1andEffect2
PressingEffect1orEffect2allowsyoutoedittheparametersofthethirdorfourth
Insertslotoftheselectedtrack(whereapplicable).
ÂTurningtheencoderschangestheparametervalue.
ÂTheArrowUpandArrowDownbuttonsswitchtothepreviousornextparameter
page.
Note:Whenshiftingbya“page,”thisalways“quantizes”tointegerpages.Asan
example:Theplug-inhas19parametersandtheiControldisplaysparameters1to8.
ÂPressingtheArrowDownbuttonshiftstoparameters9to16.
ÂPressingtheArrowDownbuttonagainshiftstoparameters12to19
ÂPressingtheArrowUpbuttonshiftsbacktoparameters9to16,not4to11.
Thisway,youalwaysreverttothepagepositionsyouexpecttofind,andare
comfortablewith.
PressingtheEffect1orEffect2buttonwhilepressingtheOptionbuttonswitchesthe
bypassstatusofInsertslots3and4,respectively.
EQ
PressingtheEQbuttonallowsyoutoeditallEQparameters—inallbands—forthe
selectedtrack.
PressingtheEQbuttonopensorclosestheChannelEQplug-inwindowofthetrack.If
noChannelorLinearPhaseEQispresentontheselectedtrack,aChannelEQwillbe
insertedautomaticallywhentheEQChannelStripViewisentered.
Note:YoucanusetheArrowDownandUpbuttonstoswitchtothenextorprevious
parameterpage.
Chapter3M-AudioiControl 105
ArrowUpandArrowDownButtons
TheArrowUpandArrowDownbuttonsmoveupordownby“banks”oftracks(or
between“pages”ofparameters,asdiscussedearlier).Toquicklyexplain,asingle
iControldeviceisonlycapableofviewingeighttracksatatime.Tosee,andeditormix
moretracks,simplypresstheArrowUporArrowDownbuttontoswitchbetween
tracks1to8,9to16,17to24andsoon.
Notethatwhenshiftingbybank,thisalways“quantizes”tointegerbanks.Asan
example:Yoursonghas19tracks,andtheiControlisdisplayingtracks1to8.
ÂPressingtheArrowDownbuttonshiftstotracks9to16
ÂPressingtheArrowDownbuttonagainshiftstotracks12 to19
ÂPressingtheArrowUpbuttonshiftsbacktotracks9to16,not4to11
Thisway,youalwaysreverttothebankpositionsyouexpect,andareusedto.
Note:PressingtheArrowUpbuttonwhileholdingdowntheOptionbuttonjumpsto
thefirsttracks,andpressingtheArrowDownbuttonjumpstothelasttracksinthe
song—asanexample(ina64tracksong),tracks1to8ortracks57to64.
IftheGenerator,EQ,Effect1,orEffect2buttonisilluminated,theArrowUpandArrow
Downbuttonshavedifferentfunctionality.Seethesectionsabovefordetails.
TheChannelStrip(s)
Aseachchannelstripisidentical,theinformationdiscussedinthissectionapplies
equallytoalleightoftheiControlchannelstrips.
SelectButton
Thisbuttonisusedtoselectachannelforchannel-basededitingorassignment
commands.EachchannelfeaturesanindependentSelectLEDwhichislitwhenatrack
isselected.
Note:IftheTrackInfobuttonisilluminated,theSelectbuttonsbehavedifferently.See
“TrackInfo”onpage103fordetails.
RecordEnableButton
Thisbuttonarmsordisablesthechannelforrecording.Eachchannelfeaturesan
independentRecordButtonLEDwhichilluminateswhenatrackis“armed”for
recording.
Note:HoldingdowntheOptionbutton,whilepressinganyRecordEnablebuttonwill
disarmalltracks.
106 Chapter3M-AudioiControl
MuteButton
Usedtomutethetrack’ssignal.EachchannelfeaturesanindependentMuteLEDwhich
illuminateswhenatrackismuted.
Note:HoldingdowntheOptionbutton,whilepressinganyMutebuttonwillunmute
alltracks.
SoloButton
Usedtosolochannelsignals.EachchannelfeaturesanindependentSoloLEDwhich
illuminateswhenatrackissoloed.
Note:HoldingdowntheOptionbutton,whilepressinganySolobuttonwilldisable
soloforalltracks.
Encoder
Theeightencodersareusedforanumberofoperations,dependingonthecurrent
statusoftheAssignmentbuttonstotheleft.See“TheAssignmentButtons”on
page102.
Note:PressingtheOptionbuttonwhileturninganencodersetstheRelativeController
modetoFull:Theencoderswitchesbetweentheparameter’sminimum,default,or
maximumvalue.
TheJogWheel
TheJogWheelcanbeusedtonavigatethroughthesong,whichisusefulforanumber
oftransporttasks.Simplyturnthedialtomovetoasongposition.
TheTransportZone
ThissectionoftheiControlfeaturessixbuttons.
Itshouldbenotedthatthesebuttonscanbeusedindependently,orinconjunction
withoneanother,tonavigateandedityoursongs.
RecordButton
Activatesrecordingontheselectedtrack.
ReturntoZeroButton(RTZ)
MovestheSPLtothebeginningofthesong.
Chapter3M-AudioiControl 107
RewindButton
HoldingtheRewindbuttonmovesthesongpositionlinebackwards.Quicklypressing
theRewindbuttononce,movestheSPLonebarbackwards.PressingtheRewindand
CyclebuttonssimultaneouslyenablesCyclemode,andsetstheleftborderoftheCycle
area(leftlocator)tothecurrentsongposition.
Play
Playsfromthecurrentsongposition.Ifpressedduringplayback,itwillstopplayback.
FastForwardButton
HoldingtheFastForwardbuttonmovesthesongpositionlineforwards.Quickly
pressingtheFastForwardbuttononce,movestheSPLonebarforward.Pressingthe
FastForwardandCyclebuttonssimultaneouslyenablesCyclemode,andsetstheright
borderoftheCyclearea(rightlocator)tothecurrentsongposition.
Cycle
Activates/deactivatesCyclemode.Bydefault,theCycleareawillfallbetweenthefirst
twomarkers.
YoucanusetheiControltosettheleftorrightlocatortothecurrentsongpositionand
enableCyclemode.
TodefineanewCyclearea,usingtheCyclebutton:
1NavigatetothedesiredleftlocatorpositionwiththeJogWheel.
2Dooneofthefollowing:
ÂPresstheCycleandRewindbuttonssimultaneously,navigatetothedesiredright
locatorpositionwiththeJogWheel,thenpresstheCycleandFastForwardbuttons
simultaneously.
ÂHolddowntheCyclebutton,navigatetothedesiredrightlocatorpositionwiththe
JogWheel,thenreleasetheCyclebutton.
MasterFader
ControlstheleveloftheMasterfaderintheMixerwindowsofLogic.Thisreducesthe
levelofalltracks,butdoesnotaffecttheirrelativepositions.
108 Chapter3M-AudioiControl
AssignmentOverview
Thefollowingassignmenttablesarebrokendowninto“zones”oftheiControl.
AssignmentSection
TheAssignmentsbuttonintheAllTracksandSelectedTracksareadefinesthebehavior
ofthechannelstripbuttons.
ChannelStrip(x8)
iControlbutton Modifier Function/Comments
Volume — Encoderscontroltrack’sVolumeparameter.
Pan—Encoderscontroltrack’sPanparameter.
Generator — Encoderscontrolsoftwareinstrumentparameters.
TrackInfo — Encoderscontroltrackparameters.
EQ — EncoderscontrolEQparameters.
Effect1—EncoderscontrolInsert3parameters.
Effect2—EncoderscontrolInsert4parameter.
Option—Modifierforothercontrols;whilehelddown,themodifiedcontrol
eitherappliesthefunctiontoalltracksorsetstheparametertoits
minimum,default,ormaximumvalue.
ArrowUp/Down—Shiftfaderbankleft/rightbynumberofchannelstrips.
Option Shiftfaderbanktobeginningorend.
iControlModifier Function/Comments
Encoder — Modifycurrentlyselectedparameter.
Option Setparametertominimum,default,ormaximumvalue.
RecordEnable — Activates/DeactivatesRecordEnablebuttonoftrack.
Option DisableRecordEnablebuttonforalltracks.
Solo — Activates/DeactivatesSolobuttonoftrack.
Option DisableSolobuttonforalltracks.
Mute — Activates/DeactivatesMutebuttonoftrack.
Option DisableMutebuttonforalltracks.
Sel—Selecttrack,exceptinChannelStripmode.
Chapter3M-AudioiControl 109
JogWheel
TransportButtons
iControlModifier Function/Comments
JogWheel — MoveSongPositionLine.
Cycle SettheLeftlocatortothecurrentSPL,advancetheSPLasperusual,
thensettheRightlocatortothenewSPLposition.FurtherJogWheel
turns(totheright)whileholdingdowntheCyclebuttonadvancesthe
SPLandresetstheRightlocatorposition.Tip:rotatingtheJogWheel
counter-clockwise(totheleft)whileholdingdownCycledefinesa
skip-cyclerange.
iControl Modifier Function/Comments
Record — Record
ReturnToZero — Gotobeginningofsong
Rewind — MovetheSPLonebarbackward.Ifheld,continuetoscrollbackwards.
Cycle EngageCyclefunctionandsetleftlocatortoSPL.
Play — PlayorStop
FastForward — MovetheSPLonebarforward.Ifheld,continuetoscrollforwards.
Cycle EngageCyclefunctionandsetrightlocatortoSPL.
Cycle — SwitchCyclemodeonoroff.
4
111
4EuConSupportofEuphonixMC
andSystem5-MC
LogicPro7.2.1supportstheEuConprotocoldevelopedby
Euphonix,enablingenhancedcommunicationbetweenthe
MCorSystem5-MCandLogic.
ThefollowingchapterdescribeshowtheMCandSystem5-MCcontrolLogicinEuCon
mode.PleasenotethatthisisanaddendumtotheMCoperationmanualandislimited
todescriptionsofLogicspecificfeatures.Pleaserefertothedeviceoperatingmanuals
formoreinformationaboutyourcontrolsurface(s).
SettingUptheMCorSystem5-MCWithLogic
PleasefollowthestepsoutlinedinthesectionbelowtouseyourMCorSystem5-MC
withLogic.
TosetuptheMCorSystem5-MCwithLogic:
1SetupyourMCand/orCM408TunitsasdescribedintheMCoperationmanual.
2InstalltheEuConWSsoftware(version1.1.2 orlater)onyourMacintosh.
3EnsurethatyourMacintoshcomputerissetupasaworkstationontheMC(seeMC
operationmanual).
4AssumingthattheMCsoftwareisrunningontheMC:SelecttheEuphonixMenuicon
ontheMCTouchscreenandchoosethePrefsmenuitem,thengototheAbouttab.
EnsurethatEuConversionis1.1.2 orlater.Ifitisn‘t,you‘llneedtoupdatetheEuCon
software.GototheEuphonixwebsiteformoreinformation.
Note:IfyouhavebeenusinganearlierEuConversion,youshoulddeleteorrename
theLogicPro.xmlfilebeforeinstallingnewerEuConversions.Thisfileisusedwhen
controllingLogicwiththeEuphonixdevice(s)HUIemulation,whichcausesconflicts
whencontrollingLogicinEuConmode.ExittheMCandreturntotheoperatingsystem
bychoosingEuphonix>Shutdown>ExittoOperatingSystem,thenopenthe
C:\ProgramFiles\Euphonix\EuCon\UserSets\MCUser\MC_USER_SET__Rootfolderand
renameordeletetheLogicPro.xmlfile.
112 Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC
5IfyouhaveaCM408TandthecorrectMCsoftwareisrunning:ChooseEuphonix>
Prefs>Modules,selecttheCM408Tinthe“AllOnline”list,thentouch“Add.”
6LaunchLogicPro7. 2 .1.
ThestartupscreenadvisesthatLogicisstartingEuCon.
7OntheMC,presstheworkstationbuttonassociatedwithyourMacintoshcomputer.
TheMCdisplaywillshowan“AttachingtoLogicPro”progressbar.
Note:TheEuConsupportofLogicisnotachievedthroughspecialcontrolsurfaceplug-
ins.Asaconsequence,youcannotusetheControlSurfaceAssignmentsEditorto
changeassignments.YoucanonlyusethefacilitiesprovidedbytheMCorSystem5-
MC.Moreinformationaboutthiscanbefoundintheoperationmanualsprovidedwith
yourEuCondevice(s).EuCondevicesdonotappearintheControlSurfacesSetup
window.
SettingUpSoftKeyAssignments
The“LogicPro.xml”ApplicationSetfile—installedwithEuConversion1.1.2— feat ures a
numberofusefulSoftKeyassignments.TheMCTouchscreencanbeusedtoeditthem.
TochangeaSoftKeyassignment:
1SelecttherespectiveSoftKey.
2TouchtheEuphonixMenuicon,thenchooseSetupintheensuingpop-upmenu.
3ChoosethedesiredEuConcommandinthemenu.
LogicsupportsthefollowingEuConcommands:
ÂKeyCommands:AllLogickeycommands(exceptthetransportcommands)arefound
here.TheTouchscreenusesthesamehierarchyastheKeyCommandswindow.Many
ofthesekeycommandsswitchbetweenstates(on/off,forexample)orsetavalue.
MostalsoprovidefeedbackontheSoftKey(asanexample:aSoftKeyassignedto
theOpen/CloseScoreEditorcommandisilluminatedwhenaScoreEditorwindowis
open).
ÂLeftWheel/RightWheel:Thecommandsfoundhereallowyoutoconfiguretheleftor
rightwheeltoperformacertainactionwhenturned.Thisincludeshorizontalor
verticalzoom,waveformzoom,individualtrackzoom,movelocators,adjustleft
locator,adjustrightlocator,movedroplocators,adjustdropin(punchin),adjust
dropout(punchout),movemarker,adjustmarkerlength,nudgeselectedRegionsor
events,left/rightpan(surroundX),andfront/backpan(surroundY).
Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC 113
ÂProject>Markers:Allmarkersdefinedintheopensongareshownasalist.Assigning
aSoftKeytoamarkercommandwilldisplaythemarkertitleontheSoftKeyLCD
display.PressingtheSoftKeywillmovetheSPLtothemarkerstartpoint.TheSoft
KeyisilluminatedwhiletheSPLfallswithinthemarkerboundaries.Renaminga
markerinLogicalsochangestheassociatedSoftKeytitle.Movingamarker,however,
disconnectstheSoftKeyfromthemarker.
ÂTransport:Alltransportrelatedkeycommandsarefoundhere.
Note:MarkerSoftKeysareapartoftheApplicationSet,notthesongdata.Don’tforget
tosavetheUserSetafterdefiningaMarkerSoftKey.
Main-TracksTouchscreen
TheMCMain-TracksTouchscreenalwaysdisplaysasong‘stracks(channels)intheTrack
Mixer‘s(adaptive)Trackview:
ÂThechannelsarelaidoutinthesameorderasintheArrangewindow.
ÂRedundanttracksaresuppressed(notaccessible),wheremultipletracksrepresent
thesameoutput.
Note:Filteredselections(differentviewmodes)arenotreflectedontheMCMain-
TracksTouchscreentracklist.
Thetransportinformationisdisplayedasfollows:
ÂSMPTEclock
ÂBars/beatstime
ÂLeftlocator
ÂRightlocator
Main-Layouts
LayoutsareautomaticallysavedwiththeLogicsong.Whenre-loadingasong,all
definedlayoutsareavailable.
Faders
ThefollowingsectionoutlinesthefunctionalityoftheMCfaderelementsinLogic.
SoloKeys
ThiskeyactivatestheSolobuttonforeachAudioObject.
114 Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC
OnKeys
TheMCOnkeysprovidethesamefunctionalityastheMutebuttonsinLogic,butwork
inreverse:AnMCOnkeymustbelittohearthechannel.Ifachannelstriphasbeen
mutedinLogic,thecorrespondingMCchannelOnkeyisnotilluminated.Atrackthatis
notmutedfeaturesalitOnkey.
LLED
WhentheLogictrackcontrolledbythefaderbelongstoanautomationgroup,theL
LEDonthechannelstripislit.
TouchingFaderSelectsTrackPreference
Pleasenotethatthe“Touchingfaderselectstrack”preferenceofLogic(Logic>
Preferences>ControlSurfaces>Preferences)doesnotapplytotheMCandSystem5-
MCwhentheyareusedwiththeEuConprotocol.ThisfunctionisofferedbytheMC
itself,withthe“Selectchannelbytouchingfader/joystick“preference.
ChoosingAutomationModes
TheMCandSystem5-MConlysupportReadandWriteautomationmodes.Logic,
however,alsofeaturesTouchandLatchautomationmodes.Whenyouusethese
deviceswithLogic,activatingthe“ReadandWrite“modeintheTouchscreenactivates
TouchmodeinLogic.LatchmodecannotbeactivatedwiththeMCorSystem5-MC.
WhenyouchooseLatchmodewiththemouseinLogic,thegreenRandredWLEDs
arelit(asperReadandWritemode).
Tochooseanautomationmode:
1PresstheWaveandSelectkeyssimultaneously.
2Selectthedesiredautomationmodeinthepop-upmenudisplayedonthe
Touchscreen.Youcanchoosebetween:
ÂIsolate:Automationmodeisoff.
ÂRead:ActivatesReadmodeinLogic.
ÂWrite:ActivatesWritemodeinLogic.
ÂRead/Write:ActivatesTouchmodeinLogic.
Note:Ifawriteautomationmode(Touch,Latch,Write)isactive(andanautomation
parameterenabledintheLogic>Preferences>Automation>Touch/Latch/WriteErase
settingsischosen),theredWLEDislit.ThegreenLEDislitwhenareadautomation
modeisactive.
Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC 115
Knobsets
WhenusingtheEuphonixMCwithLogic,aknobsetcontainspages,eachcomprisedof
eightparameters.
Thetoplevelknobsetleadstothefollowingknobsets:
ÂInserts:PressingtheInsertsSoftKeyswitchestoalistofcurrentlyinstantiatedplug-
ins(seethefollowingsectionfordetails).TheOnkeyislitifaplug-inisenabled(not
bypassed)anddoesnotbelongtothedynamic,EQ,orfilterplug-ingroups.(Please
notethatthisalsoappliestoAudioUnitplug-ins.)PressingtheOnkeyswitchesthe
bypassstateofallplug-insthatdonotfallintothedynamic,EQ,orfiltergroups.
ÂInput:PressingtheInputSoftKeyswitchestoinputparameters(see“InputKnobset”
onpage116).
ÂDyn:TheDynSoftKeyisnotcurrentlyusedtodisplayalist,orallowediting,of
dynamicplug-ins.TheOnkeyislitwhenanyDynamicplug-insareenabled(not
bypassed).PleasenotethatthisonlyappliestoLogicplug-ins,notAudioUnitplug-
ins.PressingtheOnkeyswitchesthebypassstateofallDynamicplug-ins.
ÂEQ:PressingtheEQSoftKeyswitchestoEQediting(see“EQKnobset”onpage118).
TheOnkeyislitwhenEQplug-insareenabled(notbypassed).Pleasenotethatthis
onlyappliestoLogicplug-ins,notAudioUnitplug-ins.PressingtheOnkeyswitches
thebypassstateofallEQplug-ins.
ÂSends:PressingtheSendsSoftKeyswitchestoSendeditingmode(see“Sends
Knobset”onpage118).
ÂPan:PressingthePanSoftKeyswitchestoPan/Surroundeditingmode(see“Pan/
SurroundEditingKnobset”onpage119).
ÂGroups:PressingtheGroupsSoftKeyswitchestoGroupeditingmode(see“Groups
Knobset”onpage119).
ÂOutput:PressingtheOutputSoftKeyswitchestoOutputparametereditingmode
(see“OutputKnobset”onpage119).
Inserts(Configuration)Knobset
Inthismode,theSoftKeysdisplaytheeffectplug-insinsertedontheselectedtrack.
Ifmorethaneighteffectplug-insareinstantiated,youcanusetherightPagekeyofthe
leftPagekeysettodisplayensuingplug-ins.
Toeditaneffectplug-in:
1PresstheSoftKey(orrespectiveknobtop)thatfeaturesthenameoftheeffectplug-in
thatyouwishtoedit.
ThisswitchestoEffectPlug-inEditingmode.Theparametersoftheplug-inare
displayedintheordershownintheControlsviewoftheeffect.
2Turntherespectiveknob(s)tochangethedesiredvalue(s).
116 Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC
Pressingaknobtopsetsthecontrolledparametertoitsdefaultvalue.Forparameters
withonlytwovalues,theOnkeyislitwhenthevalueis1(oron)andunlitwhenthe
valueis0(oroff).PressingtheOnkeyswitchesbetweenthetwovalue.
Iftheplug-infeaturesmorethaneightparameters,usetheleftPagekeysettonavigate
betweenpagesofparameters.
PressingtheBackkeyreturnstotheInserts(Configuration)knobset.
Toinserteffectplug-ins:
1IntheInserts(Configuration)Knobsetmode,pressbothPagekeyssimultaneously.
ThisswitchestoEffectInsertmode.TheSoftKeysdisplaythefirsteightInsertslotsofa
channel.
2SelectthedesiredInsertslotbypressingtherespectiveknobtop.Youcanusetheleft
PagekeytodisplayInsertslots9to15.
Whenyoupresstherespectiveknobtop,theSoftKeysdisplaytheLogicplug-inmenu
thatappearswhenyouclick-holdonanInsertslotwiththemouse.
∏Tip:IftheselectedInsertslotalreadycontainsaneffectplug-in,theMCreflectsthe
boldmenuentries(indicatingtheselectedplug-inname/type)withalitOnkey.
3Choosethedesiredeffectplug-in:
ÂPressingtheSoftKeyorknobtopentersasubmenuorinsertsaselectedeffectplug-
in.
ÂPressingtheBackkeynavigatesuponelevelinthemenuhierarchy.
InputKnobset
IftheInputknobsetisactive,theSoftKeysdisplayallpossibleinputvaluesforaudio
tracks:
ÂThefirstvalueis“--”,meaningnoinput.
ÂThecurrentlyactiveinputvalueisindicatedbyalitOnkey.
ÂPressingtherespectiveOnkey,SoftKeyorknobtopchoosestherespectiveinput
value.
ÂIftherearemorethaneightvalues(inputs),theleftPagekeysetswitchestothe
previous/nextvalues.
ÂPressingthetwoPagekeyssimultaneouslyswitchestoInputConfigurationmode:
theSoftKeysdisplaymodevalues(Mono,Stereo,Left,Right)forthetrack.Again,the
activevalueisindicatedbyalitOnkey.PressingtherespectiveOnkey,SoftKeyor
knobtopchoosestherespectivevalue.
ÂPressingtheBackkeyreturnstothetop-levelknobset.
OnAudioInstrumenttracks,theInputknobsetdisplaystheinsertedinstrument.
Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC 117
Toeditaninstrument:
mPresstherespectiveknobtoporSoftKey.
InstrumentparametersaredisplayedintheordershownintheControlsviewofthe
plug-in.Turningaknobchangestheparametervalue.Pressingaknobtopsetsthe
controlledparametertoitsdefaultvalue.Forparameterswithonlytwovalues,theOn
keyislitwhenthevalueis1(oron)andunlitwhenthevalueis0(oroff).
Tochangeorinsertaninstrument:
1PressbothPagekeyssimultaneously.
ThisswitchestoInsertInstrumentmode.TheSoftKeydisplayindicatestheInstrument
slotofthechannel.WhenyoupresstheknobtoporSoftKey,theSoftKeysdisplaythe
Instrumentplug-inmenuthatappearswhenyouclick-holdonanInstrumentslotwith
themouse.
2ChoosethedesiredInstrumentplug-in:
ÂPressingtheSoftKeyorknobtopentersasubmenuorinsertsaselectedinstrument
plug-in.
ÂPressingtheBackkeynavigatesuponelevelinthemenuhierarchy(orswitchesback
totheInputKnobsetifyouareinthetoplevelofthemenu).
OpeningandClosingPlug-inwindows
LogicsupportstheMC“Openpluginsonworkstationwhenediting”and“Closeplugins
onworkstationwhenexiting”preferences.
ThisbehaviorisdependentontheLinkbuttonbeingenabledinplug-inwindows.Ifa
Link-enabledplug-inwindowisopen:
“Openpluginsonworkstationwhenediting”doesnotopenanewwindowwhena
newplug-inisselected,butwillreplacetheopenwindow’scontents.
“Closepluginsonworkstationwhenexiting”doesnothing.
Otherwise,“Openplug-insonworkstationwhenediting”opensanewplug-inwindow,
withtheLinkbuttondisabled.“Closepluginsonworkstationwhenexiting“closesthe
Plug-inwindow.
Dyn(amic)Knobset
Thisknobsetisnotcurrentlyimplemented.
118 Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC
EQKnobset
ThisknobsetallowsyoutoeditthefirstEQplug-in(ChannelEQorLinearPhaseEQ).
Therearetwopages,witheachbandfeaturingtwoknobs.Page1showsthe
parametersofthefirst,second,7th,and8thEQbands.Page2showstheparametersof
EQbands3to6.WhennoLinearPhaseorChannelEQispresentontheselectedtrack,
pressingthelastSoftKeyinthesecondrow(labeledAddChEQ)insertsaChannelEQ.
Foreachband:
ÂTheupperknobcontrolseitherFrequencyorQ.YoucanswitchbetweenFrequency
orQwiththeSelectkeyfortheKnobset.Pressingtheknobtopsetsthecontrolled
parametertoitsdefaultvalue.
ÂThelowerknobcontrolsGain(orSlope).Again,pressingtheknobtopsetsthe
controlledparametertoitsdefaultvalue.
ÂThelowerknob‘sOnkeyswitchesthebypassstateoftheband.Whenthebandis
bypassed,theOnkeyisunlit.Whenthebandisactive,theOnkeyisilluminated.
Toreturntothetop-levelknobset:
mPresstheBackkey.
SendsKnobset
TheSendsknobsetdisplaysthecurrenttracksendoptions.
ÂTheSoftKeyshowsthesenddestination.
ÂTheknobcontrolssendlevel.
ÂTheSelectkeyswitchesbetweenprefader(off—unlit)andpostfader(on—lit)
modes.
ÂTheOnkeyswitchesthebypassstateofthesend.
ÂPressingbothPagekeyssimultaneouslyentersSendConfigurationmode(seethe
followingsection).
ÂPressingtheBackkeyreturnstothetop-levelknobset
SendConfigurationKnobset
InSendConfigurationmode,alistofthefirsteightSendslotsisdisplayed.
Whenyoutouchtheknob,theSoftKeyshowsthesendlevel(providedthesendslotis
alreadyassignedtoabus).
Tochangeasenddestination:
1SelectthedesiredSendslotbypressingtherespectiveSoftKeyorknobtop.
ThefirsteightSenddestinationsaredisplayed.YoucanusetherightPagekeyofthe
leftPagekeysettodisplayensuingSenddestinations.
2ChoosethedesireddestinationbypressingtherespectiveSoftKeyorknobtop.
Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC 119
Toreturntosendeditingmode:
mPresstheBackkey.
Pan/SurroundEditingKnobset
ThisknobsetdisplaysthePanparameterunlessSurroundmodeisactiveonthetrack(s).
OntrackswhereSurroundModeisactive,thisknobsetdisplays:
ÂSurroundAngle
ÂSurroundDiversity
ÂLFE
ÂSurroundX(left/right)
ÂSurroundY(front/back)
ÂCenterLevel
PresstheBackkeytoreturntothetop-levelknobset.Pressingaknobtopsetsthe
controlledparametertoitsdefaultvalue.
GroupsKnobset
Thisknobsetdisplaysallcurrentlyusedautomationgroups.
ÂTheSoftKeysshowgroupnames.Presstochoosetherespectivegroup(s).
ÂTheOnkeydisplaysandswitchesbetweenactive/inactivegroupmembershipforthe
track.
ÂPressingtheBackkeyreturnstothetop-levelknobset.
OutputKnobset
IftheOutputknobsetisactive,theSoftKeysdisplayallpossibleoutputvaluesforthe
track:
ÂThefirstvalueis“Surround,”thesecondis“--”,meaningnooutput.
ÂThecurrentlyactiveoutputisindicatedbyalitOnkey.
ÂPressingtheOnkey,SoftKey,orknobtopchoosestherespectiveoutputvalue.
ÂIftherearemorethaneightoutputs,youcanusetherightPagekeyoftheleftPage
keystodisplayensuingoutputs.
ÂIftheselectedtrackisasurroundtrack,pressingthetwoPagekeyssimultaneously
willswitchtoSurroundOutputConfigurationmode:theSoftKeysdisplaythe
surroundformatparameters(Stereo,LCR,CenterOnly,Quadro,andsoon)ofatrack.
Again,theactivevalueisindicatedbyalitOnkeyandpressingtheOnkey,SoftKey
orknobtopchoosestherespectivevalue.
ÂPressingtheBackkeyreturnstothetop-levelknobset.
120 Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC
AssignableKnob
TheAssignableKnobcanbeusedforcontrolofanyparameterthatcanbeautomated.
Youmustclickonthetargetparameterwiththemouse.Pointingwiththemouseisnot
sufficienttoassignaparameter.
Pressingtheknobtoplocks/unlockstheAssignableKnob.Whenlocked,clickinga
parameterwiththemousewillnotreassigntheAssignableKnob.
BoththeOnandtheSmartkeyswitchthecurrentlyassignedparameterbetween
valuesof0and1(usefulforon/offparameters).
MonitorsandControlRoom
LogicProdoesnotsupportEuConmonitoringcontrol.PleaseusetheStudioMonitor
Proapplication.
ClearKeys
The“ClearMute”and“ClearSolo”keysturnoffMuteorSoloonalltracks.TheClear
Mute/ClearSolokeyislitwhenanytrackismuted/soloed.
ThebuttonwithoutalabelabovetheClearMutekeyprovidesaspecialfeatureonthe
CM408T:whenitisactive(lit),pressingaCM408Tkey/knobactivatestherespective
view(knobsets,sub-menus,andsoon)forallchannels.
TrackControlBar
TheTrackControlBaroftheLogicArrangewindowoffersaspecialfeatureonthe
EuphonixMCandSystem5-MCdevices:itshows“attentioned”tracksinlightblue.All
currently“accessed”tracksareshownindarkblue.
Note:ThecolorofthetrackcontrolbarcannotbechangedintheControlSurface
Setupwindow.
System5-MCSpecificFeatures
ThissectiondescribeshowtheSystem5-MC‘sCM408TfadermodulecontrolsLogicin
EuConmode.
TFTDisplay
ÂLevelmeters:Displaytheleveloftherespectivetrack.Twodiscretestereolevel
metersareshownforstereotracks.
ÂTrackInfosection:Displaysthetrackname,number,stereo/surroundmode,inputand
outputassignments.
Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC 121
ÂGraphs:Inallknobsets(exceptEQ),thegraphsectiondisplaysthecurrentpanor
surroundposition.IftheEQknobsetisselected,thegraphsectiondisplaysthe
currentfrequencyresponse.IftheEQplug-inisbypassed,thecurveisdisplayedin
gray,ratherthangreen.
ÂKnobsetassignment:Theeightlinesnormallydisplaytheassignmentofaknob.The
currentvalueofaknobisdisplayedwhenitistouched.IntheOutputandGroup
knobset,agreenframeisshownaroundthetextofknobcellswithalitOnkey.
ÂColorbar:Thecolorcorrespondstothecolorassignedtotheaudiochannel(orLogic
instrument)ofthetrack.
TwoKeysAboveKnobsets
PressingthetwokeysaboveaknobsetisequivalenttopressingtheMCBackkey:You
moveuponelevelinthehierarchy,ifapplicable.
KnobCells
TheCM408TknobcellsarealmostidenticaltotheMCknobcells.Thereisjustone
difference:Theyfeatureafour-characterLED,butnoSoftKey.
TopLevelKnobsetKeys
Thesekeysallowyoutoaccessknobsetsdirectly:
“*”(asterisk)key:SameasInsertsSoftKey(see“Inserts(Configuration)Knobset”on
page115).
ÂInput:AccessesInputknobset(see“InputKnobset”onpage116 )
ÂDyn:SelectstheDynamicknobset(see“Dyn(amic)Knobset”onpage117).
ÂEQ:SelectstheEQ/Filterknobset(see“EQKnobset”onpage118).
ÂAux:SelectstheSendsknobset(see“SendsKnobset”onpage118).
ÂPan:SelectsthePanknobset(see“Pan/SurroundEditingKnobset”onpage119).
ÂGrp:SelectstheGroupknobset(see“GroupsKnobset”onpage119).
ÂMix:SelectstheOutputknobset(see“OutputKnobset”onpage119).
InKeys
Thesekeysallowyoutoswitchthebypassstatusofparticularplug-intypes.
ÂInsInkey:Switchesthebypassstatusofallplug-insthatdonotbelongtothe
dynamic,EQ,orfiltercategories(pleasenotethatthisalsoappliestoAudioUnit
plug-ins).
ÂDynIn:Switchesthebypassstatusofalldynamicplug-ins(pleasenotethatthisonly
appliestoLogic,notAudioUnitplug-ins).
ÂEQIn:SwitchesthebypassstatusofallEQplug-ins(pleasenotethatthisonlyapplies
toLogic,notAudioUnitplug-ins).
ÂFiltIn:Switchesthebypassstatusofallfilterplug-ins(pleasenotethatthisonly
appliestoLogic,notAudioUnitplug-ins).
122 Chapter4EuConSupportofEuphonixMCandSystem5-MC
IdenticalKeys
ThefollowingCM408TkeysworkinthesamefashionastheirMCcounterparts:
ÂPage/Configurekey
ÂChannelSelectkey
ÂReckey
ÂSolokey
ÂOnkey
5
123
5CMLabsMotormix
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂEnsurethatyourMotormixunit(s)areconnectedbi-directionallywiththeMIDI
interface.
ÂChooseLogicPro>Preferences>ControlSurfaces>Setup.
ÂChoosetheNew>InstallmenuitemfromtheSetupwindow’slocalmenu.
ÂSelect“Motormix”intheInstallwindow,choose“Add,”thensettheappropriateMIDI
InandOutportsintheSetupwindow—foreachMotormixunit.
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(SHIFT,forexample)belowabuttondescription
indicatesthatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthis
modifier.
SelectButtons
TheSelectbuttons(buttonsjustbelowtheLCD)havemultipleuses,dependingonthe
currentmode.
Mode Assignment
normal SelectstrackdisplayedinupperLCDline.Trackscanbeshiftedtotheleftandright
withtheViewleftandrightbuttons.
bankbutton
LEDflashing
Track View Select mode: selects type of tracks to be displayed:
Â1:TrackView
Â2:ArrangeView
Â3:GlobalView,MIDItracks
Â4:GlobalView,Inputchannels
Â5:GlobalView,Audiotracks
Â6:GlobalView,AudioInstruments
Â7:GlobalView,Bus,andAuxchannels
Â8:GlobalView,Outputs,andMaster
124 Chapter5CMLabsMotormix
WINDOW/
toolbutton
LEDon
Opens,activates,orclosesawindowofacertainclass.
LEDoff:Ifthewindowisnotopen,thebuttonopensit.
LEDon:Ifthewindowisopen,butnotactive,thebuttonactivatesit.
LED flashes: If the window is active, the button closes it.
Â1:ArrangeWindow
Â2:TrackMixer
Â3:EventList
Â4:ScoreEditor.
Â5:HyperEditor
Â6:MatrixEditor.
Â7:Transportwindow
Â8:Audiowindow.
WINDOW/
toolbutton
flashes
Chooses a tool.
Â1:Pointer
Â2:Pencil
Â3:Eraser
Â4:Texttool
Â5:Scissors
Â6:Glue
Â7:Solotool
Â8:Mutetool
PLAY/
transport
button
flashes
Transport section
Â1:Record
Â2:Pause
Â3:Stop
Â4:Play
Â5:Rewind
Â6:FastForward
ÂUpperLCDrowdisplayscurrentclockposition.
STOP/locate
button
flashes
Locating functions
Â1:Goestoleftlocator.
Â2:Goestorightlocator.
Â3:Enables/DisablesCycle.
Â4:Enables/DisablesDrop.
Â5:EntersMarkermode(seebelow).
Â6:OpensfloatingMarkerList.
ÂUpperLCDrowdisplayscurrentclockposition.
Marker
mode
Â1to6:Selectsmarkers1to6.MarkernamesaredisplayedintheupperLCDrow.
Â7:Createsanewmarker.
Â8:Deletescurrentmarker.
GroupEdit
mode
Switchesbetweengroupparameters.ParameterviewcanbeshiftedbytheViewleft
andrightbuttonswhentheSHIFTbuttonishelddown.
Plug-in
Assign
EntersPlug-inEditmodeforselectedtrack.
Plug-inEdit Enables/Disablesparameterorresetsittodefaultvalue.
Mode Assignment
Chapter5CMLabsMotormix 125
Note:Inmodaldialogs,theSelectbuttonsgeneratethecomputerkeyboardcharacter
shownonthebuttonface.
RotaryPots
Instrument
Assign
EntersInstrumentEditmodeforselectedtrack.
Instrument
Edit
Enables/Disablesparameterorresetsittodefaultvalue.
Mode Assignment
Control Assignment
Rotarypots
1to8
ControlparameterchosenwiththeRotarySelector,asdisplayedinthe7segment
display(seebelow).
7segment
display
ShowscurrentselectionforRotarypots:
Send editing (S-MUTE or PRE/PST LED is on):
ÂS1toS8=Send1to8level
ÂF1toF8=EQband1to8frequency
ÂG1toG8=EQband1to8gain
Âq1toq8=EQband1to8Qfactor
Pan/Surround editing (select LED is on):
ÂPn=Pan
ÂAn=SurroundAngle
Âdv=SurroundDiversity
ÂFE=SurroundLFO
ÂMd=AssignSurroundMode
ÂX=SurroundX
ÂY=SurroundY
Track parameter editing (eff-4 LED is on):
ÂVL=Volume
ÂPnorAn=Pan/SurroundAngle
ÂMd=ChannelMode
ÂIn=Channelinput
ÂOu=Channeloutput
ÂAu=Automationmode
ÂGr=Groupmembership
Assignment:
Âd1tod8=AssignSend1to8destination
Plug-inediting(DSP/compareLEDison):
ÂP1to15=AssignInsertslot1to15toplug-in
ÂP1.to15.=Plug-inparameterediting
Instrument editing (DSP/compare LED is on):
ÂIA=Assigninstrument
ÂIE.=Instrumentparameterediting.
Group property editing (group LED is on):
ÂG1to32=groupnumber
126 Chapter5CMLabsMotormix
MultiButtons
Thesebuttons(labelledAtoH)havemultipleuses,dependingonthecurrentmode,as
indicatedbythegreenandyellowLEDstotheright.
Note:Inmodaldialogs,theMultibuttonsgeneratethecomputerkeyboardcharacter
shownonthebuttonface.
Rotary
Selector
Selects a slot or parameter for rotary encoders, depending on the parameter type(s)
being edited with the rotary encoders:
ÂSendslotwheneditingsendlevelorassigningsenddestination.
ÂEQbandwheneditinganEQparameter.
ÂEffect/Instrumentslotwhenassigninganeffect/instrument.
ÂPan/SurroundparameterwheneditingaPan/Surroundparameter.
ÂTrackparameterwheneditingaTrackparameter.
ÂEffect/instrumentparameterpagewheneditingaplug-inorinstrument.
Rotary
Selector
pushbutton
SwitchesFlipmodebetweenOffandDuplicate(fadersduplicaterotaryencoder
assignments).
SHIFT Switches Display mode for channel strip displays: switches between:
ÂPageinfoinupperline,parameternameinlowerline.
ÂParameternameinupperline,parametervalueinlowerline.
Control Assignment
Mode Assignment
fxbypass Enables/Disablesbypassofcurrentlyselectedinserteffect.
SHIFT(eff-1) Enables/DisablesbypassofcurrentlyselectedEQbandandswitchesrotaryencodersto
EQfrequencyediting.
s-mute Enables/DisablesbypassofcurrentlyeditedSendandswitchesrotaryencoderstosend
levelediting.
SHIFT(eff-2) Enables/DisablesbypassofcurrentlyselectedEQbandandswitchesrotaryencodersto
EQGainediting.
pre/post Switchesbetweenpreandpostofcurrentlyeditedsendandswitchesrotaryencoders
tosendlevelediting.
PostmodeisindicatedbyalitLED.
SHIFT(eff-3) Enables/DisablesbypassofcurrentlyselectedEQbandandswitchesrotaryencodersto
(EQ)Qfactorediting.
select SwitchesrotaryencoderstoPan/Surroundediting.Theeditedparameterisselected
withtheRotarySelector.
SHIFT(eff-4) Switchesrotaryencoderstotrackparameterediting.
Chapter5CMLabsMotormix 127
BurnButtons
Thesebuttons(labelledItoP)havemultipleuses,dependingonthecurrentmode,as
indicatedbytheredLEDstotheleft.
Note:Inmodaldialogs,theBurnbuttonsgeneratethecomputerkeyboardcharacter
shownonthebuttonface.
SOLOButtons
ThesebuttonsswitchtheSolostatusofthedisplayedtrack.
Note:InmodaldialogstheSolobuttonsgeneratethecomputerkeyboardcharacter
shownonthebuttonface.
MUTEButtons
ThesebuttonsswitchtheMutestatusofthedisplayedtrack.
Note:Inmodaldialogs,theSolobuttonsgeneratethecomputerkeyboardcharacter
shownonthebuttonface.
Mode Assignment
record Enables/DisablesRecordEnablestatusoftrack.
SHIFT(fnctA) SwitchesautomationmodetoLatch.
ALL+SHIFT(fnctA) SwitchesautomationmodeofalltrackstoLatch.
write SwitchesautomationmodetoWrite.
ALL SwitchesautomationmodeofalltrackstoWrite.
SHIFT(fnctB) SwitchesautomationmodetoRead.
ALL+SHIFT(fnctA) SwitchesautomationmodeofalltrackstoRead.
burn SwitchesautomationmodetoTouch.
ALL SwitchesautomationmodeofalltrackstoTouch.
SHIFT(fnctC) SwitchesautomationmodetoOff.
ALL+SHIFT(fnctA) SwitchesautomationmodeofalltrackstoOff.
128 Chapter5CMLabsMotormix
VIEWSection
LeftFunctionButtons
Control Assignment
Left/right
buttons
InPlug-inandInstrumentEditmode:shiftstheparameterbankbyonebank.
In other modes:
ÂIfBANKLEDisoff:shiftsthefaderbankbyonechannel.
ÂIfBANKLEDison:shiftsthefaderbankbyonebank.
SHIFT InPlug-inandInstrumentEditmode:shiftstheparameterbankbyoneparameter.
InGroupEditmode,thegroupparameterbankisshifted.
bank Switchesmodeofleft/rightbuttons(seeabove).
SHIFT SetsSelectbuttonstoTrackViewSelectmode(seebelow).
group SetsSelectbuttons,rotaryencodersandMultibuttonstoGroupEditmode.
SHIFT Displaystracks’groupassignmentsintheLCD.Therotaryencodersallowyouto
changeassignments.
Control Assignment
AUTOENBL/mode Currentlyunassigned.
SHIFT Switchesrotaryencoderstoautomationenablemode.
SUSPEND/create Whilehelddown,thegroupsaretemporarilydisabled.
SHIFT CreatesanewgroupandentersGroupEditmode.
PLUG-IN/compare SwitchesrotaryencodersandMultibuttonstoPlug-inAssignmode.The
RotarySelectknobisusedtoselecttheInsertslotyouwanttouse/edit.
InPlug-inAssignorInstrumentAssignmode,itswitchestoPanmode.
InPlug-inEditmode,itswitchestoPlug-inAssignmode.
InInstrumentEditmode,itswitchestoInstrumentAssignmode.
SHIFT SwitchesrotaryencodersandMultibuttonstoInstrumentAssignmode.
WINDOW/tools SwitchesSelectbuttonstoWindowSelectmode.
SHIFT SwitchesSelectbuttonstoSelectToolmode.
ALL/alt/fine WhileALL/alt/fineishelddown,rotaryencodersareinfullmode:rotating
counter-clockwisesetsminimum,rotatingclockwisesetsmaximumvalue.
SHIFT whileSHIFTandALL/alt/finearehelddown,rotaryencodersareinfine
mode.
DEFAULT/bypass Currentlyunassigned.
SHIFT InInstrumentEditmode:switchesbypassstateoftheinstrument.
InPlug-inEditmode:switchesbypassstateofthecurrentlyeditedplug-in.
UNDO/save PerformsanUndostep.TheLEDislitifthereisaRedostepavailable.
SHIFT Savesthesong.TheLEDislitifthesongcontainsunsavedchanges.
SHIFT SwitchestoShiftmode—wherethefunctionsindicatedbythelowercase
(inverted)labelsbelowthebuttonsapply.
Chapter5CMLabsMotormix 129
Faders
Thefadersnormallycontrolvolume,exceptwheninFlipmode,wheretheyduplicate
therotaryencoderassignments.
RightFunctionButtons
Control Assignment
PLAY/transport Playkeycommand.
SHIFT SwitchesSelectbuttonstoTransportSectionmode.
STOP/locate Stopkeycommand.
SHIFT SwitchesSelectbuttonstoLocatemode.
FFWD/monitor ShuttleForwardkeycommand.
SHIFT OpensSystemPerformancewindow.
REWIND/status ShuttleRewindkeycommand.
SHIFT OpensSynchronizationwindow.
NEXT/configure Navigatestonextmarker.
LAST/assign Whenrotaryencodersaredisplayingsenddestinations,useofLAST/assign
switchesthembacktodisplayingsendlevels.
Otherwise:goestopreviousmarker.
SHIFT Whenrotaryencodersaredisplayingsendlevels,useofLAST/assign
switchesthemtodisplayingsenddestinations.
WhenrotaryencodersareinPlug-inEditmode,useofLAST/assignswitches
themtoPlug-inAssignmode.
WhenrotaryencodersareinInstrumentEditmode,useofLAST/assign
switchesthemtoInstrumentAssignMode.
ENTER/utility IdenticaltoEnterkeyoncomputerkeyboard.
SHIFT OpensAutomationSettingswindow.
ESCAPE WhenLEDislit,escapesfrom“special”mode(denotedbyflashingLED).
Atallothertimes:identicaltoEsckeyoncomputerkeyboard.
6
131
6FrontierDesignTranzPort
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂEnsurethatthesoftwareshippedwiththeTranzPortisinstalled.
ÂMakesurethatthe“TranzBridge”(thewirelesstransmitter)isconnectedtothe
computerviaUSB.
ÂWhenLogicPro7islaunched,itinstallstheTranzPortautomatically,andsetsitto
“nativemode.”
LCD
TheLCDdisplaysthefollowinginformation:
ÂToplineleft:nameofcurrentlydisplayedtrack.
ÂToplinemiddle:volumeofcurrentlydisplayedtrack.
ÂToplineright:panningofcurrentlydisplayedtrack.
ÂBottomlineleft:levelmeterofcurrentlydisplayedtrack(stereo).
ÂBottomlineright:currentclockposition.
132 Chapter6FrontierDesignTranzPort
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedSHIFT(orother)buttonbelowabuttondescriptionindicatesthatthe
buttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
ChannelStrip
MasterSection
Control Assignment
<CHAN Shiftthecurrentlydisplayedtracktotheleftbyonetrack.
SHIFT Shiftthecurrentlydisplayedtrackleftbyeighttracks.
CHAN> Shiftthecurrentlydisplayedtrackrightbyonetrack.
SHIFT Shiftthecurrentlydisplayedtrackrightbyeighttracks.
REC Activate/DeactivateRecordEnablebuttonforthecurrentlydisplayedtrack.
SHIFT DisableRecordEnablebuttonforalltracks.
SOLO Enables/DisablesSoloforthecurrentlydisplayedtrack.
SHIFT DisableSoloforalltracks.
MUTE Enables/DisablesMuteforthecurrentlydisplayedtrack.
SHIFT DisableMuteforalltracks.
ANYSOLO LitifanytracksorRegionsaresoloed.
UNDO Undo
SHIFT Redo
Control Assignment
SHIFT Modifierforfunctionofothercontrols.
IN GotoleftCyclelocator.
PUNCH EngageDropandsetDropInlocatortoSPL.
LOOP EngageCycleandsetsleftCyclelocatortoSPL.
OUT GotorightCyclelocator.
PUNCH EngageDropandsetDropOutlocatortoSPL.
LOOP EngageCycleandsetrightCyclelocatortoSPL.
PUNCH Enables/DisablesDropmode.
LOOP Enables/DisablesCyclemode.
PREV Gotopreviousmarker.
SHIFT Setlocatorsbypreviousmarker.
ADD CreatemarkeratSPL.
SHIFT DeletemarkeratSPL.
NEXT Gotonextmarker.
SHIFT Setlocatorsbynextmarker.
Chapter6FrontierDesignTranzPort 133
ExternalInput
JogWheel DependingoncurrentJogWheelmode:
•MoveSPLbybars.
•Audioscrubbingor
•Shuttle.
SHIFT Adjustvolumeofthecurrentlydisplayedtrack.
LOOP SettheLeftlocatortothecurrentSPL,advancetheSPLasperusual,thenset
theRightlocatortotheSPL.FurtherJogWheelusewhileholdingdownLOOP
advancestheSPLandsetstheRightlocator.
Tip:RotatingtheJogWheelcounter-clockwisewhileholdingdownLOOP
definesaskip-cyclerange.
DROP SettheDropInlocatortothecurrentSPL,advancetheSPLasperusual,then
settheDropOutlocatortotheSPL.Furtherjogwheelusewhileholdingdown
DROPadvancestheSPLandsetstheDropOutlocator.
REW Shuttlebackward.
SHIFT Gotolastplayposition.
PUNCH EngageDropmodeandsetDropInlocatortoSPL.
LOOP EngageCyclemodeandsetleftlocatortoSPL.
FFWD Shuttleforward.
PUNCH EngageDropmodeandsetDropOutlocatortoSPL.
LOOP EngageCyclemoceandsetrightlocatortoSPL.
STOP Stop
SHIFT SwitchJogWheelmodesbetweenMoveSPLbyBars,AudioScrubbingand
Shuttle.
PLAY Play
SHIFT Pause
RECORD Record
SHIFT Save
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
FootSwitch DropIn/Out
7
135
7JLCooperCS-32MiniDesk
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂInstallthesoftwarethatshipswiththeCS-32.
ÂEnsurethattheCS-32isinHostmode:
ÂMakesurethatyourCS-32unit(s)areconnectedtothecomputerviaUSBorMIDI.
USBunitsareinstalledautomatically.YoumustmanuallyscanforMIDIunits:
ÂChooseLogic>Preferences>ControlSurfaces>Setup.
ÂChooseNew>InstallintheSetupwindow’slocalmenu.
ÂSelecttheCS-32fromthelistintheInstallwindow.
ÂClicktheScanbutton.
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
Display
The2-digit7-segmentdisplayshowsinformationonthecurrentmodeandcurrently
editedparameter:
Displaytext Meaning
-- A“switching”parameter(Solo,Mute,Rec/Rdy)hasbeendisabled.
AE Mutebuttons1–6display/setAutomationEnable.
AS PotsareinPan/SendAssignmentmode.
b1–b9 PotsareinPlug-inorInstrumentbankselectmode.
In PotsareinInstrumentEditmode.
Lt Mutebuttonsdisplay/set“Latch”automationmode.
MI Mutebuttonsdisplay/set“MIDI”automationmode.
Mu Mutehasbeenenabled.
P1–P9 PotsareinPlug-inEditmode.
136 Chapter7JLCooperCS-32MiniDesk
Pots
Asthepotsarenotmotorized,Pickupmodeisused,ifenabledintheControlSurfaces
preferences.Thismeansthatthepotswillnot“takeover”untilNULLed.NULLstatusis
displayedbytheNULLarrowLEDs.TheUpperarrowislitifthepot’svalueisabovethe
NULLpoint,theLowerarrowislitifthepot’svalueisbelowtheNULLpoint,andboth
arrowLEDsarelitifNULLed.
Thepotscanoperateinoneofthreemodes,withonesub-modeeach.
Pan/SendMode
InPan/Sendmode(enabledwithF7;displayshows“PA”),thepotscontrolglobaltrack
parameters:
WhileSHIFTishelddown(displayshows“AS”),thepotsperformthefollowing
assignments:
PA PotsareinPan/Sendmode.
rd Mutebuttonsdisplay/set“Read”automationmode.
Re Rec/Rdyhasbeenenabled.
So Solohasbeenenabled.
Tc Mutebuttonsdisplay/set“Touch”automationmode.
Wr Mutebuttonsdisplay/set“Write”automationmode.
Othertext Whenatrackisselected,thefirsttwocharactersofitsnameareshownbriefly.
Numbers Whileeditinganumericalvaluewithafaderorpot,thecurrentvalueis
displayed.Iftherearemorethantwodigits,onlythelastdigitsofthemantissa
aredisplayed.Signs(+/–)areonlyshownifonlyonedigitisdisplayed.
Displaytext Meaning
Control Assignment
SENDA/P1 ControlsSend1Levelofselectedtrack.
SENDB/P2 ControlsSend2Levelofselectedtrack.
PAN/P3 ControlsPanofselectedtrack.
SENDC/P4 ControlsSend3Levelofselectedtrack.
SENDD/P5 ControlsSend4Levelofselectedtrack.
SENDE/P6 ControlsSend5Levelofselectedtrack.
Control Assignment
SENDA/P1 AssignsSend1Destinationofselectedtrack.
SENDB/P2 AssignsSend2Destinationofselectedtrack.
PAN/P3 AssignsTrackmodeofselectedtrack.
SENDC/P4 AssignsSend3Destinationofselectedtrack.
Chapter7JLCooperCS-32MiniDesk 137
InstrumentEditMode
InInstrumentEditmode(enabledwithF8;displayshows“In”),thepotscontrol
instrumentparameters.
WithSHIFThelddown(displayshows“b1”–“b9”),youcanchoosetheparameterbank
(see“CursorSection”onpage139).
Plug-inEditMode
InPlug-inEditmode(enabledwithF9,displayshows“P1”–”P9”),thepotscontrolplug-
inparametersofthecurrentlyselectedinsert.
WithSHIFThelddown(displayshows“b1”–”b9”),youcanchoosethecurrentinsertand
parameterbank(see“CursorSection”onpage139).
ChannelStrips
SENDD/P5 AssignsSend4Destinationofselectedtrack.
SENDE/P6 AssignsSend5Destinationofselectedtrack.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
PANSELECT/TRACK
SELECT
Selectstrack.
SOLO Enables/DisablesSolo.
LOCATE Navigatestomarkers1–32.
SHIFT LOCATE17:Createsnewmarker.
LOCATE18:Createsnewmarkerwithoutrounding.
LOCATE19:DeletesmarkeratSPL.
LOCATE25:OpensMarkerList.
LOCATE26:OpensMarkerTextwindow.
LOCATE28:Setslocatorsbypreviousmarker.
LOCATE29:Setslocatorsbycurrentmarker.
LOCATE30:Setslocatorsbynextmarker.
LOCATE31:Navigatestopreviousmarker.
LOCATE32:Navigatestonextmarker.
MUTE Enables/DisablesMute.
F1 AutomationEnablesetup(displayshows“AE”).
MUTE1:Enables/Disablesvolumeautomation.
MUTE2:Enables/Disablespanautomation.
MUTE3:Enables/Disablesmuteautomation.
MUTE4:Enables/Disablesautomationofsolo.
MUTE5:Enables/Disablessendautomation.
MUTE6:Enables/Disablesautomationofplug-inparameters.
F2 Displays/setsautomationmodeto“Read”(displayshows“Td”).
F3 Displays/setsautomationmodeto“Touch”(displayshows“Tc”).
F4 Displays/setsautomationmodeto“Latch”(displayshows“Lt”).
138 Chapter7JLCooperCS-32MiniDesk
BankButton
FKeySection
F5 Displays/setsautomationmodeto“Write”(displayshows“Wr”).
F6 Displays/setsautomationmodeto“MIDI”(displayshows“MI”).
ARM Activates/DeactivatesRecordEnablebutton.
Faders Controlvolume.Asthefadersdon’tofferfeedback,Pickupmodeisused,if
enabledintheControlSurfacespreferences.Thismeansthattheywillnot“take
over”untilNULLed.NULLstatusisdisplayedbytheNULLarrowLEDs.Upper
arrowislitifthepot’svalueisabovetheNULLpoint,thelowerarrowislitifthe
pot’svalueisbelowtheNULLpoint,andbotharelitifNULLed.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
(Smallredbutton
withgreenLED)
LEDoff:blacklabelsofchannelstripbuttonsapply(TRK/LOC/ARM).
LEDon:whitelabelsofchannelstripbuttonsapply(PAN/SOLO/MUTE).
Control Assignment
SHIFT Modifierforfunctionofothercontrols.Seeright-aligned“SHIFT”inleftcolumn.
F1 Whilehelddown,MUTEbuttons1–6enables/disablesautomationofcertain
parameters(seeMUTE).
SHIFT Enables/DisablesCyclemode.
F2 Whilehelddown,MUTEbuttonssetautomationmodetoRead.
SHIFT Enables/DisablesDropmode.
F3 Whilehelddown,MUTEbuttonssetautomationmodetoTouch.
SHIFT SetsleftlocatorbycurrentSPL.
F4 Whilehelddown,MUTEbuttonssetautomationmodetoLatch.
SHIFT SetsrightlocatorbycurrentSPL.
F5 Whilehelddown,MUTEbuttonssetautomationmodetoWrite.
SHIFT SetsDropInlocatorbycurrentSPL.
F6 Whilehelddown,MUTEbuttonssetautomationmodetoMIDI.
SHIFT SetsDropOutlocatorbycurrentSPL.
F7 SetspotstoPan/Sendmode(displayshows“PA”).
SHIFT Enables/Disablesmetronomeclick.
F8 SetspotstoInstrumentEditmode(displayshows“In”).
F9 SetspotstoPlug-inEditmode(displayshows“P1”–”P9”).
Chapter7JLCooperCS-32MiniDesk 139
CursorSection
TransportSection
JogWheelSection
Control Assignment
Up Zoomsoutvertically.
SHIFT InPlug-ineditmode:decrementscurrentInsertslot.
Down Zoomsinvertically.
SHIFT InPlug-inEditmode:incrementscurrentInsertslot.
Left Zoomsouthorizontally.
SHIFT InInstrumentandPlug-inEditmodes:decrementscurrentparameterbank.
Right Zoomsinhorizontally.
SHIFT InInstrumentandPlug-inEditmodes:incrementscurrentparameterbank.
Control Assignment
RECORD Record
STOP Stop
REW MovesSPLbackwardbyonebar.
PLAY Play
FFWD MovesSPLforwardbyonebar.
Control Assignment
JogWheel SCRUBoff:movesSPLinbars.
SCRUBon:AudioScrubbing.
SHUTTLEon:Shuttlemode.
SCRUB SwitchesJogWheelbetweenMoveSPLbyBarsandAudioScrubbingmode.
SHUTTLE SwitchesJogWheelbetweenMoveSPLbyBarsandShuttlemode.
8
141
8JLCooperFaderMaster4/100
Requirements
YouneedoneormoreFaderMaster4/100(MIDIorUSBversion)unitswithfirmware
version1.03orhigher.
Important:Ifyouhaveolderfirmware(seethestickeronthebackoftheunit),please
contactJLCooper.
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂUSBmodelonly:installthesoftwarethatshipswiththeFaderMaster4/100.
ÂEnsurethatyourFaderMaster4/100unit(s)areconnectedtothecomputerviaUSBor
MIDI.
USBunitsareinstalledautomatically.
YoumustmanuallyscanforMIDIunits:
1ChooseLogic>Preferences>ControlSurfaces>Setup.
2ChooseNew>InstallintheSetupwindow’slocalmenu.
3SelecttheFaderMaster4/100fromthelistintheInstallwindow.
4ClicktheScanbutton.
Note:YoucancombineseveralFaderMaster4/100unitstoformonelargevirtual
controlsurface.Themeaning/functionalityoftheTrackbuttons,however,are
individuallyswitchedforeachunit.
142 Chapter8JLCooperFaderMaster4/100
AssignmentOverview
Thefollowingassigmenttablesarebrokendowninto“zones”oftheFaderMaster4/100.
Globalbuttons
ChannelStrip
Control Assignment
Select SwitchesTrackbuttonstotrackselection.
Aux SwitchesTrackbuttonstoRecordReady.
Solo SwitchesTrackbuttonstoSolo.
Mute SwitchesTrackButtonstoMute.
Inc Increasesfaderbankdisplaytoshownextfourtracks.
DecDecreasesfaderbankdisplaytoshowpreviousfourtracks.
Control Assignment
Trackbutton Performscurrentlyselectedfunction(Select,RecordReady,Solo,Mute).
Fader Controlsvolume(touchsensitiveandmotorized).
9
143
9KorgmicroKONTROLand
KONTROL49
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro.
ÂEnsurethatyourunit(s)is/areconnectedtothecomputerviaUSB.
ÂBootLogic,andtheunit(s)willbescannedfor,andinstalledautomatically.
ÂWhenLogiclaunches,themicroKONTROL/KONTROL49isautomaticallysetto“Native
mode”—internalScenesettingsareignored.
Note:Ifinstallationandidentificationfails,itmaybepossiblethatthemicroKONTROL/
KONTROL49reactiontimeistooslow,duetoUSBbus-powerissues.Inthissituation,
connectthesuppliedpoweradapter,andsetthepowerswitchtothe“DC”position.
WhenLogicquits(ortheiconisremovedfromtheControlSurfaceSetupwindow),the
microKONTROL/KONTROL49isresettonormaloperation.
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(shownbelowabuttondescription)indicatesthatthe
buttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
Pads
ThePadscanoperateinoneofeightmodesandthreeoverlays.WhilepressingSCENE,
thePadsallowyoutoselectmodesforthePadsandchannelstrips.ReleasingSCENE
withoutpressingaPaddoesnotaffectthecurrentlyselectedPadorChannelStrip
modes.
Pad Assignment
1SwitchesPadstoTransportmode.
2SwitchesPadstoSolo/Mutemode.
3SwitchesPadstoRec/Selectmode.
4–8 SwitchesPadstoUser4–8mode.
ThesemodeshaveunassignedPads.Youcanaddassignmentstokey
commandswiththeLearnfunction.
9SwitcheschannelstripstoPanmode.
144 Chapter9KorgmicroKONTROLandKONTROL49
TransportMode
ThismodeisenabledbypressingSCENEandPad1.
Solo/MuteMode
ThismodeisenabledbypressingSCENEandPad2.
Rec/SelectMode
ThismodeisenabledbypressingSCENEandPad3.
10 SwitcheschannelstripstoSendmode.
11 S witcheschannelstripstoAutomationmode.
12 SwitcheschannelstripstoInstrumentEditmode.
13 SwitcheschannelstripstoPlug-inEditmode.
14–16 SwitcheschannelstripstoUser6–8mode.
Thesemodeshaveunassignedencoders.Youcanaddassignmentswiththe
LogicLearnfunction.
Pad Assignment
Pad Assignment
1SetsmainencodertoTransportmode.
2SetsmainencodertoScrubmode.
3SetsmainencodertoShuttlemode.
7Switchessyncbetweeninternalandexternal.
8Enables/Disablesmetronomeclick(separatelyforPlaybackandRecord).
9Enables/DisablesCyclefunction.
10 Enables/DisablesDropfunction.
11 Enables/DisablesReplacefunction.
12 Enables/DisablesSolofunction.
13 Recor d
14 Pause
15 Pla y
16 Stop
Pad Assignment
1–8 Enables/DisablesSolofortheeighttracksbeingcontrolledwiththeeight
channelstrips.
9–16 Enables/DisablesMutefortheeighttracksbeingcontrolledwiththeeight
channelstrips.
Pad Assignment
1–8 Activates/DeactivatesRecordEnablebuttonfortheeighttracksbeing
controlledwiththeeightchannelstrips.
9–16 Selectsoneoftheeighttracksbeingcontrolledwiththeeightchannelstrips.
Chapter9KorgmicroKONTROLandKONTROL49 145
User4–8Modes
ThesemodesareenabledbypressingSCENEandPad4to8.
Inthesemodes,thePadsareunassigned.UsetheLearnfunction(Logic>Preferences>
ControlSurfaces>LearnAssignmentforxxx)toassignthemtokeycommands,for
example.
SendMode
ThismodeisenabledbypressingSCENEandPad10.
Sendoverlay
PressingSETTINGwhiletheencodersareinSendmode,changestheoperationofthe
PadsinSendmode.
Plug-inEditMode
ThismodeisenabledbypressingSCENEandPad13.
Plug-inEditoverlay
PressingSETTINGwhiletheencodersareinPlug-inEditmodechangestheoperationof
thePadsinPlug-inEditmode.
MainSection
ThemainLCDshowsinformationonthecurrentmodeoftheencoders.
Pad Assignment
1–8 Switchessendbypassstateofthecurrentlyselectedsendfortheeightchannel
strips.
9–16 Switchessendposition(Pre/Post)ofthecurrentlyselectedsendfortheeight
channelstrips.
Pad Assignment
1–8 Switchesplug-inbypassstateofthecurrentlyselectedInsertslotfortheeight
channelstrips.
Displaytext Meaning
<Instrumentname> EncoderseditInstrumentparameters.
<Plug-inname> EncoderseditPlug-inparameters(xxisforthecurrentlyselectedinsert).
Automatn EncoderscontrolAutomationmode.
Ins.x (SETTINGhelddown)MainencoderchoosesPlug-ininsert.
ModePad? DisplayedwhileSCENEbuttonishelddown.
PanEncoderscontrolpan.
SendxEncoderscontrolsendlevelofsendx.
User6ChannelStripUserMode6.Encodersareinitiallyunassigned.
User7ChannelStripUserMode7.Encodersareinitiallyunassigned.
User8ChannelStripUserMode8.Encodersareinitiallyunassigned.
146 Chapter9KorgmicroKONTROLandKONTROL49
TheLCDbacklightisredwhilerecording,andgreenatothertimes.
Thecontrolsinthemainsectionhavethefollowingmeaning:
ChannelStrips
Thereareseveralmodesfortheencoders,enabledwithSCENEandPad9–16.
ExternalInput
Control Assignment
Mainencoder ControlsSPLinoneofthreemodes(seePads1–3in“TransportMode”on
page144).
SETTING Held down in Send mode:
ÂMainencoderchoosescurrentsend.
ÂPadshavespecialmeaning—see“SendMode”onpage145 .
ÂLCDsdisplaysenddestinations.
ÂEncoderschoosesenddestinations.
Holding down in Plug-in Edit mode:
ÂMainencoderchoosescurrentplug-ininsert.
ÂPadshavespecialmeaning—see“Plug-inEditoverlay”onpage145.
ÂLCDsdisplayplug-innameoftheeighttracks.
MESSAGE Enables/DisablesFlipmode.Whenenabled,theencoderscontrolvolumeand
thefaderscontroltheparameterdisplayedintheLCDs.
SCENE Whilehelddown,padsswitchPadandChannelStripmodes.See“Pads”on
page143.
EXIT —
HEXLOCK Shiftsfaderbanktothepreviouseighttracks(LEDisonifprevioustracksexist).
ENTER Shiftsfaderbanktothenexteighttracks(LEDisonifsubsequenttracksexist).
<OctaveShiftDown
>OctaveShiftUp
Control Assignment
LCD Shows the parameter controlled by the encoder. The currently chosen value is
displayed for a few seconds while operating an encoder or fader.
When the encoders are in a multi-channel view (Pan, Send, Send Setup), the
background color indicates the track’s automation mode:
Âgreen—offorRead
Âyellow—TouchorLatch
Âred—WriteorMIDI
Encoder ControlstheparametershowndirectlyabovetheencoderintheLCD.
Fader Controlsvolume.Asthefadersdon’tofferfeedback,“Pickupmode”isusedif
enabledintheLogicPreferences.Thismeansthattheywillnot“takeover”until
NULLed.
Control Assignment
FootSwitch Startsandstopsplayback.
Pedal Controlsmastervolume.
10
147
10 MackieBabyHUI
SetUp
PleasemakesurethatyourBabyHUIunit(s)is/areconnectedbi-directionallywiththe
computer.
YoumustmanuallyscanforMackieBabyHUIunits:
1ChooseLogic>Preferences>ControlSurfaces>Setup.
2ChooseNew>InstallintheSetupwindow’slocalmenu.
3SelectBabyHUIintheInstallwindow.
4ClicktheScanbutton.
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedSHIFTbelowabuttondescriptionindicatesthatthecontrolhasan
alternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
ChannelStrips
Control Assignment
Rotaryencoder AdjustsparameterselectedintheEncoderAssignmentsection.
Rotaryencoder
pushbutton
Selectstrack.
SHIFT Enables/DisablesRecordReady.
Signalindicator Illuminateswhenasignalispresentinthechannel.Italsoindicateschannel
selection.
SOLO Enables/DisablesSolo.
MUTE Enables/DisablesMute.
Fader Adjustsvolume.
148 Chapter10MackieBabyHUI
EncoderAssignmentSection
AutomationSection
DisplaySection
UtilitySection
Control Assignment
PANAssignsPantorotaryencoders.
SEND1AssignsSend1Leveltorotaryencoders.
SEND2AssignsSend2Leveltorotaryencoders.
SEND3AssignsSend3Leveltorotaryencoders.
SEND4AssignsSend4Leveltorotaryencoders.
Control Assignment
BYPASS/OFF SetsselectedtracktoautomationmodeOff.
SHIFT Enables/Disablesautomationplaybackandrecordingofvolume.
READ SetsselectedtracktoautomationmodeRead.
SHIFT Enables/Disablesautomationplaybackandrecordingofmute.
WRITE SetsselectedtracktoautomationmodeWrite.
SHIFT Enables/Disablesautomationplaybackandrecordingofpan.
TOUCH SetsselectedtracktoautomationmodeTouch.
SHIFT Enables/DisablesautomationplaybackandrecordingofSendLevel.
Control Assignment
TRANSPORT Opens/ClosestheTransportwindow.
MEM–LOC Opens/ClosestheMarkerList.
MIXER Opens/ClosestheTrackMixer.
EDIT Opens/ClosestheArrangewindow.
Control Assignment
UNDO PerformsUndo.
SHIFT Shiftstoalternateuseofsomebuttons(seebelow).
Chapter10MackieBabyHUI 149
NavigationSection
TransportSection
Control Assignment
RTZNavigatestotheleftlocator.
SHIFT SetsDropInlocator.
END Navigatestotherightlocator.
SHIFT SetsDropOutlocator.
BANKSELECTLeft Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheleft.
SHIFT Shiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheleft.
BANKSELECTRight Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheright.
SHIFT Shiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheright.
Control Assignment
REWIND Shuttlesbackward.
FASTFWD Shuttlesforward.
STOP Stop
PLAY Play
RECORD Record
11
151
11 MackieC4
SetUp
ApoweredMackieC4unitwillautomaticallybedetectedwhenLogicProislaunched.
YoucanusetheC4inanindependentcontrolsurfacegroup(withothercontrolsurface
iconsplacedabove/belowtheC4icon),orcombinedintoonecontrolsurfacegroup
withoneormorecontrolsurfaces(suchastheLogicControl—placetheicontothe
rightorleftoftheexistingicon(s).
AlthoughtheC4canbeusedindependently,itismostusefulwhencombinedwith
othercontrolsurfaces,particularlytheLogic/MackieControl.Inthelattercase,theC4
addseightchannelsinMultiChannelview.UsingtheC4initsowncontrolsurface
groupallowsyoutoeditinstrumentsandplug-insindependently,whileperforming
mixingandothertasksontheLogic/MackieControlorothercontrolsurface.
V-Pots,V-Selects
Functionalitydependsoncurrentviewmode,andoptionaloverlay(seebelow).
ÂThetoprow(row1)consistsofV-Pot/V-Select1to8.
ÂRow2consistsofV-Pot/V-Select9to16.
ÂRow3consistsofV-Pot/V-Select17to24.
ÂThebottomrow(row4)consistsofV-Pot/V-Select25to32.
V-Pot/V-Select1to8
Whilenooverlayisactive,V-Pot/V-Selects1to8(thetoprow)normallyperforminthe
samewayastheircounterpartsonaLogicControlorLogicControlXT.See“The
AssignmentZone”onpage54.
V-Pot/V-Select9to32
TheseV-Potshaveadditionalfunctionalityinmanyviews.
InMultiChannelviews,theV-Pot/V-Selectsofrows2,3and4usuallyeditthe
parameterthat“follows”theparametereditedonrow1.
152 Chapter11MackieC4
Example:InPanMultiChannelview(see“MultiChannelView”onpage57);whererow
1editsthePan/SurroundAngle,row2editsSurroundDiversity,row3editsLFEand
row4editsSurroundmode.
InChannelStripview,allfourrowsbuildagroupof32editableparameters.
InPlug-inandInstrumentEditviews,itcanbesplitintotwogroups(8/24,16/16or24/8
parameters),see“SPLIT”onpage157.
Pan/SurroundMultiChannelView
InPan/SurroundMultiChannelview:
ÂRow1editsPan/Surroundparameter1.
ÂRow2editsPan/Surroundparameter2.
ÂRow3editsPan/Surroundparameter3.
ÂRow4editsPan/Surroundparameter4(inthisorder;Pan/Angle,Diversity,LFE,
SurroundMode,X,Y).
SINGLELeft/Rightchangestheparametereditedinrow1,thusaffectingthe
parametersshownandeditedinrows2to4.
ToaccessPan/SurroundMultiChannelview:
1HoldtheCHANSTRIPbutton.
TheChannelStripoverlaylabelsappearontheC4displays.
2PressV-Select18(labeledSurrndMultiC).
Pan/SurroundChannelStripView
InPan/SurroundChannelStripview,row1editsalleightsurroundparametersofa
surroundchannel.Ifastereoormonochannelisselected,V-Pot1editsthePan(or
Balance)parameter.
ToaccessPan/SurroundChannelStripview:
1HoldtheCHANSTRIPbutton.
TheChannelStripoverlaylabelsappearontheC4displays.
2PressV-Select26(labeledSurrnd).
TrackMultiChannelView
InTrackMultiChannelView,thelowestV-Potrow(row4)editsthecurrentlychosen
trackparameter.Row3editstrackparameter2,Row2trackparameter3,androw1
trackparameter4.
Theroworderisreversed,sothatthelowestrow(editingparameter1)isclosesttothe
buttons.
Chapter11MackieC4 153
TheV-Potseditthefollowingtrackparametersinthisorder:Volume,Pan/Angle,Track
Mode,Input,Output,AutomationMode,Group,DisplayedAutomationParameter).
BANKLeft/RightandSINGLELeft/Rightchangetheparametereditedinrow4,thus
affectingtheparametersshown/editedinrows1to3.
ToaccessTrackMultiChannelview:
1HoldtheCHANSTRIPbutton.
TheChannelStripoverlaylabelsappearontheC4displays.
2PressV-Select17(labeledTrackMultiC).
EQMultiChannelView
InEQMultiChannelview:
ÂRow1editsEQbandbypass.
ÂRow2editsEQbandfrequency.
ÂRow3editsEQbandgain/slope.
ÂRow4editsEQbandQfactor.
ÂTheSLOTUP/DOWNbuttonsselecttheEQband.
ThisonlyworksifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinsertedintheselectedchannelstrip.
ToaccessEQMultiChannelview:
1HoldtheCHANSTRIPbutton.
TheChannelStripoverlaylabelsappearontheC4displays.
2PressV-Select19(labeledEQMultiC).
EQChannelStripView
InEQChannelStripview:
ÂRow1editsEQFrequencyofalleightbands.
ÂRow2editsEQGain/Slopeofalleightbands.
ÂRow3editsEQbandQfactorofalleightbands.
ÂRow4editsEQbypassofalleightbands.
IfnoChannelorLinearPhaseEQispresentontheselectedtrack,aChannelEQwillbe
insertedautomaticallywhentheEQChannelStripviewisentered.TheTRACKLand
TRACKRbuttonsswitchtothepreviousornexttrack.Ifyouswitchtoatrackwithno
ChannelorLinearPhaseEQinserted,theC4displaysshow“–”andtheV-Potsdo
nothing.
ToaccessEQChannelStripview:
1HoldtheCHANSTRIPbutton.
TheChannelStripoverlaylabelsappearontheC4displays.
154 Chapter11MackieC4
2PressV-Select27(labeledEQs).
SendMultiChannelView
InSendMultiChannelview:
ÂRow1editssenddestination.
ÂRow2editssendlevel.
ÂRow3editssendposition.
ÂRow4editssendmute.
ÂTheSLOTUP/DOWNbuttonselectstheeditedSendslot.
ÂTheTRACKLandTRACKRbuttonsshiftthefaderbankleftorrightbythenumberof
channelstripsinthecontrolsurfacegroup.
ToaccessSendMultiChannelview:
1HoldtheCHANSTRIPbutton.
TheChannelStripoverlaylabelsappearontheC4displays.
2PressV-Select20(labeledSendsMultiC).
SendChannelStripView
InSendChannelStripview:
ÂRow1editstheeightsenddestinationsofthechannelstrip.
ÂRow2editsthesendlevelofsends1to8
ÂRow3editssendpositions1to8.
ÂRow4editssendmutes1to8.
ÂTRACKLandTRACKRswitchtothepreviousornexttrack.
ToaccessSendChannelStripview:
1HoldtheCHANSTRIPbutton.
TheChannelStripoverlaylabelsareshownontheC4displays.
2PressV-Select28(labeledSends).
Plug-inSelectMultiChannelView
InPlug-inSelectMultiChannelview,theC4displaysthefirstfourInsertslotsofthe
eightselectedchannels.
ÂTurnaV-Pottoswitchbetweenplug-ins.
ÂPresstherespectiveV-Selecttoinserttheselectedeffect.ThisentersPlug-inEdit
view,whereyoucandirectlyeditplug-inparameters.Seethesectionbelowformore
information.
ÂTheSLOTUP/DOWNbuttonsswitchbetweenInsertslots.
ÂTRACKLandTRACKRshiftthefaderbankleftorrightbythenumberofchannel
stripsinthecontrolsurfacegroup.
Chapter11MackieC4 155
ÂHoldingSHIFTandpressingaV-Selectswitchesthebypassstateoftherespective
Insertslot.Bypassedplug-insaredenotedbyanasteriskwhichprecedestheplug-in
name(s).
ToaccessPlug-inSelectMultiChannelview:
1HoldtheCHANSTRIPbutton.
TheChannelStripoverlaylabelsareshownontheC4displays.
2PressV-Select21(labeledPlugInMultiC).
Plug-inEditView
InPlug-inEditview:
ÂV-Pot/V-Select1to32buildsagroupof32parameters.Splittingispossible.
ÂSLOTUP/DOWNbuttonselectsthedesiredplug-ininsertslot.
ÂBANKLeft/Rightshiftstheeditedparametersbyonepage.InSplitmode,thisapplies
toSplitUpper.WhenholdingdownSHIFT,thisappliestoSplitLower.
ÂSINGLELeft/Rightshiftstheeditedparametersby1.InSplitmode,thisappliesto
SplitUpper.WhenholdingdownSHIFT,thisappliestoSplitLower.
ToaccessPlug-inEditview:
mAccessPlug-inSelectMultiChannelview,theninsertorselectaplug-in(seesection
abovefordetails).
ThisautomaticallyswitchestoPlug-inEditview.
InstrumentSelectMultiChannelView
InInstrumentSelectMultiChannelview,theC4displaystheInstrumentslotsofthe
selectedinstrumentchannels.
ÂTurnaV-Pottoselectaninstrument.
ÂPresstherespectiveV-Selecttoinserttheselectedinstrument.ThisentersInstrument
Editview,whereyoucaneditinstrumentparameters.Seethesectionbelowformore
information.
ÂTRACKLandTRACKRshiftthefaderbankleftorrightbythenumberofchannel
stripsinthecontrolsurfacegroup.
ÂHoldingSHIFTandpressingaV-Selectswitchesthebypassstateoftherespective
Instrumentslot.Anasterisksymbolprecedesthenameofbypassedinstruments.
ToaccessInstrumentSelectMultiChannelview:
1HoldtheCHANSTRIPbutton.
TheChannelStripoverlaylabelsareshownontheC4displays.
2PressV-Select22(labeledInstruMultiC).
156 Chapter11MackieC4
InstrumentEditView
InInstrumentEditView:
ÂV-Pot/V-Select1to32buildsagroupof32parameters.Splittingispossible.
ÂBANKLeft/Rightshiftstheeditedparametersbyonepage.InSplitmode,thisapplies
toSplitUpper.WhenholdingdownSHIFT,thisappliestoSplitLower.
ÂSINGLELeft/Rightshiftstheeditedparametersby1.InSplitmode,thisappliesto
SplitUpper.whenholdingdownSHIFT,thisappliestoSplitLower.
ToaccessInstrumentEditview:
mAccessInstrumentSelectMultiChannelview,theninsertorselectaninstrument(see
sectionabovefordetails).
ThisautomaticallyswitchestoInstrumentEditview.
CycleView
HoldingtheCHANSTRIPbuttonandpressingV-Select31activatesCycleview.Inthis
mode,theV-Pots/V-Selectsbehaveasfollows:
ÂV-Pot/V-Select1(labeledCycle):showsandeditsthecurrentCyclestatus(offoron).
ÂV-Select2(labeledBySet):matchestheCycleareatoselectionsmadeintheArrange
window(selectedAudioorMIDIRegion).
ÂV-Pot3(labeledMove):movesthecurrentCycleareabyabarwitheach“click”ofthe
V-Pot,whenturned.
ÂV-Pot4:movesthecurrentCycleareabyabeatwitheach“click”oftheV-Pot,when
turned.
ÂThedisplayshowstheleftandrightlocatorsaboveV-Pots5and7.
ÂPressingV-Select5picksup(uses)thecurrentsongpositionfortheleftlocator.
ÂTurningV-Pot5changestheleftlocatorpositionbybars.
ÂTurningV-Pot6changestheleftlocatorpositionbybeats(denominatorsteps).
ÂPressingV-Select7picksup(uses)thecurrentsongpositionfortherightlocator.
ÂTurningV-Pot7changestherightlocatorpositionbybars.
ÂTurningV-Pot8changestherightlocatorpositionbybeats(denominatorsteps).
DropView
HoldingtheCHANSTRIPbuttonandpressingV-Select32activatesDrop(alsocalled
“punch”)view.Inthismode,theV-Pots/V-Selectsbehaveasfollows:
ÂV-Pot/V-Select1showsandeditsthecurrentDropstatus(offoron).
ÂV-Pot3(labeledMove):movesthecurrentDrop-inareabyabarwitheach“click”of
theV-Pot,whenturned.
ÂV-Pot4:movesthecurrentDrop-inareabyabeatwitheach“click”oftheV-Pot,
whenturned.
ÂThedisplayshowstheDropInandDropOutlocatorsaboveV-Pots5and7.
Chapter11MackieC4 157
ÂPressingV-Select5picksup(uses)thecurrentsongpositionfortheDropInlocator.
ÂTurningV-Pot5changestheDropInlocatorpositionbybars.
ÂTurningV-Pot6changestheleftlocatorpositionbybeats(denominatorsteps).
ÂPressingV-Select7picksup(uses)thecurrentsongpositionfortheDropOutlocator.
ÂTurningV-Pot7changestheDropOutlocatorpositionbybars.
ÂTurningV-Pot8changestherightlocatorpositionbybeats(denominatorsteps).
Note:ChangingadroplocatorpositionwiththeC4automaticallyenablesDropmode.
ButtonsatBottom
Thefollowingsectionoutlinesthefunctionalityofthebuttonsfoundatthebottomof
theC4controlsurface.
SPLIT
Switcheseditsplitbetween4/0,1/3,2/2and3/1rows.SplitEditallowsyouto
simultaneouslyedittwoseparatesectionsofaplug-in/instrument,oreventwo
differentplug-ins.
SplitEditisalsopossibleacrossmultipleC4units.Asanexamplewithtwounits,
pressingtheSPLITbuttonoffersthefollowingsplitmodes:
Â1/7(SplitUpperistoplineoffirstunit,SplitLowerisbottom3linesoffirstunitand
alllinesofsecondunit.LED1/3islit.)
Â2/6(SplitUpperistoptwolinesoffirstunit,SplitLowerisbottomtwolinesoffirst
unitandalllinesofsecondunit.LED2/1ison.)
Â3/5(LED3/1ison.)
Â4/4(allthreeLEDsareon.)
Â5/3(allthreeLEDsareon.)
Â6/2(allthreeLEDsareon.)
Â7/1(allthreeLEDsareon.)
LOCK
Activates/deactivatesTrackLock.Whenenabled,selectingatrackdoesnotswitchthe
currenttrackselection.
SPOTERASE
Currentlyunassigned.
MARKER
SwitchesbetweenMarkeroverlay(see“MarkerOverlay”onpage160)andnormalview.
158 Chapter11MackieC4
TRACK
SwitchesbetweenTrackoverlay(see“TrackOverlay”onpage160)andnormalview.
Alternatemodeoptions
HoldingdowntheTRACKbuttonaccessesafurthersubmenuinthelowerLCD,
enablingyoutoenterGlobalviewwithacertainObjecttype:
ÂV-Select25switchestoMIDItracks.
ÂV-Select26switchestoInputObjects.
ÂV-Select27switchestoAudiotracks.
ÂV-Select28switchestoAudioInstrumenttracks.
ÂV-Select29switchestoAuxiliaryObjects.
ÂV-Select30switchestoBusObjects.
ÂV-Select31switchestoOutputs.
ÂV-Select32switchestoMasterOutput.
ReleasingtheTRACKbuttonwithoutpressingaV-SelectreturnstoMixerview.
CHANSTRIP
SwitchesbetweenChannelStripoverlay(see“ChannelStripOverlay”onpage160)and
normalview.
Alternatemodeoptions
HoldingdowntheCHANSTRIPbuttonaccessesafurthersubmenuinthelowerLCD:
ÂV-Select9to16switchestooneofeightusermodes,whereyoucanfreelyassign
parameterstoV-PotsorV-Selects.
ÂV-Select17 switchestoTrackMultiChannelview(see“TrackMultiChannelView”on
page152).
ÂV-Select18switchestoPan/SurroundMultiChannelview(see“Pan/SurroundMulti
ChannelView”onpage152).
ÂV-Select19switchestoEQMultiChannelview(see“EQMultiChannelView”on
page153).
ÂV-Select20switchestoSendsMultiChannelview(see“SendMultiChannelView”on
page154).
ÂV-Select21switchestoPlug-inSelectMultiChannelview(see“Plug-inSelectMulti
ChannelView”onpage154).
ÂV-Select22switchestoInstrumentSelectMultiChannelview(see“InstrumentSelect
MultiChannelView”onpage155).
ÂV-Select26switchestoPan/SurroundChannelStripview(see“Pan/Surround
ChannelStripView”onpage152).
ÂV-Select27switchestoEQChannelStripview(see“EQChannelStripView”on
page153).
Chapter11MackieC4 159
ÂV-Select28switchestoSendChannelStripview(see“SendChannelStripView”on
page154).
ÂV-Select31activatestheCycleview(see“CycleView”onpage156).
ÂV-Select32activatestheDropview(see“DropView”onpage156).
FUNCTION
SwitchesbetweenFunctionoverlay(see“FunctionOverlay”onpage161)andnormal
view.
ModifierButtons
Thefourbuttonsinthisareaaresimilartothosefoundonyourcomputerkeyboard
(butareindependentofthekeyboardmodifiers).ManyLogicfunctionsbehave
differentlywhenoneormore“modifier”key(s)ispressed,inconjunctionwithanother
keyormouseclick.ThisalsoappliestotheC4controlsurface.All“modified”C4
commandsarecoveredineachfunctiondescription.
Hereisagenericdescriptionofthemodifierbuttonfunctions:
ÂSHIFT:Switchesotherbuttonstoalternatefunction.
ÂOPTION:Whilehelddown,parametersaresettotheminimum,defaultormaximum
valuewheneditedwithaV-Pot.
ÂCTRL:DisablestheGroupfunction.
Âx/ALT:Whilehelddown,parametersareeditedinfine(highresolution)modewitha
V-Pot.
BANKLeft/Right
Shiftsparameterdisplaybyonepageinparticularviewmodes.
SINGLELeft/Right
Shiftsparameterdisplaybyoneparameterinparticularviewmodes.
TRACKL/R
InMultiChannelview,TRACKL/Rshiftsthefaderbankleftorrightbythenumberof
channelstripsinthecontrolsurfacegroup.Asanexample:IfyouhavetwoC4unitsin
acontrolsurfacegroup,theviewshiftsby16channels.SimultaneouslypressingTRACK
LorTRACKRandOPTIONswitchesthefaderbanktothebeginningorend.Asan
example,ifyouareviewingthefirsteightchannels(of64AudioObjects)inthefader
bank,pressingOPTIONandTRACKLorTRACKRwillswitchtoviewthelasteight
channelsinthefaderbank(AudioObjects57to64).
InChannelStripview,TRACKL/Rselectsthepreviousornexttrack.WithSHIFTheld
down:asabove,butforSplitLower.
160 Chapter11MackieC4
SLOTUP/DOWN
SelectsthedesiredEQ,Sendorplug-ininsertslot.
MarkerOverlay
TheMarkeroverlayisactivewhentheMARKERbuttonlightison.
ÂV-Select1to30isassignedtomarkers1to30.TheupperLCDlineshowsthemarker
name;thelowerlinedisplays“INSIDE”whentheSPLfallsbetweenmarker
boundaries.
ÂV-Select31createsanewmarker.
ÂV-Select32deletesthecurrentmarker.
TrackOverlay
TheTrackoverlayisactivewhentheTRACKbuttonlightison.
ÂV-Select1to32changesthecurrentlyeditedtrack.WhenatrackisselectedforSplit
Upper,thelowerLCDlinedisplaystheword“UPPER.”IfatrackisselectedforSplit
Lower,theword“LOWER”isshown.
ToselectatrackforSplitUpper,presstheappropriateV-Select.
ToselectatrackforSplitLower,presstheV-SelectwhileholdingdownSHIFT.
ÂBANKLeft/Rightshiftsthefaderbankbythenumberofchannelsinthecontrol
surfacegroup.
ÂSINGLELeft/Rightshiftsthefaderbankbyonetrack.
ChannelStripOverlay
TheChannelStripoverlayisactivewhentheCHANSTRIPbuttonlightison.
ÂV-Pot/V-Selectrow1editsthefrequencyandgainofEQbands3to6(theparametric
bands),providedanEQplug-inisinsertedinthecurrentchannelstrip.
ÂV-Pot/V-Selectrow2switchestoeditmodeforplug-ininserts1to8,provideda
plug-inisinsertedintherespectiveInsertslot.Ifnoplug-inisinserted,turnthe
respectiveV-Pottoselectaplug-in,thenpressV-Select,toinstantiateit.
ÂV-Pot/V-Selectrow3editsSend1to8Level,providedthecurrenttrackhasactive
sends.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select25switchestoInstrumentEditmode,providedtheselectedtrackisan
AudioInstrumenttrackandanAudioInstrumentisinserted.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select26editstrackoutput.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select27setstheautomationmode.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select28editsgroupmembership.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select29editsvolume.
Chapter11MackieC4 161
ÂV-Pot/V-Select30editspan/surroundangle(forsurroundchannels).
ÂV-Pot/V-Select31editsSurroundDiversity.
ÂV-Pot/V-Select32editstrackmode(mono/stereo).
FunctionOverlay
TheFunctionoverlayisactivewhentheFUNCTIONbuttonlightison.
Control Assignment
1(display:Params) Enables/Disablestheparameterdisplayoftheactivewindow.
2(ChannlStrip) Enables/DisablesChannelStripOnlyoptioninArrange.
3(Delayinms) Activates/Deactivatesdisplayofdelaysinmilliseconds.
4(Ruler:SMPTE) Activates/DeactivatesSMPTEdisplayoftimeruler.
5(GlobalTrack) Activates/DeactivatesdisplayofGlobaltracks.
6(ArrangGrid) Activates/DeactivatesdisplayofthegridinArrange.
7(EventFloat) Activates/DeactivatesdisplayofthefloatingEventList.
8(Name/Value) SwitchesthedisplaymodebetweenNameandValue(identicaltothe
NAME/VALUEbuttonontheLogicControl).
9(TrackAutom.) Enables/DisablesdisplayoftrackautomationinArrangewindows.
10(Trk>RgAutom.) PerformsMoveCurrentTrackAutomationDataToRegionkeycommand.
WiththeSHIFTbuttonhelddown(display:Trk>ObAuAll),MoveAll
TrackAutomationDataToRegionkeycommandisperformed.
11 (Rg>TrkAutom.) PerformsMoveCurrentRegionControlDataToTrackAutomation
function.
WiththeSHIFTbuttonhelddown(display:Ob>TrkAuAll),MoveAll
RegionControlDataToTrackAutomationkeycommandisperformed.
12(ClearAutom.) PerformsDeleteCurrentlyVisibleAutomationDataofCurrentTrackkey
command.WiththeSHIFTbuttonhelddown(display:ClearAuAll),
DeleteAllAutomationDataofCurrentTrackfunctionisperformed.
13(ClrAllOverld) ResetstheLevelMeterOverloaddisplays.
14(ClrAllRecRdy) SwitchesoffRecordReadyforalltracks.
15(ClrAllSolo) SwitchesoffSoloforalltracks.
16(ClrAllMute) SwitchesoffMuteforalltracks.
17(Tool:Pointr) ChoosesthePointertool.
18(Tool:Pencil) ChoosesthePenciltool.
19(Tool:Scissr) ChoosestheScissorstool.
20(Tool:Glue) ChoosestheGluetool.
21(Tool:Text) ChoosestheTexttool.
22(Tool:Xfade) ChoosestheCrossfadetool.
23(Tool:Marque) ChoosestheMarqueetool.
24(Tool:Autom.) ChoosestheAutomationtool.
162 Chapter11MackieC4
TheSHIFTmodifierbuttoniscurrentlyassignedtoV-Selects10to12(seeabove).Useof
theOPTION,CTRLorx/ALTmodifiersdon’talterV-Select/V-Potfunctionality,asthey
areunassigned.Youcanfreelyassignnewkeycommandstotheseencoders,ormay
choosetoreassigntheexistingassignmentsinLogicPro.
V-Pot25(WfZoom) EditstheactiveArrangewaveformzoomfactor.
V-Pot26(V.Zoom) Editstheverticalzoomfactoroftheactivewindow.
V-Pot27(H.Zoom) Editsthehorizontalzoomfactoroftheactivewindow.
V-Pot28(MoveCycle) MovestheCyclelocators.
V-Pot29(Quantz) ChoosestheQuantizeAgainvalue.V-Select29performsQuantizeAgain
fortheselectedRegionsorevents.
V-Pot30(Format) ChoosestheFormatvalueforclockdisplay.
V-Select31(PrevSetEXS) Performs“NextPlug-inSettingorEXSInstrument”keycommand.
V-Select32(NextSetEXS) Performs“PreviousPlug-inSettingorEXSInstrument”keycommand.
Control Assignment
12
163
12 MackieHUI
SetUp
PleasemakesurethatyourHUIunit(s)areconnectedbi-directionallywiththe
computer,usingaMIDIinterface.
TosetupMackieHUIunits:
1ChooseLogicPro>ControlSurfaces>Setup.
2ChooseNew>InstallintheSetupwindow’slocalmenu.
3SelectHUIintheInstallwindow.
4ClicktheScanbutton.
LogicProwillscanfor,andautomaticallyinstall,yourcontrolsurface(s).
OtherHUICompatibleDevices
IftheunitemulatesoneHUIunit,proceedasifusingaHUI.
IfyouexperienceproblemsintheDSPEditdisplay,installtheunitasaDM2000.
IftheunitemulatesmorethanoneHUI,addtherequirednumberofadditionaldevices
intheSetupwindow(seetheYamahadigitalmixersectionsinthisdocument).Ifthe
unitislimitedtosupportofonlyoneHUIDSPeditsection,chooseHUIChannelStrips
onlyasthemodelnamefortheseadditionalunits.ThisensuresthatscrollingintheDSP
editsectionislimitedtofourparameters.
Ifyouwishtoknowmoreaboutbuttonassignments,refertotheAssignmentOverview
sectionbelow,andthedevice’susermanual.
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
164 Chapter12MackieHUI
ASSIGNSection
FaderBankButtons
Control Assignment
SENDAAssignsSend1LeveltoV-Pots,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPV-Pots.Whileheld
down,thescribblestripsshowthecurrentSend1destinationassignment.
SHIFT/ADD Asabove,forSend6
SENDBAssignsSend2LeveltoV-Pots,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPV-Pots.Whileheld
down,thescribblestripsshowthecurrentSend2destinationassignment.
SHIFT/ADD Asabove,forSend7
SENDCAssignsSend3LeveltoV-Pots,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPV-Pots.Whileheld
down,thescribblestripsshowthecurrentSend3destinationassignment.
SHIFT/ADD Asabove,forSend8
SENDDAssignsSend4LeveltoV-Pots,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPV-Pots.Whileheld
down,thescribblestripsshowthecurrentSend4destinationassignment.
SENDEAssignsSend5LeveltoV-Pots,andSend5to8LevelstoDSPV-Pots.Whileheld
down,thescribblestripsshowthecurrentSend5destinationassignment.
PANAssignsPantoV-Pots;assignsselectedtrack’sPan/SurroundparameterstoDSPV-
Pots.
INPUT AssignsTrackInputtoV-Pots.Whilehelddown,thescribblestripsshowthecurrent
TrackInputassignment.
OUTPUT AssignsTrackOutputtoV-Pots.Whilehelddown,thescribblestripsshowthe
currentTrackOutputassignment.
REC/RDYALL DisableRecordReadyonalltracks.
BYPASS SwitchestheINSERTbuttonsbetweenInsertSelectandInsertBypassmode.Also
seeInsertentryinChannelStripstableonpage166.
MUTE SwitchestheV-SelectbuttonsbetweenSendPositionandSendMutemode.
SHIFT Enables/DisablesFlipmode.
SELECT-ASSIGN DisplaystheV-Potassignmentasfollows:
Pan,Snd1toSnd8,S1AstoS8As,In,Out.
SUSPEND —
DEFAULT SwitchesV-Selectbuttonsbetweennormalbehaviorandsettingdefaultvalue.
ASSIGN WhenV-PotsdisplayaSendlevel,theASSIGNbuttonswitchesthemtoSend
DestinationAssignmentmode.PressV-SelectorASSIGNbuttonagaintoconfirm
theassignment.
Control Assignment
BankLeft Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheleft.
BankRight Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheright.
ChannelLeft Shiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheleft.
ChannelRight Shiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheright.
Chapter12MackieHUI 165
WINDOWSection
KEYBOARDSHORTCUTSSection
Control Assignment
TRANSPORT Opens/ClosestheTransportwindow.
EDIT Opens/ClosestheArrangewindow.
MIX Opens/ClosestheTrackMixer.
ALT Opens/ClosestheSampleEditor.
STATUS Opens/ClosestheAudiowindow.
MEM-LOC Opens/ClosestheMarkerList.
Control Assignment
UNDO PerformsUndo.
SHIFT/ADD PerformsRedo.
OPTION/ALL OpensUndoHistorywindow.
SAVE Savesthesong.
OPTION/ALL PerformsSaveAsfunction,allowingyoutosavethesongunderadifferentname.
EDITMODE —
EDITTOOL Selectsthenexttool.Whilehelddown,numericalbuttonsselectaspecifictool.
SHIFT/ADD Shiftstosecondmeaningofsomebuttons.Seedescriptionsofotherbuttons.
OPTION/ALL Whilehelddown,valuechangemodeissetto“relative”:relativevaluechanges
resultinaminimum,default,ormaximumvaluefortheeditedparameter.Alsosee
descriptionofotherbuttons.
CTRL/CLUTCH Whilehelddown,theGroupClutchisengaged(allgroupsaredisabled).
x/ALT/FINE Whilehelddown,valuechangemodeissetto“fine”:relativevaluechangesworkat
maximumresolution.Alsoseedescriptionsofotherbuttons.
166 Chapter12MackieHUI
ChannelStrips
Control Assignment
Levelmeters Displaysmomentaryandpeaklevels.
REC/RDY Activates/DeactivatesRecordEnablebutton.
OPTION/ALL DisablesRecordEnablebuttonforalltracks.
INSERT BYPASSbuttonoff(seeInsertSelectmodeonpage164):selectstrackforplug-in
selection.
BYPASSbuttonon(seeInsertBypassmodepage164):enables/disablesbypassof
currentlyselectedInsertslot.
V-SEL PANbuttonon:setsPanparametertocenterifDEFAULTbuttonison.
Send1to8selected:editsSendPre/Post,activates/deactivatesSendMuteorsets
SendLeveltodefaultvalue.
InSendDestinationAssignmentmode,TrackInput(seeInputbuttononpage164)
orTrackOutputAssignmentmode(seeOutputbuttononpage164),theV-SEL
buttonsconfirmtheselection.
V-Pot AdjustsparameterselectedintheASSIGNsection.
AUTO Cyclesthroughautomationmodes.
Withanautomationmodebuttonhelddown,thebuttonsetsthisautomation
mode.
SOLO Enables/DisablesSolo.
OPTION/ALL DisablesSoloforalltracks.
MUTE Enables/DisablesMute.
OPTION/ALL Unmutesalltracks.
Scribblestrip Displaystrackname,orSend,In,orOutassignment.
SELECT Selectstrack.
SHIFT/ADD Setsvolumetounitylevel.
DEFAULT Setsvolumetounitylevel.
Fader Adjustsvolume,orduplicatesV-PotinFlipmode.
Chapter12MackieHUI 167
DSPEDIT/ASSIGNSection
Control Assignment
ASSIGN —
COMPARE SwitchesDSPdisplaybetween“trackname/parametername”and“parametername/
parametervalue”modes.
BYPASS Enables/Disablesbypassofcurrentlyeditedplug-ininsert.
DSPSelect1to
4
Assignment Pan:
ÂDSPSelect1centersPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂDSPSelect2centersSurroundDiversity.
ÂDSPSelect3centersSurroundLFE.
ÂDSPSelect4selectsSurroundmode.
Assignment Send:
ÂActivate/DeactivateSends1to4orMutes5to8.
Plug-in Assign mode:
ÂConfirmsinsert1to4or5to8plug-inselection,selectsthisinsertandenters
Plug-inEditmode.
Plug-in Edit mode:
ÂSetsvaluetodefault,orturnsparameter“switch”on/off.
DSPV-Pots Assignment Pan:
ÂDSPV-Pot1controlsPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂDSPV-Pot2controlsSurroundDiversity.
ÂDSPV-Pot3controlsSurroundLFE.
ÂDSPV-Pot4controlsSurroundMode.
Assignment Send:
ÂControlSend1to4or5to8Level.
Plug-in Assign mode:
ÂAssignsplug-ininserts1to4or5to8.
Plug-in Edit mode:
ÂControlstheselectedplug-inparameter.
INSERT/PARAM SwitchesbetweenPlug-inAssignandPlug-inEditmodes.
SCROLL Plug-InEditmode:shiftsparameterdisplaybythenumberofDSPV-Potsinthe
controlsurfacegroup(usuallyfour).
x/ALT/FINE Plug-inEdit:modeshiftsparameterdisplaybyone.
168 Chapter12MackieHUI
FunctionKeys
AUTOENABLESection
Control Assignment
F1 ClearsOverloadLEDs.
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesMIDItracks.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/ClosesArrangewindow.
F2 RecallsScreenset2.
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesInputObjects.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/ClosesTrackMixer.
F3 RecallsScreenset3.
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesaudiotracks.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/ClosesEventEditor.
F4 RecallsScreenset4.
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesAudioInstrumenttrackss.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/ClosesScoreEditor.
F5 RecallsScreenset5.
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesAuxObjects.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/ClosesHyperEditor.
F6 RecallsScreenset6.
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesBusObjects.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/ClosesMatrixEditor.
F7 SwitchescounterdisplaybetweenSMPTEandbars/beats/format/ticks.
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesOutputsandMasterObject.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/ClosesTransportwindow.
F8/ESC Default:exitsfolder.
GotoMarkemode:cancelsdialog.
x/ALT/FINE Opens/ClosesAudiowindow.
Control Assignment
FADER Activates/Deactivatesvolumeautomationplaybackandrecording.
PAN Activates/Deactivatespanautomationplaybackandrecording.
PLUGIN Activates/Deactivatesplug-inparameterautomationplaybackandrecording.
MUTE Activates/Deactivatesmuteautomationplaybackandrecording.
SEND Activates/Deactivatessendlevelautomationplaybackandrecording.
SENDMUTE —
Chapter12MackieHUI 169
AUTOMODESection
STATUS/GROUPSection
Control Assignment
READ SetsselectedtracktoReadautomationmode.Whilehelddown,thechannelstrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoRead.
OPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoReadautomationmode.
LATCH SetsselectedtracktoLatchautomationmode.Whilehelddown,thechannelstrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoLatch.
OPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoautomationmodeLatch.
TRIM —
TOUCH SetsselectedtracktoTouchautomationmode.Whilehelddown,thechannelstrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoTouch.
OPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoTouchautomationmode.
WRITE SetsselectedtracktoWriteautomationmode.Whilehelddown,thechannelstrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoWrite.
OPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoWriteautomationmode.
OFF SetsselectedtracktoOffautomationmode.Whilehelddown,thechannelstrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoOff.
OPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoOffautomationmode.
Control Assignment
AUTO Whilehelddown,thescribblestripsdisplaythetracks’automationmode.
MONITOR —
PHASE —
GROUP Enters Group Edit mode:
ÂTheupperlineintheDSPeditsectiondisplaysthecurrentlyeditedgroupnumber
andname.
ÂDSPSelectbuttons1to4switchbetweenthepropertiesofthecurrentlyedited
group.Thegroupnameisshowninthelowerline.
ÂWhentheINSERT/PARAMbuttonisoff,theDSPEditV-Potsscrollthroughthe
groupproperties.IftheINSERT/PARAMbuttonison,theDSPEDITV-Potsselect
thegroupcurrentlybeingedited.
ÂTheSELECTbuttonsenable/disablegroupmembershipofthetrack.
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoTrackView.
CREATE CreatesanewgroupandentersGroupEditmode(seeabove).
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalView.
SUSPEND Activates/DeactivatestheGroupClutch.
SHIFT/ADD SwitchestoArrangeView.
170 Chapter12MackieHUI
EDITSection
TimeDisplay
LOCATE/NUMERICSSection
Control Assignment
CAPTURE —
SEPARATE —
CUT Cutstheselection.
COPY Copiestheselection.
PASTE PastestheClipboardcontents.
DELETE Deletestheselection.
Control Assignment
TIMECODE Litifcounterdisplaystimecode.
FEET Notassigned.
BEATS Litifcounterdisplaysbars/beats/format/ticks.
Timedisplay Displaystimecodeorbars/beats/format/ticks.
RUDESOLO
LIGHT
Flashesifanytrackissoloed.
Control Assignment
CLR Deletescurrentmarker.
=Createsamarkeratthecurrentsongposition.
/Equivalenttocomputerkeyboard/key.
*Equivalenttocomputerkeyboard*key.
–Equivalenttocomputerkeyboard–key.
+Equivalenttocomputerkeyboard+key.
0to9Normal:1to9recallsmarkers1to9.
IfinGotoMarkerdialog:Equivalenttocomputerkeyboardkeys0to9.
SHIFT/ADD Switches to Global View and enables:
1:MIDItracks
2:InputObjects
3:Audiotracks
4:AudioInstrumentObjects
5:AuxObjects
6:BusObjects
7:OutputsandMasterObject
Chapter12MackieHUI 171
TransportSection
EDITTOOL Selectstool:
1:Pointer
2:Pencil
3:Eraser
4:Texttool
5:Scissors
6:Glue
7:Solotool
8:Mutetool
9:MagnifyingGlass
0IfinGotoMarkerdialog:Equivalenttocomputerkeyboard0key.
.IfnotinGotoMarkerdialog:EntersGotoMarkerdialog.
IninGotoMarkerdialog:Confirmsenteredmarkernumber.
ENTER IfnotinGotoMarkerdialog:Entersfolderofselectedtrack.
IfinGotoMarkerdialog:Confirmsenteredmarkernumber.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
AUDITION —
PRE Setsleftlocator.
IN SetsDropInlocator.
OUT SetsDropOutlocator.
POST Setsrightlocator.
RTZ Goestotheleftlocator.
END Goestotherightlocator.
ONLINE Switchesbetweeninternal/externalsync.
LOOP Enables/DisablesCyclemode.
QUICKPUNCH Enables/DisablesDropmode.
REWIND Shuttlesbackward.
FASTFWD Shuttlesforward.
STOP Stopplayback.
PLAY Startsplayback.
SHIFT/ADD Pause
RECORD Record
172 Chapter12MackieHUI
CursorButtons
JogWheel
FootSwitches
Control Assignment
CursorUp Cursormode:EquivalenttocomputerkeyboardUpArrowkey.
Zoommode:Zoomsoutvertically.
SHIFT/ADD Zoommode:Individualtrackzoomin.
x/ALT/FINE Pageup
OPTION/ALL+
x/ALT/FINE
Scrolltotop.
CursorDown Cursormode:EquivalenttocomputerkeyboardDownArrowkey.
Zoommode:Zoomsoutvertically.
SHIFT/ADD Zoommode:Individualtrackzoomout.
x/ALT/FINE Pagedown
OPTION/ALL+
x/ALT/FINE
Scrolltobottom.
CursorLeft Cursormode:EquivalenttocomputerkeyboardLeftArrowkey.
Zoommode:Zoomsouthorizontally.
SHIFT/ADD Zoommode:Individualtrackzoomresetoftracksfromthesameclass.
x/ALT/FINE Pageleft
OPTION/ALL+
x/ALT/FINE
Scrolltoleftborder.
CursorRight Cursormode:EquivalenttocomputerkeyboardRightArrowkey.
Zoommode:Zoomsinhorizontally.
SHIFT/ADD Zoommode:Individualtrackzoomresetofalltracks.
x/ALT/FINE Pageright
OPTION/ALL+
x/ALT/FINE
Scrolltorightborder.
MODE SwitchesbetweenCursorandZoommodes.
Control Assignment
JogWheel Default:MoveSPLbyonebar.
Scrubbuttonlit:Scrubmode.
Shuttlebuttonlit:Shuttlemode.
SCRUB Activates/DeactivatesScrubmode.
SHUTTLE Activates/DeactivatesShuttlemode.
Control Assignment
FootSwitch1PlayorStop
FootSwitch2RecordOn/Off
13
173
13 RadikalTechnologiesSAC-2K
SetUp
Pleasemakesurethatyourcontrolsurfaceisconnectedbi-directionallywiththe
computer,eitherusingaMIDIinterfaceorthebuilt-inUSBconnector.Iftheunit(s)are
connectedviaUSB,ensurethattheMIDIdrivershippedwiththeunitisinstalled.
TosetupSAC-2Kunits:
1ChooseLogic>Preferences>ControlSurfaces>Setup.
2ChooseNew>InstallintheSetupwindow’slocalmenu.
3SelecttheSAC-2KintheInstallwindow.
4ClicktheScanbutton.
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
LCDsandEncoders
Control Assignment
LeftandmiddleLCDs Upperrowdisplaystracknumber(ifinaMultiChannelView)orparameter
name(ifinaChannelStripView).
Lowerrowshowstheparametervalueoftheencoderbelowthedisplay.
Levelmetersaredisplayedtotheright.
RightLCD Upperrowdisplaysthenameoftheparametereditedwiththeencoder
below.
Lowerrowdisplaystheparametervalueassignedtotheencoderbelowthe
display.
TheMasterOutputlevelmeterisdisplayedatthefarright.
Encoders EditthecorrespondingparameterdisplayedintheLCD.
Encoderpushbuttons Parameterswithtwovalues(On/Off):Switchesbetweenthetwovalues.
Parametersthataccessitems(plug-inselection):Confirmspreselection.
Atothertimes:Setsparametertodefaultvalue.
174 Chapter13RadikalTechnologiesSAC-2K
ChannelStrips
MixeModeSection
Control Assignment
Mute/Solo SwitchesMute/Solo1to8buttonsbetweenMuteandSolomodes.
LEDoff:Mute/SolobuttonsswitchMutestateon/off.
LEDon:Mute/SolobuttonsswitchSolostateon/off.
LEDflashes:Mute/SolobuttonsswitchRec/Rdystateon/off.
SHIFT SetsMute/SolobuttonstoRec/Rdymode.
Mute/Solo1to8Mute/SoloLEDoff:Enables/DisablesMute;LEDdisplaysMutestatus.
Mute/SoloLEDon:Enables/DisablesSolo;LEDdisplaysSolostatus.
Mute/SoloLEDflashing:Enables/DisablesRec/Rdy;LEDdisplaysRec/Rdy
status.
SELECT1to8buttons Selectstrack.
Exception:InGroupmode,thesebuttonsdefinegroupmembershipofthe
track.
MasterSelectbutton SwitchesFlipmodebetweenOffandDuplicate.
Fader1to8Controlsvolume,orduplicatesencoderaboveifFlipmodeisenabled.The
silkscreenedlegendlinesarescaledasfollows:+6dB,+3dB,0dB,−5dB,
−10dB,−15 dB,−20dB,−25dB,−30dB,−35dB,−40dB,−45dB,−50dB,−60
dB,−inf.
MasterFader Controlsmastervolume.
Control Assignment
Pan Switchestomulti-channelpanediting.
Encoders9to12editPan/Angle,Diversity,LFE,andSurroundModeof
selectedtrack(inSurroundmode).
High,HiMid,LowMid,
Low
Switchestomulti-channelgaineditingofacertainEQband.Encoders9to
12editFrequency,Gain,Qfactor,andOn/Offfortheselectedtrack.
Pressing and releasing the button chooses a specific EQ band.
ÂLow:Band3(firstparametricEQband)
ÂLowMid:Band4(secondparametricEQband)
ÂHiMid:Band5(thirdparametricEQband)
ÂHigh:Band6(fourthparametricEQband)
Whilehelddown,Encoder9letsyouchoosetheEQbandtoedit(bands1to
8).
Thebutton’sLEDislitwheninmulti-channelgaineditingmodeofthe
button’sEQband.
Snd/Ins Switches the four Snd/Ins (1 to 4) buttons between Send and Insert modes.
ÂLEDoff:Sendmode
ÂLEDon:Insertmode
Chapter13RadikalTechnologiesSAC-2K 175
Snd/Ins1to4ÂIfinSendmode,switchestomulti-channelsendleveleditingofSends1to
4.
Encoders9to12editDestination,Level,Pre/PostandMuteoftheselected
track.Destinationmustbeconfirmedbyencoder9’spush-button.
Whilehelddown,Encoder9selectsthedesiredSendnumber(1to8).
Thebutton’sLEDislitwheninmulti-channelsendleveleditingmodeof
thebutton’ssendnumber.
ÂIfinInsertmode,switchestomulti-channelplug-inselectionforInserts1
to4.Plug-inselectionisconfirmedbytheencoder’spush-button.
Whilehelddown,Encoder9enablesyoutochoosethedesiredInsert
number(1to15).
Thebutton’sLEDislitwheninplug-inselectionmode(ofthe
correspondingbutton’sinsertnumber).
Audio SwitchestoGlobalViewanddisplaysaudiotracks.
SHIFT SwitchestoMixerView.
MIDI SwitchestoGlobalViewanddisplaysMIDItracks.
SHIFT SwitchestoArrangeView.
Input SwitchestoGlobalViewanddisplaysInputObjects.
SHIFT SwitchestoGlobalViewanddisplaysOutputsandMasterObject.
Inst SwitchestoGlobalViewanddisplaysAudioInstrumentObjects.
SHIFT SwitchestoGlobalViewanddisplaysAuxObjects.
Bus SwitchestoGlobalViewanddisplaysBusObjects.
SHIFT SwitchestoGlobalViewanddisplaysfoldersandalltracksshownwhenthe
View>OtherTracksoptionisactivatedintheTrackMixer.
Group Switches to Group editing:
ÂEncoder1to10pushbuttonseditagroupproperty(Propertyshownin
theLCD’slowerline).
ÂEncoder11 scrollsthroughgroupproperties.
ÂEncoder12selectsagrouptoedit.Itsnameisdisplayedinthelowerline,
aboveEncoder12.
ÂSelectbuttons1to8activate/deactivatetrackmembershipwithinthe
group.
1to8Shiftsthefaderbankoffsettotheleftbyonebank.
9to16 Shiftsthefaderbankoffsettotherightbyonebank.
17to24 Shiftsthefaderbankoffsettotheleftbyonetrack.
25to32 Shiftsthefaderbankoffsettotherightbyonetrack.
Control Assignment
176 Chapter13RadikalTechnologiesSAC-2K
SoftwareNavigationSection
LocatorSection
Thelocatordisplaysthecurrentsongpositioninbars/beatsformat,asdefinedinthe
songsettings.Thespacesbetweenthesectionsarereplacedwithaperiod,asthebars/
beatsformatusesupto14charactersinLogic,andtheSACdisplayislimitedtoeight
digits.
Control Assignment
1NumLEDoff:—
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘1’oncomputerkeyboard.
2NumLEDoff:EquivalenttoLeftArrowkeyoncomputerkeyboard.
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘2’oncomputerkeyboard.
3NumLEDoff:EquivalenttoUpArrowkeyoncomputerkeyboard.
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘3’oncomputerkeyboard.
4NumLEDoff:EequivalenttoRightArrowkeyoncomputerkeyboard.
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘4’oncomputerkeyboard.
5NumLEDoff:PerformsUndo.
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘5’oncomputerkeyboard.
6NumLEDoff:—
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘6’oncomputerkeyboard.
7NumLEDoff:Copiestheselection.
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘7’oncomputerkeyboard.
8NumLEDoff:EquivalenttoDownArrowkeyoncomputerkeyboard.
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘8’oncomputerkeyboard.
9NumLEDoff:PastestheClipboardcontents.
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘9’oncomputerkeyboard.
0NumLEDoff:Savesthesong.
NumLEDon:Equivalentto‘0’oncomputerkeyboard.
Num Switchesthenumericbuttonsbetweenprimaryandsecondaryfunction(see
above).
Enter EquivalenttoEnterkeyonthecomputerkeyboard.
Chapter13RadikalTechnologiesSAC-2K 177
MarkerSection
TransportSection
Control Assignment
SHIFT Shiftstosecondaryfunctionofotherbuttons.
Scrub Rotates thru the three modes for the Jog Wheel:
ÂLEDoff:MoveSPLbyonebar.
ÂLEDon:ActivatesScrubmode.
ÂLEDflashes:ActivatesShuttlemode.
From SetsleftlocatortocurrentSPL.
SHIFT SetsSPLtoleftlocator.
StoreMarker CreatesamarkeratthecurrentSPL.
SHIFT DeletesmarkeratthecurrentSPL.
To SetsrightlocatortocurrentSPL.
SHIFT SetsSPLtorightlocator.
RecallMarker OpenstheGotoMarkerdialog.
SHIFT OpenstheMarkerList.
JogWheel MovestheSPLinoneofthreemodes,dependingonthestateoftheScrub
button(seeabove).
Control Assignment
<< Shuttlesbackward.
SHIFT Goestopreviousmarker.
>> Shuttlesforward.
SHIFT Goestonextmarker.
STOP Stopsplayback.
PLAY Startsplayback.
SHIFT Enables/DisablesCyclemode.
RECORD Record
SHIFT Enables/DisablesReplacemode.
178 Chapter13RadikalTechnologiesSAC-2K
ChannelStripsSection
Troubleshooting
Thetracknamesareshorterthannecessary,andtheassignmentsdon’twork
correctly.
TheSAC-2Kisinanemulationmode(LogicControlorHUI,forexample).
Toresolvethisissue,simplyswitchtheSAC-2Kpoweroff,andthenbackon.
Thefadersdon’twork,andthelocatordisplayshows00000000.
YouhavemanuallyswitchedtheSAC-2KtoSLAVEmode.This,unfortunately,doesnot
initializesomesettingsrequiredforpropercommunication.
Toresolvethisissue,simplyswitchtheSAC-2Kpoweroff,andthenbackon.
Control Assignment
EQs EntersChannelStripEQeditingmode.Pressingthebuttonagaincycles
throughtheavailablepages.
Inserts/Sends EntersChannelStripplug-ineditingmode—editsthecurrentlyselected
insertoftheselectedtrack.Pressingthebuttonagaincyclesthroughthe
availablepages.
Dynamics —
MIDI —
Instrument EntersChannelStripinstrumenteditingmode—editstheinstrumentofthe
selectedtrack(ifit’sanAudioInstrumenttrack).Pressingthebuttonagain
cyclesthroughtheavailablepages.
14
179
14 RolandSI-24
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂEnsurethatyourSI-24unit(s)areconnectedtotheRPCcardwiththe(included)blue
cable.ThisconnectorprovidesbothdigitalaudioandMIDIconnections.
ÂMakesurethattheMIDIdrivershippedwiththeunitisinstalled.
ToscanforyourRolandSI-24unit:
1ChooseLogic>Preferences>ControlSurfaces>Setup
2ChooseNew>InstallintheSetupwindow’slocalmenu.
3SelectRolandSI-24intheInstallwindow.
4ClicktheScanbutton.
LogicProwillscanfor,andautomaticallyinstall,yourcontrolsurfaces.
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
ChannelStrips
Control Assignment
EQON/OFF1
to4
In Pan mode:
ÂSwitchesbypassstateofEQbands1–4.
ÂEntersEQ/Sendmode.IfnoChannelorLinearPhaseEQispresentontheselected
track,aChannelEQwillautomaticallybeinserted.
In EQ/Send mode:
ÂSwitchesbypassstateofEQbands1–4.ThebuttonLEDislitwhentheEQis
enabled.
In Plug-in mode:
ÂSwitchestoinsert1–4.ThelitbuttonLEDindicatestheselectedinsert.
ÂIfaPlug-inwindowisopen,itwillalsoswitchtotheselectedinsert.
SHIFT InEQ/Sendmode:Enables/DisablesSend1–4Mute.
180 Chapter14RolandSI-24
EQ/SEND Switches track edit section between:
ÂEQ/Sendmode(LEDon).
ÂPanmode(LEDoff).
PLUG-IN Switches track edit section between:
ÂPlug-inmode(LEDon)(Plug-inwindowopens.)
ÂPanmode(LEDoff)
Plug-inwindowcloseswhenPlug-inmodeisexited.
SHIFT Switches track edit section between:
ÂInstrumentmode(LEDon)(Instrumentwindowopens.)
ÂPanmode(LEDoff)
InstrumenteditorwindowcloseswhenInstrumentmodeisexited.
PAN1to12 In Pan mode:
ÂControlschannelstrip’sPan(surroundanglefortracksinsurroundmode).
In EQ/Send mode:
Â1/3/5/7:EQ1–4Gain.
Â2/4/6/8:EQ1–4Frequency.
Â9–12:Send1–4Level.
In Plug-in mode:
Â1–10:Editsplug-inparameter.
Â11 :Bypassesplug-in.
Â12:Shiftsplug-inparameterpage.
In Instrument mode:
Â1–10:EditsInstrumentparameter.
Â11 :BypassesInstrument.
Â12:ShiftsInstrumentparameterpage.
SHIFT In EQ/Send mode:
Â1/3/5/7:EQ1–4Type
Â2/4/6/8:EQ1–4Qfactor.
Â9–12:Send1–4destination.
CHSELECT1to
12
Selectstrack/channel.
STATUS1to12 In Automation mode: Switches Automation mode between:
ÂOff(LEDoff)
ÂRead(green)
ÂLatch(orange)
ÂWrite(red)
InRecordReadymode:Enables/DisablesRecordReady.
InSolomode:Enables/DisablesSolo.
InMutemode:Enables/DisablesMute.
Fader1to12 Co n trolsvolume.
Control Assignment
Chapter14RolandSI-24 181
STATUSMODESection
CHASSIGNControls
MASTERSection
SURROUNDPANSection
Control Assignment
AUTOMIX SetsSTATUS1to12 buttonstoAutomationmode.
SHIFT SetsalltrackstoOff,Read,Latch,orWrite(cyclesthrough)automationmode.
REC/PLAY SetsSTATUS1to12 buttonstoRecordReadymode.
SOLO SetsSTATUS1to12 buttonstoSolomode.
MUTE SetsSTATUS1to12 buttonstoMutemode.
Control Assignment
INPUT Showsthefirst12audioinputs(GlobalView)onchannelstrips.
SHIFT Showsthefirst12MIDIchannels(GlobalView)onchannelstrips.
OUTPUT Shows the first 12 audio outputs (Global View) on channel strips:
Â1:Output1–2(front).
Â2:Output3–4(rear).
Â3:Output5(center).
Â4:Output6(LFE).
Â5:Output7–8(digitalout).
SHIFT Showsthefirst12audiochannels(GlobalView)onchannelstrips.
BUS Showsthefirst12audiobuses(GlobalView)onchannelstrips.
SHIFT Showsthefirst12AudioInstruments(GlobalView)onchannelstrips.
Tr1to12 S h owstracks1to12(TrackView)onchannelstrips.
Tr13 to24 Showstracks13to24(TrackView)onchannelstrips.
Control Assignment
MasterFader Controlsoutput1-2volume.
Control Assignment
ON/OFF Switches selected track’s output between:
ÂSurround(LEDon)and
ÂOut1-2(LEDoff).
Alsoshows/hidestheSurroundPanwindow.
Joystick SurroundX/Yofselectedtrack.
182 Chapter14RolandSI-24
NumericKeySection
Control Assignment
SYSTEM SwitchesSI-24toSystemmode.SeeSI-24usermanualfordetails.
LOCATE SwitchesnumerickeystoLocatemode.
SHORTCUT SwitchesnumerickeystoShortcutmode.
SCREENSET SwitchesnumerickeystoScreensetmode.
0to9System mode: See SI-24 user manual.
Locate mode:
Â1to9:Goestomarkers1to9.
Â0:CreatesmarkeratSPL.
Shortcut mode:
Â1:Savessong.LEDislitifsonghaschangedsincelastsave.
Â2:Performsundo.LEDisonifRedoispossible.
Â3:Copiestheselection.
Â4:PastestheClipboardcontents.
Â5:Deletestheselection.
Â6:Enables/DisablesScrubmode.LEDisonifScrubmodeisenabled.
Â7:Enables/DisablesCyclemode.LEDisonifCyclemodeisenabled.
Â8:Enables/DisablesDropmode.LEDisonifDropmodeisenabled.
Â9:SwitchesArrangewindowtovolumeautomationview.
Â0:SwitchesArrangewindowtopanautomationview.
Screenset mode:
Â1to9:RecallScreensets1to9.
Â0:Enables/DisablesLockScreenset.
SHIFT Locate mode:
Â1to9:GoestoMarkers10to18.
Â0:DeletesmarkeratSPL.
Shortcut mode:
Â1:PerformsSaveAs.
Â2:PerformsRedo.
Â3:Cutsselection.
Â4:PastestheClipboardcontents.
Screenset mode:
Â1:Opens/ClosesArrangewindow.
Â2:Opens/ClosesTrackMixer.
Â3:Opens/ClosesEventEditor.
Â4:Opens/ClosesScoreEditor.
Â5:Opens/ClosesHyperEditor.
Â6:Opens/ClosesMatrixEditor.
Â7:Opens/ClosesTransportwindow.
Â8:Opens/ClosesAudiowindow.
Â9:Opens/ClosesSampleEditor.
Chapter14RolandSI-24 183
TransportSection
Control Assignment
PAUSE Pause
REW RewindsSPLbyonebar.
FFWD AdvancesSPLbyonebar.
STOP Stopsplayback.
PLAY Startsplayback.
RECORD Record
Jogwheel Scrubmodeoff:MovesSPLbybars.
Scrubmodeon:Scrubsaudio.
15
185
15 TascamFW-1884
Introduction
LogicPro7supportstheTascamFW-1884,FE-8extensionandtheFW-1082.
Version1.10 oftheplug-inalsosupportstheSoftLCDapplicationwhichdisplays
informationontracknames,parameterassignmentsandthecurrentvalueofthe
encoders.SoftLCDdisplaysthetracks’currentautomationmodewhileoneofthe
automationmodebuttonsishelddown.Thecorrespondingencodereditsthe
parameter.
AlertsaredisplayedinSoftLCD.Selectbuttonsallowyoutoremotely-controlalert
buttons.
ThefollowingtextreferringtotheFW-1884alsoappliestoFE-8andFW-1082,except
wherementionedexplicitly.
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro.
ÂEnsurethattheFW-1884’sMIDIdriverisinstalled.SeetheFW-1884documentation
fordetails.
ÂConnecttheFW-1884toyourcomputerwiththesuppliedFireWirecable.
ÂBootLogicPro.TheFW-1884isinstalledautomatically.
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
Note:TheFE-8unitsonlyoffertheChannelStripsection,sootherfacilitiesmentioned
heredon’tapply.TheFW-1884ENCODERSsectiondoes,however,applytotheFE-8
channelstrips.
TheFW-1082hasnochannelencoders,andoffersanextendedchannelstripsection.
186 Chapter15TascamFW-1884
ENCODERSSection(FW-1884only)
SHORTCUTSSection(FW-1884only).
Control Assignment
FLIP SwitchesFlipmodebetweenOffandSwap.
PANAssignsPantoencoders.
AUX1AssignsSend1leveltoencoders.
AUX2AssignsSend2leveltoencoders.
AUX3AssignsSend3leveltoencoders.
AUX4AssignsSend4leveltoencoders.
AUX5AssignsSend5leveltoencoders.
AUX6AssignsSend6leveltoencoders.
AUX7AssignsSend7leveltoencoders.
AUX8AssignsSend8leveltoencoders.
Control Assignment
SAVE/F1 Savestheactivesong;Thebutton’sLEDislitwhenthesonghasbeenedited.
REVERT/F2 Revertstheactivesongtothesavedversion.
ALLSAFE/F3 DisablesRecordEnablebuttonforalltracks.
CLRSOLO/F4 SwitchesSolooffonalltracks.
SHIFT SwitchesMuteoffonalltracks.
MARKERS/F5 CreatesanewmarkeratthecurrentSPL.
SHIFT DeletesthemarkerattheSPL.
LOOP/F6 Enables/DisablesCyclemode.
CUT CutsthecurrentselectionandplacesitintheClipboard.
DEL Deletesthecurrentselection.
COPY CopiesthecurrentselectiontotheClipboard.
PASTE PastestheClipboardcontentstothecurrentSPL.
ALT/CMD Modifierforotherbuttons.
UNDO PerformsUndo;Thebutton’sLEDislitwhenRedoispossible.
SHIFT PerformsRedo.
SHIFT Modifierforotherbuttons.
CTRL Modifierforotherbuttons.
Chapter15TascamFW-1884 187
ChannelStrips
EQSection(FW-1884only)
TheEQcontrolsapplytoacertainEQbandoftheselectedtrack.AChannelorLinear
PhaseEQwillbeautomaticallyinsertedinthetrack,ifnotalreadypresent.
Control Assignment
RECLEDs TheseLEDsarelitwhenthecorrespondingtrackisrecording.TheLEDsflash
whenthetrackisinRecordReadymode(armed).
SEL Selectsthetrack.
SHIFT Enables/DisablesSendmute,whenencodersarecontrollingaSendlevel.
READ Setsthetrack’sautomationmodetoRead.
WRITE Setsthetrack’sautomationmodetoWrite.
TCH Setsthetrack’sautomationmodetoTouch.
LATCH Setsthetrack’sautomationmodetoLatch.
SOLO Enables/DisablestheSolostatusofthetrack.
SHIFT DisablesSolostatusforalltracks(newforplug-inversion1.20).
MUTE Enables/DisablestheMutestatusofthetrack.
SHIFT DisablesMutestatusforalltracks(newforplug-inversion1.20).
Encoder ControlsparameterchosenwiththeENCODERSsection.
SET WhenencoderscontrolaSend’slevel,thiscombinationsetstheSend
destination.
Fader Controlsvolumeofthetrack.
Mode Assignment
REC Whilehelddown,theSELbuttonsinthechannelstripsenable/disablethe
track’sRecordEnablebutton.
GAIN EditsGainofcurrentlyselectedEQband.
SET Selectstrackinput.
FREQ EditsFrequencyparameterofcurrentlyselectedEQband.
SET SelectsTrackoutput.
QEditsQFactorofcurrentlyselectedEQband.
SET SelectsTrackmode(mono/stereo).
HIGH SelectsEQband6.
SHIFT SelectsEQband8.
REC SwitchesbypassstateofEQband6(newinplug-inversion1.20).
HI-MID SelectsEQband5.
SHIFT SelectsEQband7.
REC SwitchesbypassstateofEQband7(newinplug-inversion1.20).
LOW-MID SelectsEQband4.
188 Chapter15TascamFW-1884
EncodersandControlsSection(FW-1082only)
Thethreebuttonsatthebottomofthissectiondefinethemodeoftheothercontrols:
ÂEQ/Panmode:ThecontrolsapplytoacertainEQbandoftheselectedtrack.
ÂAUX1–4mode:ThecontrolsapplytoSends1–4.
ÂAUX5–8mode:ThecontrolsapplytoSends5–8.
SHIFT SelectsEQband2.
REC SwitchesbypassstateofEQband3(newinplug-inversion1.20).
LOWSelectsEQband3.
SHIFT SelectsEQband1.
REC SwitchesbypassstateofEQband3(newinplug-inversion1.20).
Mode Assignment
Mode Assignment
REC Whilehelddown,theSELbuttonsinthechannelstripsenable/disablethe
track’sRecordEnablebuttonstatus.
EQGAIN–AUX1/5 •EQ/PANmode:editsGainofcurrentlyselectedEQband.
•AUX1–4mode:controlsSend1level.
•AUX5–8mode:controlsSend5level.
SET SelectsTrackinput.
EQFREQ–AUX2/6 •EQ/PANmode:editsFrequencyofcurrentlyselectedEQband.
•AUX1–4mode:controlsSend2level.
•AUX5–8mode:controlsSend6level.
SET SelectsTrackoutput.
EQQ–AUX3/7 •EQ/PANmode:editsQFactorofcurrentlyselectedEQband.
•AUX1–4mode:controlsSend3level.
•AUX5–8mode:controlsSend7level.
SET SelectsTrackmode.
PAN–AUX4/8 •EQ/PANmode:editsPan.
•AUX1–4mode:controlsSend4level.
•AUX5–8mode:controlsSend8level.
EQHI–AUX1/5 •EQ/PANmode:selectsEQband6.
•AUX1–4mode:switchesSend1Muteon/off.
•AUX5–8mode:switchesSend5Muteon/off.
SHIFT •EQ/PANmode:selectsEQband8.
•AUX1–4mode:switchesSend1Position(pre/post.)
•AUX5–8mode:switchesSend5Position(pre/post).
REC SwitchesbypassstateofEQband6.
EQHIMID–AUX2/6 •EQ/PANmode:selectsEQband5.
•AUX1–4mode:switchesSend2Muteon/off.
•AUX5–8mode:switchesSend6Muteon/off.
Chapter15TascamFW-1884 189
MASTERFader
Thisfaderalwayscontrolsthemastervolume.IfnoMasterObjectexistsinthe
Environment,itcontrolsOutput1/2.
Automation/ClockRateSection(FW-1884only)
SHIFT •EQ/PANmode:selectsEQband7.
•AUX1–4mode:switchesSend2Position(pre/post).
•AUX5–8mode:switchesSend6Position(pre/post).
REC SwitchessbypassstateofEQband5.
EQLOMID–AUX3/7 •EQ/PANmode:selectsEQband4.
•AUX1–4mode:switchesSend3Muteon/off.
•AUX5–8mode:switchesSend7Muteon/off.
SHIFT •EQ/PANmode:selectsEQband2.
•AUX1–4mode:switchesSend3Position(pre/post).
•AUX5–8mode:switchesSend7Position(pre/post).
REC SwitchesbypassstateofEQband4.
EQLOW–AUX4/8 •EQ/PANmode:selectsEQband3.
•AUX1–4mode:switchesSend4Muteon/off.
•AUX5–8mode:switchesSend8Muteon/off
SHIFT •EQ/PANmode:selectsEQband1.
•AUX1–4mode:switchesSend4Position(pre/post).
•AUX5–8mode:switchesSend8Position(pre/post).
REC SwitchesbypassstateofEQband3.
EQ/PAN ChoosesEQ/PANmode.
SHIFT Enables/DisablesFlipmode;WithFlipmodeenabled,thefaderscontrolPan.
AUX1–4 ChoosesAUX1–4mode.
AUX5–8 ChoosesAUX5–8mode.
Mode Assignment
Control Assignment
READ Whilehelddown,SELbuttonsareonifatrackisinReadautomationmode.
PressingtheSELbuttonsetsReadmode.Turningtheencoderalsoeditsthe
automationmode.
WRITE Whilehelddown,SELbuttonsareonifatrackisinWriteautomationmode.
PressingtheSELbuttonsetsWritemode.Turningtheencoderalsoeditsthe
automationmode.
TCHWhilehelddown,SELbuttonsareonifatrackisinTouchautomationmode.
PressingtheSELbuttonsetsTouchmode.Turningtheencoderalsoeditsthe
automationmode.
LATCH Whilehelddown,SELbuttonsareonifatrackisinLatchautomationmode.
PressingtheSELbuttonsetsLatchmode.Turningtheencoderalsoeditsthe
automationmode.
190 Chapter15TascamFW-1884
ModeControlsSection(FW-1082only)
MasterSection
F7 Switchesencoderstoeditingofpan/surroundparametersonselected
track:angle,radius,LFE,surroundmode,X,Y.
F8 SwitchesencoderstoEQeditingonselectedtrack.SeeupperlineonSoftLCD
applicationforparameterassignment.Cursorleft/rightshiftstheparameter
bank.
F9 Switchesencoderstoplug-ineditingonselectedtrack.Cursorleft/rightshifts
parameterbank;Cursorup/downchoosesinserttoedit.
F10 Switchesencoderstoinstrumenteditingonselectedtrack.Cursorleft/right
shiftsparameterbank.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
F1 Savestheactivesong;Thebutton’sLEDislitifthesonghasbeenedited.
SHIFT OpenstheSaveAsdialog.
F2 PerformsUndo;Thebutton’sLEDislitwhenRedoispossible.
SHIFT PerformsRedo.
F3 CopiesthecurrentselectiontotheClipboard.
SHIFT CutsthecurrentselectionandplacesitintheClipboard.
F4 PastestheClipboardcontents.
SHIFT Clearsthecurrentselection.
Control Assignment
Cursorbuttons Identicaltocomputerkeyboard’sArrowkeys—exceptwhenencodersarein
EQ,Plug-inorInstrumentEditmodes(seeabove).
SHIFT Zoominandouthorizontallyorvertically.
SHTL EnablesShuttlemodeforwheel.
Wheel Shuttlemodeoff:movesSPLbybar.
Shuttlemodeon:shuttlesSPL.
BankLEDs Showcurrentlyselectedfaderbank.IfyouonlyhaveanFW-1884,abankrefers
toeighttracks.IfyouhaveFE-8extensionsadded,abankmeanstheentire
numberofchannelstrips:16,24,andsoon.
IfnoLEDislit,abankhigherthan4isselected.
<BANK Shiftsfaderbankdownbyonebank.
SHIFT Shiftsfaderbankdownbyonetrack.
SET SwitchestoTrackview(newinplug-inversion1. 20).
BANK>Shiftsfaderbankupbyonebank.
SHIFT Shiftsfaderbankupbyonetrack.
SET SwitchestoGlobalviewandshowsAux,Bus,andOutputObjects(newinplug-
inversion1.20).
Chapter15TascamFW-1884 191
<<LOCATE Goestopreviousmarker.
SET Deletesthecurrentmarker(newinplug-inversion1.20).
LOCATE>> Goestonextmarker.
SET CreatesanewmarkerattheSPL(newinplug-inversion1.2 0).
NUDGEbuttons Nudgetheselectedevent/Regionleftorright(bythecurrentnudgevalue).
SET Choosesthecurrentnudgevalue:tick,format,denominator,bar,frame,1/2
frame.
SET Modifierforotherbuttons.
IN Goestoleftlocator.
SET SetsleftlocatortoSPL.
SHIFT SetsDropInlocatortoSPL.
OUT Goestorightlocator.
SET SetsrightlocatortocurrentSPL.
SHIFT SetsDropOutlocatortoSPL.
REW ShuttleRewindkeycommand.
FFWD ShuttleForwardkeycommand.
STOP Stopsplayback.
PLAY Startsplayback.
REC Recordkeycommand.
Control Assignment
16
193
16 TascamUS-2400
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂMakesurethatyourUS-2400unit(s)areconnectedtothecomputerviaUSB.
ÂEnsurethattheUS-2400isinnativemode.PleaseconsultyourUS-2400manualfor
moreinformationonthis.
ÂLaunchLogicPro7.Yourcontrolsurface(s)willbescannedfor,andinstalled,
automatically.
SpecialNote
TheUS-2400iscapableofrunninginboth“native”andLogicControlemulationmodes.
IftheunitissetupinLogicControlemulationmode,andthenativesupportplug-inis
installedintheLogicPro7programbundle,LogicwilldetectbothaUS-2400native
controlsurfaceandaLogicControlplustwoExtender(XT)units.
IfyouwishtoruntheUS-2400inLogicControlmode,youmayfinditmostconvenient
toremovetheUS-2400plug-infromtheLogicPro7applicationbundle.Logicwillthen
detectaLogicControlplustwoExtender(XT)units(theappropriatesetupfortheUS-
2400inLogicControlemulationmode),whenyouscanyourcontrolsurfaces.
TheLogic/MackieControldiffersinbuttonlayouttotheTascamUS-2400.When
runningtheTascamUS-2400inLogicControlmode,certaincontrollersarenot
accessible(theJoystick,asanexample).Giventheserestrictions,it’snotrecommended
thattheTascamUS-2400isusedinLogicControlmodewithLogic.Ifyouchoosetodo
so,pleaserefertothedocumentationsuppliedwiththeTascamUS-2400fordetails.
194 Chapter16TascamUS-2400
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
ChannelStrips
EncoderDetails
InCHANmode(CHANbuttonon),theencoderscontroltheseparametersonthe
selectedtrack:
Control Assignment
Encoder(s) CHANbuttonon:see“EncoderDetails”onpage194.
CHANbuttonflashing:EncoderscontrolInstrumentparameters,alsosee
“InstrumentEditView”onpage197.
PANbuttonflashing:Encoderscontrolplug-inparameters,alsosee“Plug-in
EditView”onpage197.
Othermodes:Encoderscontrolthemode’sparameters.
F-KEY ÂIfyouareinInstrumentEditview(CHANbuttonflashing),pressingtheF-Key
enterstheInstrumentAssignmentview:Theencodersthenchoosean
instrument.
ÂIfyouareinPlug-inEditview(PANbuttonflashing),pressingtheF-Keyenters
thePlug-inAssignmentview:theencodersthenchooseaplug-in.
ÂIfyouareinSendviews(AUXbuttonLEDflashes)andpresstheF-Key,the
encodersassignthesend’sdestination.
SELbuttons Selecttracks.
SHIFT InPanview:setsvolumetoUnity(0dB)
InSendviews:switchesSendmodepre/post
F-KEY Activates/DeactivatesRecordEnablebuttons.
SOLObutton(s) Enables/DisablesSolo.
MUTEbutton(s) Enables/DisablesMute.
InSendviewswithFlipmodeenabled:activates/deactivatesSendmute.
SHIFT InSendviews:activates/deactivatesSendmute.
Faders Controlvolume.
Control Assignment
Encoder1(AUX1) ControlsSend1level.
Encoder2(AUX2) ControlsSend2level.
Encoder3(AUX3) ControlsSend3level.
Encoder4(AUX4) ControlsSend4level.
Encoder5(AUX5) ControlsSend5level.
Encoder6(AUX6) ControlsSend6level.
Encoder7ControlsSend7level.
Encoder8ControlsSend8level.
Chapter16TascamUS-2400 195
InCHANmode,withtheSHIFTbuttonheld,theencoderscontrolthefollowing
parametersontheselectedtrack:
Encoder11 (GAIN1) ControlstheGainparameterofband3,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder12(FREQ1) ControlstheFrequencyparameterofband3,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder13(Q1) ControlstheQfactorofband3,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinserted.
Encoder14(GAIN2) ControlstheGainparameterofband4,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder15(FREQ2) ControlstheFrequencyparameterofband4,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder16(Q2) ControlstheQfactorofband4,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinserted.
Encoder17(GAIN3) ControlstheGainparameterofband5,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder18(FREQ3) ControlstheFrequencyparameterofband5,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder19(Q3) ControlstheQfactorofband5,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinserted.
Encoder20(GAIN4) ControlstheGainparameterofband6,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder21(FREQ4) ControlstheFrequencyparameterofband5,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder22(Q4) ControlstheQfactorofband5,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinserted.
Encoder24(PAN) ControlsPanning.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
Encoder1(AUX1) ControlsPan/SurroundAngle
Encoder2(AUX2) ControlsSurroundRadius.
Encoder3(AUX3) ControlsSurroundLFE.
Encoder4(AUX4) ControlsSurroundmode.
Encoder5(AUX5) ControlsSurroundX.
Encoder6(AUX6) ControlsSurroundY.
Encoder11 (GAIN1) ControlstheSlopeparameterofband1,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder12(FREQ1) ControlstheFrequencyparameterofband1,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder13(Q1) ControlstheQfactorofband1,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinserted.
Encoder14(GAIN2) ControlstheGainparameterofband2,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder15(FREQ2) ControlstheFrequencyparameterofband2,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
196 Chapter16TascamUS-2400
MasterChannel
EncoderAssignmentSection
Thisisthestandardassignmentofthesebuttons:
Encoder16(Q2) ControlstheQfactorofband2,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinserted.
Encoder17(GAIN3) ControlstheGainparameterofband7,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder18(FREQ3) ControlstheFrequencyparameterofband7,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder19(Q3) ControlstheQfactorofband7,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinserted.
Encoder20(GAIN4) ControlstheSlopeparameterofband8,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQis
inserted.
Encoder21(FREQ4) ControlstheQfactorofband8,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinserted.
Encoder22(Q4) ControlstheQfactorofband8,ifaChannelorLinearPhaseEQisinserted.
Encoder24(PAN) ControlsPanning.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
SEL SelectsMasterOutputtrack(ifMasterOutputObjectexists).
CLRSOLO DisablesSoloforalltracks.
SHIFT DisablesMuteforalltracks.
F-KEY DisablesRecordEnablebuttonforalltracks.
FLIP SwitchesFlipmodebetweenOff(LEDoff)andDuplicate(LEDon).
SHIFT SetsFlipmodetoSwap(LEDflashing).
F-KEY SetsFlipmodetoZero—fadermotorsaredisabled(LEDflashing).
Control Assignment
CHAN SwitchesencoderstoChannelStripview(seeencoders’legend)—CHAN
buttonLEDislit.
F-KEY SwitchesencoderstoInstrumentEditview—CHANbuttonLEDflashes.See
“InstrumentEditView”onpage197fordetails.
PAN SwitchesencoderstoMultiChannelviewofpanning—PANbuttonLEDislit.
F-KEY SwitchesencoderstoPlug-inEditview—PANbuttonLEDflashes.See“Plug-in
EditView”onpage197fordetails.
AUX1SwitchesencoderstoMultiChannelviewofSend1level.
F-KEY Switches display of Arrange window:
ÂIfArrangewindowisopen,itwillbeclosed.
ÂIfArrangewindowisclosed,itwillbeopened.
AUX2SwitchesencoderstoMultiChannelviewofSend2level.
Chapter16TascamUS-2400 197
InstrumentEditView
InInstrumentEditview,thefollowingAUXbuttonshavespecialassignments:
TheAUXbuttonLEDsshowthecurrentlyselectedparameterbank.AUX2LEDisonif
parameters25–48areshownontheencoders.
Plug-inEditView
InPlug-inEditview,thefollowingAUXbuttonshavespecialassignments:
TheAUXbuttonLEDsshowthecurrentlyselectedInsertslot.Asanexample:AUX2
LEDisonifInsertslot2isbeingedited.
F-KEY Switches display of Event List:
ÂIfEventListisopen,itwillbeclosed.
ÂIfEventListisclosed,itwillbeopened.
AUX3SwitchesencoderstoMultiChannelviewofSend3level.
F-KEY Switches display of Score Editor:
ÂIfScoreEditorisopen,itwillbeclosed.
ÂIfScoreEditorisclosed,itwillbeopened.
AUX4SwitchesencoderstoMultiChannelviewofSend4level.
F-KEY Switches display of Audio window:
ÂIfAudiowindowisopen,itwillbeclosed.
ÂIfAudiowindowisclosed,itwillbeopened.
AUX5SwitchesencoderstoMultiChannelviewofSend5level.
F-KEY Switches display of Hyper Editor:
ÂIfHyperEditorisopen,itwillbeclosed.
ÂIfHyperEditorisclosed,itwillbeopened.
AUX6SwitchesencoderstoMultiChannelviewofSend6level.
F-KEY Switches display of Matrix Editor:
ÂIfMatrixEditorisopen,itwillbeclosed.
ÂIfMatrixEditorisclosed,itwillbeopened.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
AUX1 Scrollsparameterfaderbankleftby24parameters.
AUX2 Scrollsparameterfaderbankrightby24parameters.
AUX4Enables/DisablesBypassbuttonofthecurrentlyeditedInstrument.
Control Assignment
AUX1 Scrollsparameterfaderbankleftby24parameters.
AUX2 Scrollsparameterfaderbankrightby24parameters.
AUX3 IncrementsInsertslot.
AUX4Enables/DisablesBypassbuttonofthecurrentlyeditedplug-in.
AUX6DecrementsInsertslot.
198 Chapter16TascamUS-2400
MasterSection
Control Assignment
MTR SwitchesencoderLEDringsbetweenvaluecontrolledbyencoder(LEDoff),
andlevelandpeakholdmeters(LEDon).InLevelMetermode,theLEDbelow
theencoderdisplayssignaloverloads(clipping).
F-KEY Modifierkey,usedtoswitchthefunctionofothercontrols(seeright-aligned“F-
KEY”inleftcolumn).
NULL SetsSurroundx/yorPanningofselectedtracktocenterposition—LEDisonif
SurroundX(orPanning)iscentered.
F-KEY Resetsoverloadforlevelmeters.
JogWheel SCRUBoff:movesSPLbybars.
SCRUBon:audioscrubbing.
SCRUBflashing:Shuttlemode.
Joystick EditsSurroundx/yorPanningofselectedtrack.
SCRUB SwitchesJogWheelbetween“MoveSPLbyBars”(LEDoff)andaudioscrubbing
(LEDon).
F-KEY SetsJogWheeltoShuttlemode(LEDflashes).
BANK–Shiftsfaderbankleftbyonebank—LEDislitiftheleft-mostfaderbankhasnot
beenreached.
F-KEY Shiftsfaderbankleftbyonetrack.
BANK+Shiftsfaderbankrightbyonebank—LEDislitiftheright-mostfaderbankhas
notbeenreached.
F-KEY Shiftsfaderbankrightbyonetrack.
INSetsDropInlocatortoSongPositionLine.
SHIFT NavigatestoleftCyclelocator.
F-KEY SetsleftCyclelocatortoSongPositionLine.
OUT SetsDropOutlocatortoSongPositionLine.
SHIFT NavigatestorightCyclelocator.
F-KEY SetsrightCyclelocatortoSongPositionLine.
SHIFT Modifierkey,usedtoswitchthefunctionofothercontrols(seeright-aligned
“SHIFT”inleftcolumn).
REW Shuttlesbackward.
SHIFT IdenticaltoLeftArrowkeyoncomputerkeyboard.
FFWD Shuttlesforward.
SHIFT IdenticaltoRightArrowkeyoncomputerkeyboard.
STOP Stopsplayback.
SHIFT IdenticaltoDownArrowkeyoncomputerkeyboard.
PLAY Startsplayback.
SHIFT IdenticaltoUpArrowkeyoncomputerkeyboard.
RECORD Enables/DisablesRecord.
17
199
17 TascamUS-428andUS-224
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂEnsurethatyourUS-428/224unit(s)areconnectedtothecomputerviaUSB.
ÂLaunchLogic,andtheunit(s)willbescannedfor,andinstalled,automatically.
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasNULL)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
Note:TheUS-224hasonlyfourchannelstrips,andtheEQsection,aswellastheMaster
section(excepttheNULLbuttonanddatawheel)arenotavailable.
ChannelStrips
Control Assignment
MUTE1to8 SOLOLEDoff:SwitchesMuteon/off;LEDdisplaysMutestatus.
SOLOLEDon:SwitchesSoloon/off;LEDdisplaysSolostatus.
REC1to8LEDs DisplaysRecordReadystatus.
NULL Oniffaderishigherthanactualvolume.
SELECT1to8LEDs Displaysselectstatus.
NULL Oniffaderislowerthanactualvolume.
SELECT1to8buttons Selectstrack.
REC Enables/DisablesRecordReadystatus.
Fader1to8ControlsVolume.
NULL Allowsyoutoupdatethefaderpositiontomatchtheactualvolume.
Masterfader Controlsmastervolume(Outputs1and2ifnoMasterFaderObjectisavailable
intheEnvironment).
200 Chapter17TascamUS-428andUS-224
EQSection
MasterSectionControls
Control Assignment
Gain ControlsgainofcurrentlyselectedEQofchosentrack.
Freq ControlsfrequencyofcurrentlyselectedEQofchosentrack.
QControlsQfactorofcurrentlyselectedEQofchosentrack.
HIGH SelectsEQband3forGain,Freq,andQcontrols.
ASGN SwitchesEQband3bypassstate.
HI-MID SelectsEQband4forGain,Freq,andQcontrols.
ASGN SwitchesEQband4bypassstate.
LO-MID SelectsEQband5forGain,Freq,andQcontrols.
ASGN SwitchesEQband5bypassstate.
LOWSelectsEQband6forGain,Freq,andQcontrols.
ASGN SwitchesEQband6bypassstate.
Control Assignment
AUX1SwitchesdatawheelbetweenTransport/ScrubmodeandSendLevel1.
ASGN SwitchesSend1Mutestate.
AUX2SwitchesdatawheelbetweenTransport/ScrubmodeandSendLevel2.
ASGN SwitchesSend2Mutestate.
AUX3SwitchesdatawheelbetweenTransport/ScrubmodeandSendLevel3.
ASGN SwitchesSend3Mutestate.
AUX4SwitchesdatawheelbetweenTransport/ScrubmodeandSendLevel4.
ASGN SwitchesSend4Mutestate.
ASGN ModifierforfunctionofEQcontrols,AUX1to4buttons,PANknobanddata
wheel.
F1 Enables/DisablesCyclemode.
F2 Enables/DisablesDropmode.
F3 Enables/DisablesScrubmode.
PAN Controlspanningofselectedtrack.
ASGN Selectscurrenttrack’sinput.
NULL ModifierforNULLmode.NULLmodeallowsyoutoupdatethefaderpositions
tomatchtheactualvolume.
Chapter17TascamUS-428andUS-224 201
LOCATESection
BANKSection
TransportSection
Datawheel AUX1LEDon:ControlsSend1Levelofselectedtrack.
AUX2LEDon:ControlsSend2Levelofselectedtrack.
AUX3LEDon:ControlsSend3Levelofselectedtrack.
AUX4LEDon:ControlsSend4Levelofselectedtrack.
F3LEDon:DatawheelisinScrubmode.
Noneoftheaboveislit:DatawheelisinTransportmodeandmovestheSPL
bybars.
ASGN Selectscurrenttrack’soutput.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
<<LOCATEGoestopreviousmarker.
LOCATE>> Goestonextmarker.
SET CreatesanewmarkeratthecurrentSPL.
Control Assignment
<BANK Shiftsfaderbankleftbyonebank.TheLEDislitiftheleft-mostfaderbankhas
notbeenreached.
BANK>Shiftsfaderbankrightbyonebank.TheLEDislitiftheright-mostfaderbank
hasnotbeenreached.
Control Assignment
REW Shuttlesbackward.
FFWD Shuttlesforward.
STOP Stopsplayback.
PLAY Startsplayback.
RECORD Record
18
203
18 Yamaha01V96
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂMakesurethatyour01V96unit(s)areconnectedtothecomputerviaUSB.
ÂMakesurethattheMIDIdrivershippedwiththeunitisinstalled.
Basically,yousetupthe01V96asifyouareusingitwithProTools.Seethe01V96user
manual.
Herearethenecessarysteps:
1PressDISPLAYACCESS[SETUP]repeatedlyuntiltheSetup/MIDI/Hostpageisvisible.
2Movethecursortotheportparameters:selectDAW,thenselectUSBand1-2.
3PressDISPLAYACCESS[REMOTE].
4ChooseGeneralDAWastheTARGETparameter.
5PressLAYER[REMOTE].
TheunitisinstalledautomaticallywhenLogicProislaunched.Youshouldseetwo
01V96(USB1–2)iconsinthesetupwindow,alignedhorizontally.
204 Chapter18Yamaha01V96
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
DISPLAYACCESSSection
FADERMODESection
Control Assignment
DISPLAY Hides/showstheSampleEditor.
AUTOMIX Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowtheautomationmodeofthe
selectedtracks.
PAIR/GROUP Enters Group Edit mode:
ÂTheupperlineintheDSPeditsectiondisplaysthecurrentlyeditedgroup
numberandname.
ÂParametercontrolpush-switchbuttons1to4switchthepropertiesofthe
currentlyeditedgroup.Groupnameisshowninthelowerline.
ÂWhenINSERT/PARAMisoff,DSPEditScrollencoderscrollsthroughthegroup
properties.Atothertimes,itselectsthegroupcurrentlybeingedited.
ÂTheSELECTbuttonsswitchgroupmembershipofthetrack.
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoTrackView.
EFFECT Hides/showstheSampleEditor.
Control Assignment
AUX1AssignsSend1Leveltoencoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPencoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend1Destination
assignment.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Asabove,forSend6.
AUX2AssignsSend2Leveltoencoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPencoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend2Destination
assignment.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Asabove,forSend7.
AUX3AssignsSend3Leveltoencoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPencoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend3Destination
assignment.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Asabove,forSend8.
AUX4AssignsSend4Leveltoencoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPencoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend4Destination
assignment.
AUX5AssignsSend5Leveltoencoders,andSend5to8LevelstoDSPencoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend5Destination
assignment.
AUX6SwitchesEncoderPush-Switchbuttonsbetweennormalbehaviorandsetting
defaultvalue.
Chapter18Yamaha01V96 205
LCDFunction
LCD
TheLCDdisplaysdifferentdata,dependingonthepageselectedwiththeF2,F3,and
F4buttons:
InsertDisplayMode
Pressthe[F2]buttontoselectInsertDisplaymode.Inthismode,theLCDdisplays
parameterdetailsandyoucaneditandselectplug-ins.
AUX7AssignsPantoencoders;assignsselectedtrack’span/surroundparametersto
DSPencoders.
AUX8Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons when channel strip AUTO button
is off:
ÂIndicatoroff:Trackselection.
ÂIndicatoron:Insertselection.
HOME Enables/DisablesFlipmode.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
Left/Rightbuttons Plug-inEditmode:Shiftsparameterdisplaybythenumberofpa rameters
showninthecontrolsurfacegroup(usuallyfour).
DAWALT/FINE Plug-inEditmode:Shiftsparameterdisplaybyone.
F1 ClearsOverloadLEDs.
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesMIDItracks.
DAWALT/FINE Opens/ClosesArrangewindow.
Display Assignment
TIMECODEoption Activeifcounterisdisplayingtimecode.
FEET Notassigned.
BEATSoption Activeifcounterisdisplayingbars/beats/format/ticks.
Timedisplay Displaystimecodeorbars/beats/format/ticks.
SELECTASSIGN Displaystheencoderassignmentasfollows:
Pan,Snd1toSnd8,S1AstoS8As,In,Out.
ASSIGN —
COMPARE SwitchesDSPdisplaybetween“trackname/parametername”and“parameter
name/parametervalue”modes.
BYPASS Switchesbypassstatusofplug-ininsertcurrentlybeingedited.
INSERT/PARAM SwitchesbetweenPlug-inAssignandPlug-inEditmodes.
206 Chapter18Yamaha01V96
LCDChannelPage
SelectedChannelSection
Parametercontrol
1to4push-switch
Assignment Pan:
ÂParametercontrol1push-switchcentersPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂParametercontrol2push-switchcentersSurroundDiversity.
ÂParametercontrol3push-switchcentersSurroundLFE.
ÂParametercontrol4push-switchsetsSurroundModetocenter.
Assignment Send:
ÂEnables/DisablesSends1to4orMutes5to8.
Plug-in Assign:
ÂConfirmsinsert1to4or5to8plug-inselection,selectsthisinsertslotand
entersPlug-inEditmode.
Plug-In Edit mode:
ÂSetsvaluetodefault,orbi-polarswitchtoon/off.
Parametercontrols Assignment Pan:
ÂParametercontrol1controlsPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂParametercontrol2controlsSurroundDiversity.
ÂParametercontrol3controlsSurroundLFE.
ÂParametercontrol4controlsSurroundMode.
Assignment Send:
ÂControlSend1to4or5to8Level.
Plug-in Assign:
ÂAssignsinsert1to4or5to8.
Plug-in Edit mode:
ÂSetsvaluetodefault.
Display Assignment
Control Assignment
Encoder AdjustsparameterselectedintheFADERMODEsection.
EncoderSwitch Panselected:SetsPantocenterifMATRIX1ison.
Send1to8selected:EditsSendPre/Post,enables/disablesSendMuteorsets
SendLeveltodefaultvalue.
AssignmentSend,Input,orOutput:Confirmsselection.
Control Assignment
Pancontrols AdjustsparameterselectedintheFADERMODEsection.
SEL SwitcheschannelstripSELbuttonsbetweentrackandinsertselection.
Chapter18Yamaha01V96 207
DataEntrySection
ChannelStrips
StereoChannelStrip
Control Assignment
ParameterWheel Default:MoveSPLbyonebar.
Scrub:Scrubbing.
Shuttle:Shuttlemode.
–(DEC) Default:ExitsFolder.
GotoMarker:Cancelsdialog.
DAWALT/FINE Opens/ClosesAudiowindow.
+(INC) Entersfolderofselectedtrack.
Control Assignment
LevelMeters Displaymomentaryandpeaklevel.
SELIf AUTO off:
ÂFADERMODE[AUX8]off:Selectstrack.
ÂFADERMODE[AUX8]on:Selectstrackforinsertassignment.
If AUTO on:
ÂCyclesthroughautomationmodes.Withanautomationmodebuttonheld
down,setsthisautomationmode.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Setsvolumetounitylevel.
MATRIXSELECT1Setsvolumetounitylevel.
SOLO Enables/DisablesSolo.
DAWOPTION/ALL DisablesSoloforalltracks.
ON Enables/DisablesMute.
DAWOPTION/ALL Unmutesalltracks.
Fader Adjustsvolume,orduplicatesencoderinFlipmode.
Control Assignment
SEL Switcheschannelstrips’SELbuttonsbetweentrackandinsertselection.
208 Chapter18Yamaha01V96
UserDefinedKeysSection
Thesekeyscanbeassignedtothefollowingfunctions:
Control Assignment
DAWWINSTATUS Opens/ClosestheAudiowindow.
DAWREC/RDY1to16 Enables/DisablesRecordReady.
DAWWINTRANSPORT Opens/ClosestheTransportwindow.
DAWBANK– Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheleft.
DAWBANK+ Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheright.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Shiftstosecondmeaningofsomebuttons.Seedescriptionsofother
buttons.
DAWOPTION/ALL Whilehelddown,valuechangemodeissetto“relative”:relativevalue
changesresultinaminimum,default,ormaximumvaluefortheedited
parameter.Alsoseedescriptionofotherbuttons.
DAWGROUPSTATUS Enters Group Edit mode:
ÂTheupperlineintheDSPeditsectiondisplaysthecurrentlyeditedgroup
numberandname.
ÂParametercontrolpush-switchbuttons1to4switchbetweenproperties
ofthecurrentlyeditedgroup.Groupnameisshowninthelowerline.
ÂWhenINSERT/PARAMisoff,DSPEditScrollEncoderscrollsthroughthe
groupproperties.Atothertimes,itselectsthegroupcurrentlybeing
edited.
ÂTheSELECTbuttonsenable/disablegroupmembershipofthetrack.
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoTrackView.
DAWSUSPEND Enables/DisablestheGroupClutch.
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoExtendedTrackView.
DAWCREATEGROUP CreatesanewgroupandentersGroupEditmode(seeabove).
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalView.
DAWWINMIX/EDIT SwitchesbetweentheArrangeandTrackMixerwindows.
DAWCHANNEL–Shiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheleft.
DAWCHANNEL+ Shiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheright.
DAWCTRL/CLUTCH Whilehelddown,theGroupClutchisengaged(allgroupsaredisabled).
DAWALT/FINE Whilehelddown,valuechangemodeissetto“fine”:relativevalue
changesworkatmaximumresolution.Alsoseedescriptionofother
buttons.
DAWMONISTATUS —
DAWUNDO PerformsUndo.
DAWSHIFT/ADD PerformsRedo.
DAWOPTION/ALL OpensUndoHistorywindow.
DAWSAVE Savesthesong.
DAWWINMEM-LOC Opens/ClosestheMarkerList.
Chapter18Yamaha01V96 209
DAWOPTION/ALL PerformsSaveAsandallowssavingthesongunderadifferentname.
DAWEDITTOOL Selectsthenexttool.Whileheld,numericalbuttonsselectaspecifictool.
DAWWININSERT Opens/ClosestheSampleEditor.
DAWREC/RDYALL DisableRecordReadyonalltracks.
DAWSCRUB Enables/DisablesScrubmode.
DAWSHUTTLE Enables/DisablesShuttlemode.
DAWREW Shuttlesbackward.
DAWFF Shuttlesforward.
DAWSTOP Stop
DAWPLAY Play
DAWSHIFT/ADD Pause
DAWREC Record
DAWPRE Setsleftlocator.
DAWIN SetsDropInlocator.
DAWOUT SetsDropOutlocator.
DAWPOST Setsrightlocator.
DAWRTZ Goestotheleftlocator.
DAWEND Goestotherightlocator.
DAWONLINE Enables/Disablesinternal/externalsync.
DAWQUICKPUNCH Enables/DisablesDropmode.
DAWAUTOFADER Enables/DisablesVolumeautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOPANEnables/DisablesPanautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOPLUGIN Enables/DisablesPlug-inparameterautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOMUTE Enables/DisablesMuteautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOSEND Enables/DisablesSendLevelautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOSENDMUTE —
DAWAUTOWRITE SetsselectedtracktoWriteautomationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoWrite.
DAWOPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoWriteautomationmode.
DAWAUTOTOUCH SetsselectedtracktoTouchautomationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoTouch.
DAWOPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoTouchautomationmode.
DAWAUTOLATCH SetsselectedtracktoLatchautomationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoLatch.
DAWOPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoLatchautomationmode.
DAWAUTOREAD SetsselectedtracktoReadautomationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoRead.
Control Assignment
210 Chapter18Yamaha01V96
DAWOPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoReadautomationmode.
DAWAUTOTRIM —
DAWAUTOOFF SetsselectedtracktoOffautomationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodetoOff.
DAWOPTION/ALL SetsalltrackstoOffautomationmode.
DAWAUTOSTATUS Whilehelddown,theChannelStripdisplaysshowtheautomationmodeof
theselectedtrack.
Control Assignment
19
211
19 Yamaha02R96
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂMakesurethatyour02R96unit(s)areconnectedtothecomputerviaUSB.
ÂMakesurethattheMIDIdrivershippedwiththeunitisinstalled.
Onthe02R96FrontPanel:
Basically,yousetupthe02R96asifyouareusingitwithProTools.Seethe02R96user
manual.Herearethenecessarysteps:
ÂPressDISPLAYACCESS[SETUP]repeatedlyuntiltheSetup/MIDI/Hostpageisvisible.
Nowmovethecursortotheportparameters:selectDAW,thenselectUSBand1-3.
ÂPressDISPLAYACCESS[REMOTE].ChooseGeneralDAWastheTARGETparameter.
ÂPressLAYER[REMOTE].
InLogic:
TheunitisinstalledautomaticallywhenLogicProislaunched.Youshouldseethree
02R96(USB1-3)iconsinthesetupwindow,alignedhorizontally.
212 Chapter19Yamaha02R96
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
DISPLAYACCESSSection
AUXSELECTSection
ENCODERMODESection
FADERMODESection
Control Assignment
METER ClearsOverloadLEDs.
Control Assignment
AUX1AssignsSend1LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend1destinationassignment.
AUX2AssignsSend2LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend2destinationassignment.
AUX3AssignsSend3LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend3destinationassignment.
AUX4AssignsSend4LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend4destinationassignment.
AUX5AssignsSend5LeveltoEncoders,andSend5to8LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend5destinationassignment.
Control Assignment
PANAssignsPantoEncoders;assignsselectedtrack’span/surroundparameterstoDSP
Encoders.
AUXAssignsSend1LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend1destinationassignment.
Control Assignment
FADER Enables/DisablesFlipmode.
AUX/MTRX Enables/DisablesFlipmode.
Chapter19Yamaha02R96 213
EFFECTS/PLUG-INSSection
Control Assignment
Display Opens/ClosestheSampleEditorwindow.
PLUG-INS SwitchesEncoderPush-Switchbuttonsbetweennormalbehaviorandsettingdefault
value.
CHANNEL
INSERTS
Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons:
ÂIndicatoroff:trackselection.
ÂIndicatoron:Insertselection.
1—
2SwitchesDSPdisplaybetween“trackname/parametername”and“parametername/
parametervalue”modes.
3Switchesbypassstatusofcurrentlyeditedplug-ininsert.
4SwitchesbetweenPlug-inAssignandPlug-inEditmodes.
ParameterUp
&Parameter
Down
Plug-InEdit:shiftsparameterdisplaybythenumberofpa rametersshowninthe
controlsurfacegroup(usuallyfour).
Parameter
control1–4
push-switch
Assignment Pan:
ÂParametercontrol1push-switchcentersPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂParametercontrol2push-switchcentersSurroundDiversity.
ÂParametercontrol3push-switchcentersSurroundLFE.
ÂParametercontrol4push-switchsetsSurroundModetocenter.
Assignment Send:
ÂEnables/DisablesSends1to4orMutes5to8.
Plug-In Assign:
ÂConfirminsert1to4or5to8plug-inselection,selectsthisinsertslotandenters
Plug-InEditmode.
Plug-In Edit mode:
ÂSetsvaluetodefault,orsetsbi-polarswitchtoon/off.
Parameter
controls
Assignment Pan:
ÂParametercontrol1controlsPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂParametercontrol2controlsSurroundDiversity.
ÂParametercontrol3controlsSurroundLFE.
ÂParametercontrol4controlsSurroundMode.
Assignment Send:
ÂControlSend1to4or5to8Level.
Plug-In Assign:
ÂAssignsinsert1to4or5to8.
Plug-In Edit mode:
ÂSetsvaluetodefault.
214 Chapter19Yamaha02R96
LCD
TheLCDdisplaysdifferentdata,dependingonthepageselectedwiththeF2,F3,and
F4buttons:
ÂINSERTASSIGN/EDITDisplayMode:parameterdetails,plug-inselectionorplug-in
parameters.Press[F2]toselectthismode.
ÂChannelDisplayMode:EncodervaluesandChannelStripdisplay).Press[F3]to
selectthismode.
Âlevelmeters.Press[F4]toselectthismode.
USERDEFINEDKEYSSection
Display Assignment
TIMECODE Activeifcounterisdisplayingtimecode.
FEET Notassigned.
BEATS Activeifcounterisdisplayingbars/beats/format/ticks.
Timedisplay Displaystimecodeorbars/beats/format/ticks.
SELECTASSIGN DisplaystheEncoderassignmentasfollows:
Pan,Snd1toSnd8,S1AstoS8As,In,Out.
Control Assignment
DISPLAY Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowtheautomationmodeoftheselected
tracks.
1SwitchesbetweentheArrangeandTrackMixerwindows.
2Enables/DisablestheGroupClutch.
3Setsselectedtrackto“Write”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Write.”
4Setsselectedtrackto“Touch”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Touch.”
5Setsselectedtrackto“Latch”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Latch.”
6Setsselectedtrackto“Read”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Read.”
7—
8Setsselectedtrackto“Off”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStripAUTO
buttonssetautomationmodeto“Off.”
9Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheleft.
10 Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheright.
11 Enables/DisablesVolumeautomationplaybackandrecording.
12 Enables/DisablesMuteautomationplaybackandrecording.
13 Enables/DisablesPanautomationplaybackandrecording.
14 Enables/DisablesSendLevelautomationplaybackandrecording.
Chapter19Yamaha02R96 215
ChannelStrips
MACHINECONTROLSection
DataEntrySection
15 —
16 Enables/DisablesPlug-inparameterautomationplaybackandrecording.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
Encoder AdjustsparameterselectedintheAUXSELECTsection.
EncoderPush-
Switch
Panselected:setsPantocenter.
IfEFFECTS/PLUG-INS[PLUG-INS]onSends1to8selected:editsSendPre/Post,
switchesSendMutestatusorsetsSendLeveltodefaultvalue.
SendAssign,Input,orOutput:confirmsselection.
AUTO Cyclesthroughautomationmodes.
Withanautomationmodebuttonhelddown,setsthisautomationmode.
SELIfEFFECTS/PLUG-INS[CHANNELINSERTS]off:selectstrack.
IfEFFECTS/PLUG-INS[CHANNELINSERTS]on:choosestrackforplug-inselection/
insertion.
SOLO Enables/DisablesSolo.
ON Enables/DisablesMute.
Fader Adjustsvolume,orduplicatesEncoderinFlipmode.
Control Assignment
DISPLAY Opens/ClosestheMarkerListwindow.
1to8Recallsmarkers1to8.
REW Shuttlesbackward.
FF Shuttlesforward.
STOP Stop
PLAY Play
REC Record
Control Assignment
SCRUB Enables/DisablesScrubmode.
SHUTTLE Enables/DisablesShuttlemode.
Parameter
Wheel
Default:moveSPLbyonebar.
Scrub:scrubbing.
Shuttle:Shuttlemode.
ENTER Entersfolderofselectedtrack.
DEC ExitsFolder.
216 Chapter19Yamaha02R96
INC SwitchesbetweenCursorandZoommodes.
CursorUp Cursormode:equivalenttocomputerkeyboarduparrowkey.
Zoommode:zoomsoutvertically.
CursorDown Cursormode:equivalenttocomputerkeyboarddownarrowkey.
Zoommode:zoomsoutvertically.
CursorLeft Cursormode:equivalenttocomputerkeyboardleftarrowkey.
Zoommode:zoomsouthorizontally.
CursorRight Cursormode:equivalenttocomputerkeyboardrightarrowkey.
Zoommode:zoomsinhorizontally.
Control Assignment
20
217
20 YamahaDM1000
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂMakesurethatyourDM1000unit(s)areconnectedtothecomputerviaUSB.
ÂMakesurethattheMIDIdrivershippedwiththeunitisinstalled.
OntheDM1000FrontPanel:
Basically,yousetuptheDM1000asifyouareusingitwithProTools.SeetheDM1000
usermanual,section17.Herearethenecessarysteps:
ÂPressDISPLAYACCESS[SETUP]repeatedlyuntiltheSetup/MIDI/Hostpageisvisible.
Nowmovethecursortotheportparameters:selectDAW,thenselectUSBand1-2.
ÂPressDISPLAYACCESS[REMOTE],then[F1](belowtheLCD).ChooseGeneralDAWasthe
TARGETparameter.
ÂPressLAYER[REMOTE1].
InLogic:
WhenLogicProislaunched,theunitisinstalledautomatically.Youshouldseetwo
DM1000(USB1-2)iconsintheSetupwindow,alignedhorizontally.
218 Chapter20YamahaDM1000
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
DISPLAYACCESSSection
AUXSELECTSection
Control Assignment
DISPLAY Opens/ClosestheSampleEditorwindow.
AUTOMIX Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowtheautomationmodeofthe
selectedtrack.
PAIR/GROUP EntersGroupEditmode:
ÂTheupperlineintheDSPeditsectiondisplaysthecurrentlyeditedgroup
numberandname.
ÂParametercontrolpush-switchbuttons1to4switchbetweenproperties
ofthecurrentlyeditedgroup(nameshowninlowerlineofLCD).
ÂWhenINSERT/PARAMisoff,DSPEditScrollEncoderscrollsthroughthe
groupproperties.Otherwise,itselectsthecurrentlyeditedgroup.
ÂTheSELECTbuttonsenable/disablegroupmembershipofthetrack.
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoTrackView.
METER ClearsOverloadLEDs.
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesMIDITracks.
DAWALT/FINE Opens/ClosesArrangewindow.
EFFECT Opens/ClosestheSampleEditorwindow.
Control Assignment
AUX1AssignsSend1LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.
Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend1destination
assignment.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Asabove,forSend6.
AUX2AssignsSend2LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.
Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend2destination
assignment.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Asabove,forSend7.
AUX3AssignsSend3LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.
Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend3destination
assignment.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Asabove,forSend8.
AUX4AssignsSend4LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.
Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend4destination
assignment.
AUX5AssignsSend5LeveltoEncoders,andSend5to8LevelstoDSPEncoders.
Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend5destination
assignment.
Chapter20YamahaDM1000 219
ENCODERMODESection
FADERMODESection
LCDFunction
LCD
TheLCDdisplaysdifferentdata,dependingonthepageselectedwiththeF2,F3,and
F4buttons:
ÂINSERTASSIGN/EDITDisplayMode:parameterdetails,plug-inselectionorplug-in
parameters.Press[F2]toselectthismode.
AUX6SwitchesEncoderPush-Switchbuttonsbetweennormalbehaviorand
settingdefaultvalue.
AUX8DeterminesmodeofchannelstripSELbuttonswhenchannelstripAUTO
buttonisoff:
ÂIndicatoroff:trackselection.
ÂIndicatoron:Insertselection.
Control Assignment
Control Assignment
PANAssignsPantoEncoders;assignsselectedtrack’span/surroundparameters
toDSPEncoders.
AUXAssignsSend1LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.
Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend1destination
assignment.
Control Assignment
FADERMODE Enables/DisablesFlipmode.
Control Assignment
Left&Right Plug-InEdit:shiftsparameterdisplaybythenumberofParametercontrols
inthecontrolsurfacegroup(usuallyfour).
DAWALT/FINE Plug-InEdit:shiftsparameterdisplaybyone(parameter).
Display Assignment
LCD Displaysparameterdetails,plug-inselectionorplug-inparameters.
TIMECODE Activeifcounterisdisplayingtimecode.
FEET Notassigned.
BEATS Activeifcounterisdisplayingbars/beats/format/ticks.
Timedisplay Displaystimecodeorbars/beats/format/ticks.
SELECTASSIGN DisplaystheEncoderassignmentasfollows:
Pan,Snd1toSnd8,S1AstoS8As,In,Out.
220 Chapter20YamahaDM1000
LCDInsertPage
DataEntrySection
Control Assignment
ASSIGN —
COMPARE SwitchesDSPdisplaybetween“trackname/parametername”and
“parametername/parametervalue”modes.
BYPASS Activates/Deactivatesbypassofplug-ininsertcurrentlybeingedited.
INSERT/PARAM SwitchesbetweenPlug-inAssignandPlug-inEditmodes.
Parametercontrol1–4
push-switch
AssignmentPan:
ÂParametercontrol1push-switchcentersPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂParametercontrol2push-switchcentersSurroundDiversity.
ÂParametercontrol3push-switchcentersSurroundLFE.
ÂParametercontrol4push-switchsetsSurroundModetocenter.
AssignmentSend:
ÂEnables/DisablesSends1to4orMutes5to8.
Plug-InAssign:
ÂConfirminsert1to4or5to8plug-inselection,selectsthisinsertslotand
entersPlug-InEditmode.
Plug-InEditmode:
ÂSetsvaluetodefault,orsetsbi-polarswitchon/off.
Parametercontrols AssignmentPan:
ÂParametercontrol1controlsPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂParametercontrol2controlsSurroundDiversity.
ÂParametercontrol3controlsSurroundLFE.
ÂParametercontrol4controlsSurroundMode.
AssignmentSend:
ÂControlSend1to4or5to8Level.
Plug-InAssign:
ÂAssignsinsert1to4or5to8.
Plug-InEditmode:
ÂSetsvaluetodefault.
Control Assignment
ParameterWheel Default:moveSPLbyonebar.
Scrub:scrubbing.
Shuttle:Shuttlemode.
–(DEC) Default:leavesFolder.
GotoMarker:cancelsdialog.
DAWALT/FINE Opens/ClosesAudiowindow.
+(INC) Entersfolderofselectedtrack.
Chapter20YamahaDM1000 221
ChannelStrips
StereoChannelStrip
USERDEFINEDKEYSSection
Thesekeyscanbeassignedtothefollowingfunctions:
Control Assignment
LevelMeters Displaymomentaryandpeaklevel.
Encoder AdjustsparameterselectedintheAUXSELECTsection.
EncoderPush-Switch Panselected:setsPantocenterifMATRIX1on.
Send1to8selected:editsSendPre/Post,activates/deactivatesSendMute
orsetsSendLeveltodefaultvalue.
SendAssign,Input,orOutput:confirmsselection.
SELIfAUTOoff:
ÂAUX[AUX8]off:selectstrack.
ÂAUX[AUX8]on:selectstrackforinsertassignment.
IfAUTOon:
ÂCyclesthroughautomationmodes.Withanautomationmodebuttonheld
down,setsthisautomationmode.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Setsvolumetounitylevel.
MATRIXSELECT1Setsvolumetounitylevel.
SOLO Enables/DisablesSolo.
DAWOPTION/ALL DisablesSoloforalltracks.
ON Enables/DisablesMute.
DAWOPTION/ALL Unmutesalltracks.
Fader Adjustsvolume,orduplicatesEncoderassignmentinFlipmode.
Control Assignment
AUTO Switcheschannelstrips’SELbuttonsbetweentrackandinsertselection.
Control Assignment
DAWWINSTATUS Opens/ClosestheAudiowindow.
DAWREC/RDY1to16 Enables/DisablesRecordReady.
DAWWINTRANSPORT Opens/ClosestheTransportwindow.
DAWBANK- Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheleft.
DAWBANK+ Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheright.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Shiftstosecondmeaningofsomebuttons.
DAWOPTION/ALL Whilehelddown,valuechangemodeissetto“relative”:relativevalue
changesresultinaminimum,default,ormaximumvaluefortheedited
parameter.Alsoseedescriptionofotherbuttons.
222 Chapter20YamahaDM1000
DAWGROUPSTATUS EntersGroupEditmode:
ÂTheupperlineintheDSPeditsectiondisplaysthecurrentlyeditedgroup
numberandname.
ÂParametercontrolpush-switchbuttons1to4switchbetweenproperties
ofthecurrentlyeditedgroup.GroupnameshowninlowerlineofLCD.
ÂWhenINSERT/PARAMisoff,DSPEditScrollEncoderscrollsthroughthe
groupproperties.Atothertimes,itselectsthegroupcurrentlybeing
edited.
ÂTheSELECTbuttonsenable/disablegroupmembershipofthetrack.
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoTrackView.
DAWSUSPEND Enables/DisablestheGroupClutch.
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoExtendedTrackView.
DAWCREATEGROUP CreatesanewgroupandentersGroupEditmode(seeabove).
DAWSHIFT/ADD SwitchestoGlobalView.
DAWWINMIX/EDIT SwitchesbetweentheArrangeandTrackMixerwindows.
DAWCHANNEL-Shiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheleft.
DAWCHANNEL+ Shiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheright.
DAWCTRL/CLUTCH Whilehelddown,theGroupClutchisengaged(allgroupsaredisabled).
DAWALT/FINE Whilehelddown,valuechangemodeissetto“fine”:relativevaluechanges
workatmaximumresolution.Alsoseedescriptionofotherbuttons.
DAWMONISTATUS —
DAWUNDO Performsundo.
DAWSHIFT/ADD Performsredo.
DAWOPTION/ALL Opensundohistorywindow.
DAWSAVE Savesthesong.
DAWWINMEM-LOC Opens/ClosestheMarkerListwindow.
DAWOPTION/ALL SaveAs…:savesthesongunderadifferentname.
DAWEDITTOOL Selectsthenexttool.Whileheld,numericalbuttonsselectaspecifictool.
DAWWININSERT Opens/ClosestheSampleEditorwindow.
DAWREC/RDYALL DisableRecordReadyonalltracks.
DAWSCRUB Enables/DisablesScrubmode.
DAWSHUTTLE Enables/DisablesShuttlemode.
DAWREW Shuttlesbackward.
DAWFF Shuttlesforward.
DAWSTOP Stop
DAWPLAY Play
DAWSHIFT/ADD Pause
DAWREC Record
DAWPRE Setsleftlocator.
Control Assignment
Chapter20YamahaDM1000 223
DAWIN SetsDropInlocator.
DAWOUT SetsDropOutlocator.
DAWPOST Setsrightlocator.
DAWRTZ Goestotheleftlocator.
DAWEND Goestotherightlocator.
DAWONLINE Activates/Deactivatesinternal/externalSync.
DAWQUICKPUNCH Enables/DisablesDropmode.
DAWAUTOFADER Enables/DisablesVolumeautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOPANEnables/DisablesPanautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOPLUGIN Enables/DisablesPlug-inparameterautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOMUTE Enables/DisablesMuteautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOSEND Enables/DisablesSendLevelautomationplaybackandrecording.
DAWAUTOSEND
MUTE
—
DAWAUTOWRITE Setsselectedtrackto“Write”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Write.”
DAWOPTION/ALL Setsalltracksto“Write”automationmode.
DAWAUTOTOUCH Setsselectedtrackto“Touch”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Touch.”
DAWOPTION/ALL Setsalltracksto“Touch”automationmode.
DAWAUTOLATCH Setsselectedtrackto“Latch”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Latch.”
DAWOPTION/ALL Setsalltracksto“Latch”automationmode.
DAWAUTOREAD Setsselectedtrackto“Read”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Read.”
DAWOPTION/ALL Setsalltracksto“Read”automationmode.
DAWAUTOTRIM —
DAWAUTOOFF Setsselectedtrackto“Off”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channel
StripAUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Off.”
DAWOPTION/ALL Setsalltracksto“Off”automationmode.
DAWAUTOSTATUS Whilehelddown,theChannelStripdisplaysshowtheautomationmodeof
theselectedtrack.
Control Assignment
21
225
21 YamahaDM2000
SetUp
PleasefollowthesestepsbeforeusingyourcontrolsurfacewithLogicPro7.
ÂMakesurethatyourDM2000unit(s)areconnectedtothecomputerviaUSB.
ÂMakesurethattheMIDIdrivershippedwiththeunitisinstalled.
OntheDM2000FrontPanel:
Basically,yousetuptheDM2000asifyouareusingitwithProTools.SeetheDM2000
usermanual,section19.Herearethenecessarysteps:
ÂPressDISPLAYACCESS[SETUP],then[F4](belowtheLCD)sothattheSetup/MIDI/Host
pageisvisible.Nowmovethecursortotheportparameters:selectDAW,thenselect
USBand1-3.
ÂPressDISPLAYACCESS[REMOTE],then[F1](belowtheLCD).ChooseGeneralDAWasthe
TARGETparameter.
ÂPressLAYER[REMOTE1].
InLogic:
WhenLogicProislaunched,theunitisinstalledautomatically.Youshouldseethree
DM2000(USB1-3)iconsintheSetupwindow,alignedhorizontally.
226 Chapter21YamahaDM2000
AssignmentOverview
Aright-alignedmodifierbutton(suchasSHIFT)belowabuttondescriptionindicates
thatthebuttonhasanalternatemeaning/usewhileholdingdownthismodifier.
MATRIXSELECTSection
AUXSELECTSection
Control Assignment
MATRIX1SwitchesEncoderPush-Switchbuttonsbetweennormalbehaviorandsettingdefault
value.
MATRIX2SwitchestheEncoderPush-SwitchbuttonsbetweenSendPositionandSendMute
mode.
MATRIX4IfENCODERMODE[ASSIGN4]ison,switchesthechannelstripSELbuttonsbetween
InsertSelect(indicatoroff)andInsertBypassmode(indicatoron).
Control Assignment
AUX1AssignsSend1LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend1destinationassignment.
USER4Asabove,forSend6.
AUX2AssignsSend2LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend2destinationassignment.
USER4Asabove,forSend7.
AUX3AssignsSend3LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend3destinationassignment.
USER4Asabove,forSend8.
AUX4AssignsSend4LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend4destinationassignment.
AUX5AssignsSend5LeveltoEncoders,andSend5to8LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend5destinationassignment.
Chapter21YamahaDM2000 227
ENCODERMODESection
FADERMODESection
DISPLAYACCESSSection
Control Assignment
PANAssignsPantoEncoders;assignsselectedtrack’span/surroundparameterstoDSP
Encoders.
AUX/MTRX AssignsSend1LeveltoEncoders,andSend1to4LevelstoDSPEncoders.While
held,theChannelStripdisplaysshowthecurrentSend1destinationassignment.
ASSIGN1AssignsTrackInputtoEncoders.Whilehelddown,theChannelStripdisplaysshow
thecurrentTrackInputassignment.
ASSIGN2AssignsTrackOutputtoEncoders.Whilehelddown,theChannelStripdisplaysshow
thecurrentTrackOutputassignment.
ASSIGN3WhenEncodersdisplayaSendlevel,switchesthemtoSendDestinationassignment
mode.PressEncoderPush-SwitchorASSIGN3againtoconfirmtheassignment.
ASSIGN4DeterminesmodeofchannelstripSELbuttons:
ÂIndicatoroff:trackselection.
ÂIndicatoron:InsertselectionorInsertBypass,dependingonMATRIXSELECT
[MATRIX4].
Control Assignment
FADER Enables/DisablesFlipmode.
AUX/MTRX Enables/DisablesFlipmode.
Control Assignment
METER ClearsOverloadLEDs.
USER4SwitchestoGlobalViewandenablesMIDITracks.
USER13 Opens/ClosesArrangewindow.
228 Chapter21YamahaDM2000
EFFECTS/PLUG-INSSection
Control Assignment
Display Opens/ClosestheSampleEditwindow.
5—
6SwitchesDSPdisplaybetween“trackname/parametername”and“parametername/
parametervalue”modes.
7Activates/Deactivatesbypassofplug-ininsertthatiscurrentlybeingedited.
8SwitchesbetweenPlug-inAssignandPlug-inEditmodes.
ParameterUp
&Parameter
Down
Plug-InEdit:shiftsparameterdisplaybythenumberofParametercontrolsinthe
controlsurfacegroup(usuallyfour).
USER13 Plug-InEdit:shiftsparameterdisplaybyone(parameter).
Parameter
control1–4
push-switch
AssignmentPan:
ÂParametercontrol1push-switchcentersPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂParametercontrol2push-switchcentersSurroundDiversity.
ÂParametercontrol3push-switchcentersSurroundLFE.
ÂParametercontrol4push-switchsetsSurroundModetocenter.
AssignmentSend:
ÂEnables/DisablesSends1to4orMutes5to8.
Plug-InAssign:
ÂConfirminsert1to4or5to8plug-inselection,selectsthisinsertslotandenters
Plug-InEditmode.
Plug-InEditmode:
ÂSetsvaluetodefault,orswitchesbi-polarparametervalueon/off.
Parameter
controls
AssignmentPan:
ÂParametercontrol1controlsPanorSurroundAngle.
ÂParametercontrol2controlsSurroundDiversity.
ÂParametercontrol3controlsSurroundLFE.
ÂParametercontrol4controlsSurroundMode.
AssignmentSend:
ÂControlSend1to4or5to8Level.
Plug-InAssign:
ÂAssignsinsert1to4or5to8.
Plug-InEditmode:
ÂSetsvaluetodefault.
Chapter21YamahaDM2000 229
LCD
TRACKARMINGSection
Display Assignment
LCD Displaysparameterdetails,plug-inselectionorplug-inparameters.
TIMECODE Activeifcounterisdisplayingtimecode.
FEET Notassigned.
BEATS Activeifcounterisdisplayingbars/beats/format/ticks.
Timedisplay Displaystimecodeorbars/beats/format/ticks.
SELECTASSIGN DisplaystheEncoderassignmentasfollows:
Pan,Snd1toSnd8,S1AstoS8As,In,Out.
Control Assignment
1to24 Enables/DisablesRecordReady.
USER5DisablesRecordReadyforalltracks.
MASTER DisablesRecordReadyforalltracks.
230 Chapter21YamahaDM2000
AUTOMIXSection
Control Assignment
DISPLAY Whileheld,theChannelStripdisplaysshowtheautomationmodeofselectedtrack.
REC Setsselectedtrackto“Write”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Write.”
USER5Setsalltracksto“Write”automationmode.
ABORT/UNDO Setsselectedtrackto“Touch”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Touch.”
USER5Setsalltrackstoautomationmode“Touch.”
AUTOREC Setsselectedtrackto“Latch”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto“Latch.”
USER5Setsalltrackstoautomationmode“Latch.”
RETURN Setsselectedtrackto“Read”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStrip
AUTObuttonssetautomationmodeto”Read.”
USER5Setsalltracksto“Read”automationmode.
RELATIVE —
TOUCHSENSE Setsselectedtrackto“Off”automationmode.Whilehelddown,channelStripAUTO
buttonssetautomationmodeto“Off.”
USER5Setsalltracksto“Off”automationmode.
OVERWRITE
[FADER]
Enables/Disablesvolumeautomationplaybackandrecording.
OVERWRITE
[PAN]
Enables/Disablespanautomationplaybackandrecording.
OVERWRITE
[EQ]
Enables/DisablesPlug-inparameterautomationplaybackandrecording.
OVERWRITE
[ON]
Enables/Disablesmuteautomationplaybackandrecording.
OVERWRITE
[AUX]
Enables/DisablesSendlevelautomationplaybackandrecording.
OVERWRITE
[AUXON]
—
Chapter21YamahaDM2000 231
USERDEFINEDKEYSSection
Control Assignment
DISPLAY Opens/ClosestheAudiowindow.
1Opens/ClosestheTransportwindow.
2Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheleft.
3Shiftschannelstripsbyonebanktotheright.
4Shiftstosecondmeaningofsomebuttons(seedescriptionsofotherbuttons).
5Whilehelddown,valuechangemodeissetto“full”:anyrelativevaluechangeswill
“jump”totheirminimumormaximumvalues.
6EntersGroupEditmode:
ÂTheupperlineintheDSPeditsectiondisplaysthecurrentlyeditedgroupnumber
andname.
ÂParametercontrolpush-switchbuttons1to4switchthepropertiesofthegroup
currentlybeingedited(namesshowninlowerlineofdisplay).
ÂWhenINSERT/PARAMisoff,DSPEditScrollEncoderscrollsthroughthegroup
properties.Otherwise,itselectsthecurrentlyeditedgroup.
ÂTheSELECTbuttonsactivate/deactivategroupmembershipofthetrack.
USER4SwitchestoTrackView.
7Activates/DeactivatestheGroupClutch(disablesallgroups).
USER4SwitchestoExtendedTrackView.
8CreatesanewgroupandentersGroupEditmode(seeabove).
USER4SwitchestoGlobalView.
9SwitchesbetweentheArrangeandTrackMixerwindows.
10 Shiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheleft.
11 S hiftschannelstripsbyonechanneltotheright.
12 Whilehelddown,theGroupClutchisengaged(allgroupsaredisabled).
13 Whilehelddown,valuechangemodeissetto“fine”:relativevaluechangesworkat
maximumresolution.Alsoseedescriptionsofotherbuttons.
14 —
15 Per formsUndo.
USER4PerformsRedo.
USER5OpensUndoHistorywindow.
16 Savesthesong.
USER5SaveAs…:savesthesongunderadifferentname.
232 Chapter21YamahaDM2000
LOCATORSection
Control Assignment
DISPLAY Opens/ClosestheMarkerListwindow.
1to8Recallsmarkers1to8.
USER4SwitchestoGlobalViewandenables:
1:MIDITracks.
2:Inputs.
3:AudioTracks.
4:AudioInstruments.
5:AuxTracks.
6:Busses.
7:OutputsandMasterobject.
DISPLAY
HISTORY
[FORWARD]
Selectstool:
1:Arrow.
2:Pencil.
3:Eraser.
4:Textedit.
5:Scissors.
6:Glue.
7:Solo.
8:Mute.
AUDITION —
PRE Setsleftlocator.
IN SetsDropInlocator.
OUT SetsDropOutlocator.
POST Setsrightlocator.
RETURNTO
ZERO
Navigatestotheleftlocator.
END Navigatestotherightlocator.
ONLINE Enables/Disablesinternal/externalsync.
QUICKPUNCH Enables/DisablesDropmode.
Chapter21YamahaDM2000 233
ChannelStrips
Transport/CursorSection
Control Assignment
LevelMeters Displaysmomentaryandpeaklevels.
Encoder AdjustsparameterselectedintheAUXSELECTsection.
EncoderPush-
Switch
Panselected:setsPantocenterifMATRIX1onSend1to8selected:editsSendPre/
Post,activates/deactivatesSendMuteorsetsSendLeveltodefaultvalue.
SendAssign,Input,orOutputselected:confirmsselection.
AUTO Cyclesthroughautomationmodes.
Withanautomationmodebuttonhelddown,setsthisautomationmode.
SELIfENCODERMODE[ASSIGN4]off:selectstrack.
IfENCODERMODE[ASSIGN4]on:
ÂBYPASSoff:selectstrackforplug-inselection.
ÂBYPASSon:switchesbypassstatusofcurrentlyselectedinsertslot.
USER4Setsvolumetounitylevel.
MATRIXSELECT
1
Setsvolumetounitylevel.
SOLO Enables/DisablesSolo.
USER5DisablesSoloforalltracks.
ON Enables/DisablesMute.
USER5Unmutesalltracks.
Channelstrip
display
Displaystrackname,orSend,In,orOutassignment.
Fader Adjustsvolume,orduplicatesEncoderinFlipmode.
Control Assignment
REW Shuttlesbackward.
FF Shuttlesforward.
STOP Stop
PLAY Play
USER4Pause
REC Record
DISPLAY
HISTORY
[BACK]
—
DISPLAY
HISTORY
[FORWARD]
Selectsthenexttool.Whilehelddown,numericalbuttonsselectaspecifictool.
SCRUB Enables/DisablesScrubmode.
SHUTTLE Enables/DisablesShuttlemode.
234 Chapter21YamahaDM2000
Parameter
Wheel
Default:moveSPLbyonebar.
Scrub:scrubbing.
Shuttle:Shuttlemode.
DEC Default:leavesFolder.
GotoMarker:cancelsdialog.
USER13 Opens/ClosesAudiowindow.
INC SwitchesbetweenCursorandZoommode.
CursorUp Cursormode:equivalenttocomputerkeyboarduparrowkey.
Zoommode:zoomsoutvertically.
USER4Zoommode:Individualtrackzoomin.
USER13 PageUp.
USER5
+USER13
Scrolltotop.
CursorDown Cursormode:equivalenttocomputerkeyboarddownarrowkey.
Zoommode:zoomsoutvertically.
USER4Zoommode:Individualtrackzoomout.
USER13 PageDown.
USER5
+USER13
Scrolltobottom.
CursorLeft Cursormode:equivalenttocomputerkeyboardleftarrowkey.
Zoommode:zoomsouthorizontally.
USER4Zoommode:Individualtrackzoomresetfortracksofthesametype.
USER13 PageLeft.
USER5
+USER13
Scrolltoleftborder.
CursorRight Cursormode:equivalenttocomputerkeyboardrightarrowkey.
Zoommode:zoomsinhorizontally.
USER4Zoommode:Individualtrackzoomresetofalltracks.
USER13 PageRight.
USER5
+USER13
Scrolltorightborder.
ENTER Entersfolderofselectedtrack.
Control Assignment
235
A
Appendix
ALogicControl—Specifications
LogicControl(BaseUnit)
ThisappendixdescribesthespecificationsoftheLogicControlunit.
Display
Â55×2-digit(LCD)backlitmulti-functiondisplayfordetailedparameterinformation
andmetering
ÂBuilt-inscreensaverfunction
Â2-digit,7-segmentdisplayformodedisplays
Â10-digit,7-segmentdisplayforsongpositioninformationineitherSMPTEorbar/
beats/ticks
Â1×buttontotoggletheLCDbetweenparametername/valueandtoactivatethe
levelmeters.
Â1×buttontotogglethe7-segmentdisplaybetweenSMPTEandbar/beats/ticks.
Â2×LEDsshowthecurrent7-segmentdisplaystatus.
Â1×LEDshowsthecurrentSolostatus.
PerChannel(8Channels)
Â1×motorized100mmtouch-sensitivePenny&Gilesfaderswith10Bitresolution
(1024steps)
Â1×V-POT:digitalendlessrotaryknobwithpositionindicatorandintegratedpush
buttonforparameteradjustmentsofpan,EQ,sendlevels,andsoon
Â4×buttonswithintegratedcoloredLEDforchannelfunctionssuchas:Record,Solo,
Mute,andChannelSelection
ÂSignalPresentLEDindicateswhenanaudioorMIDIsignalispresent.
MasterFader
Â1×motorized100mmtouch-sensitivePenny&Gilesfaderwith10Bitresolution(1024
steps).
236 AppendixALogicControl—Specifications
Controller
Â6×buttonswithstatusLEDfordirectselectionofparametergroupsforTrack,Pan/
Surround,EQ,Send,Plug-In,Instrument
Â8×buttonstodirectlyselectsectionsofLogicmixerssuchasaudiotracks,MIDI
tracks,inputs,busses,andsoon
Â4×buttonstoshiftthedisplayedmixerchannelstotheleftandright,eitherone
channelatatime,orinbanks
Â1×buttonwithstatusLEDforthechannelfader/V-POTflip:swapstheassignments
offaderandV-POTs
Â1×buttonwithstatusLEDtotogglebetweenMixerViewandGlobalView
Â4×buttonswithstatusLEDtoactivateautomationmodessuchasRead,Write,
Touch,andLatch
Â4×buttonstoselectutilityfunctionssuchas:“SaveSong,”“Undo,”“Cancel,”or
confirmationsindialogs
Â4×buttonstoaccessadditionalfunctionsthroughmodifierkeys
Â8×freelydefinableuserkeys
Â2×currentlyunassignedbuttonsforfutureuse
TransportControls
Â5×TransportbuttonswithstatusLEDforForward,Rewind,Stop,Play,Record
Â1×Jog/Scrubwheelforpreciselocationofanysongpositionandaudioscrubbing
Â1×ScrubbuttonwithstatusLEDtoactivatethescrubfunction
Â1×Markerand1×NudgebuttonwithstatusLEDtoextendthefunctionalityofthe
Forward/Rewindbuttons(NudgefunctionalityonlyavailableinLogicPro)
Â4×Navigationbuttonstoquicklynavigatethroughplug-inslotsandparameter
pages
Â1×Zoombuttontoswitchthenavigatebuttonstozoom
InternalProcessor
ÂHigh-speedRISCmicrocontroller
ÂFirmwarecanbeupdatedviaMIDIdump.
Connections
Â1×MIDIin,1×MIDIout.
Â2×assignablefootswitchinputstocontrolStart/StopandPunchIn/Out,forexample
Â1×assignableexternalcontrolsignalinputtoconnectavolumepedal.
ÂPowersupplyjack
AppendixALogicControl—Specifications 237
PowerSupply
ÂInternational(100–250V)externalpowersupplyforstandardpowercords
ÂRear-mountedpowerswitch
WeightandConstruction
ÂLogicControlweighs5.05kg(unpacked).
ÂHighquality,sturdy1mmsteelchassisandcase
ÂComfortable,durablewristrest
Dimensions
LogicControlXT(ExtensionUnit)
Display
Â55×2-digit(LCD)backlitmulti-functiondisplayfordetailedparameterinformation
andmetering
ÂBuilt-inscreensaverfunction
Perchannel(8channels)
Â1×motorized100mmtouch-sensitivePenny&Gilesfaderswith10Bitresolution
(1024steps)
Â1×V-POT:digitalendlessrotaryknobwithpositionindicatorandintegratedpush
buttonforparameteradjustmentsofpan,EQ,sendlevels,andsoon
Â4×buttonswithintegratedcoloredLEDforchannelfunctionssuchas:Record,Solo,
Mute,andChannelSelection
ÂSignalPresentLEDindicatesthepresenceofanaudiosignal
InternalProcessor
ÂHigh-speedRISCmicrocontroller
ÂFirmwarecanbeupdatedviaMIDIdump.
238 AppendixALogicControl—Specifications
Connections
Â1×MIDIin,1×MIDIout
ÂPowersupplyjack
PowerSupply
ÂInternational(100–250V)externalpowersupplyforstandardpowercords
ÂRear-mountedpowerswitch
WeightandConstruction
ÂLogicControlXTweighs3.45kg(unpacked)
ÂHighquality,sturdy1mmsteelchassisandcase
ÂComfortable,durablewristrest
Dimensions
239
B
Appendix
BLogicControl—
MIDIImplementation
Thefollowinginformationisimportantforsoftwarevendorswhowishtocreatealevel
ofsoftwareintegrationfortheLogic/MackieControl/XTunits.
ThisdocumentationcoversfirmwareversionV1.0.
Note:Allnumbersareinhexadecimalformat.
Variablebytesareshowninitalicsandusecharactersotherthana-fasaplaceholder.
Allchannelmessagesuserunningstatusmessages.Onceaninitial3-bytemessagehas
beensent,thestatusbyteisdroppedfromproceedingtransmittedchannelmessages,
inordertoconservebandwidth.
SysExMessageHeader
Thefollowingdocumentationusestheplaceholder“<Hdr>”whenevertheSysEx
headeristransmittedorreceived.Ithasthefollowingform:
F0 MIDISysExstatusbyte
000066 Mackie3-byteSysExmanufacturerID
ii ModelID
10 LogicControl
11 L o gicControlXT
AdeviceIDisnotrequired,aseachunitneedsadedicatedMIDIcable.
240 AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation
GlobalControlMessages
HostConnectionandInitialization
Received:
<Hdr>00F7
DeviceQuery
<Hdr>02ssssssssssssssrrrrrrrrF7
HostConnectionReply
<Hdr>0F7FF7
GoOffline
Transmitted:
<Hdr>01ssssssssssssssllllllllF7
HostConnectionQuery
<Hdr>03ssssssssssssssF7
HostConnectionConfirmation
<Hdr>04ssssssssssssssF7
HostConnectionError
ss =Serialnumber(7bytesASCIItext,nonnull-terminated)
ll =Challengecode(4bytes)
rr =Responsecode(4bytes)
OfflineMode:
LogicControlemploysaquerysystemtomaintainaconnectiontothehostsoftware.
WhenLogicControlisinitiallypoweredup,itdefaultstoOfflinemode.InOfflinemode,
LogicControl’sfadersmovetotheirlowestsetting,andtheLCDreads“EMAGICLOGIC
CONTROL--byMACKIE.”Afterpower-on,LogicControlalsotransmitsasystem
exclusiveHostConnectionQuerymessagethatisused(bythehost)todetecta
connection,andwhattypeofdeviceisconnected(LogicControl/LogicControlXT).
CommunicationsInitialization:
WhenthehostsoftwarereceivesaHostConnectionQuerymessage(containingaserial
numberandarandomchallengecode),itshouldtransmitaHostConnectionReply
commandwithin300mstoinitializeLogicControl.Thecommandmustcontainthe
sameserialnumberandthecorrectresponsecodeforthechallengecode.Hereisthe
algorithm(l1tol4=challengecodebytes1to4,r1tor4=responsecodebytes1to4):
r1=0x7F&(l1+(l2^0xa)–l4);
r2=0x7F&((l3>>4)^(l1+l4));
r3=0x7F&(l4-(l3<<2)^(l1|l2));
r4=0x7F&(l2-l3+(0xF0^(l4<<4)));
LogicControlwill,inturn,respondwitheither:
ÂaHostConnectionConfirmationmessagethatcontainstheserialnumber,andswitch
toOnlinemode—whereitwillawaitfurtherinstructionsfromthehost,or
ÂreplywithaHostConnectionErrormessage,iftheresponsecodewaswrong.
AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation 241
OnlineMode:
OncetheconnectionbetweenLogicControlandthehostsoftwarehasbeenmade,
LogicControlstaysinOnlineModeuntilitreceivesaGoOfflinemessage.
Firmwareversionrequest
Received:
<Hdr>1300F7 Versionrequest
Transmitted:
<Hdr>14vvvvvvvvvvF7 Versionreply
vv 5ASCIIbytescontainingversionstring,e. g.“V1.0”.
Note:WhenLogicControlreceivesaversionrequestmessage,itsendstheversion
replymessage.
ResetMessages
Received:
<Hdr>61F7 Faderstominimum
(Sendsallfaderstothebottomoftheirthrow)
<Hdr>62F7 AllLEDsoff
(TurnsoffallLEDsonLogicControl)
<Hdr>63F7 Reset
(Re-BootsLogicControlintoOfflinemode)
Transmitted: No
ConfigurationMessages
Received:
<Hdr>0AttF7 Transportbuttonclick
<Hdr>0BllF7 LCDbacklightsaver
<Hdr>0CmmF7 Touchlessmovablefaders
<Hdr> 0EiissF7 Fadertouchsensitivity
Transmitted: No
tt 00=notransportbuttonclick
01=transportbuttonclick(default)
ll 00=LCDbacklightoff
01to7F=LCDbacklighton,withtimeoutinminutes(default:0F=15
minutes)
mm 00=fadermovementsareonlytransmittedifthefaderhasbeenrecognized
astouched
01=fadermovementsarealsotransmittedifthefaderhasnotbeenrecog-
nizedastouched(e. g.withfingernailorpen)
ii FaderID(00thru07;Master=08)
ss Fadertouchsensitivity(00to05;default:03)
242 AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation
CommonControlMessages
Faders
Received: Ei,ll,hh Movefadertoposition
Transmitted: Ei,ll,hh Fadermovedbyuser
iFaderID(00thru07;Master=08)
ll Faderpositionvaluelow7bits(00–7F)
hh Faderpositionvaluehigh7bits(00–7F)
Example: E0,40,55=FaderCh.1,position(55<<7)+40
Note:Messageformatfortransmittedfaderpositionisthesameasforreceived
position.Onlythetop(high)10ofthe14transmittedbitsarerequired.Positions0to
1023(decimal)aretransmittedas0000to03FF(Ei0000toEi7F7F).
Switches
Received: None
Transmitted: 90,ii,ss Switchpressed/releasedbyuser
ii SwitchID(See“LogicControl—ControlSurfaceLayoutandIDs”onpage251.)
ss SwitchState
00=switchorfaderrelead
7F=switchpressedorfadertouched
Example: 90,0F,7F=SOLOCh.8ispressed
90,0F,00=SOLOCh.8isreleased
Note:LEDsandswitchesusethesamecontrolmessage.Thisapproachmeansthatan
LEDhasthesameIDasitscorrespondingswitch.
LEDs
Received: 90,ii,ss SetLEDstatus
Transmitted: None
ii LEDID(See“LogicControl—ControlSurfaceLayoutandIDs”onpage251.)
ss LEDState(7F=on,00=off,01=flashing)
Example: 90,08,7F=TurnLED08on
90,08,00=TurnLED08off
Note:SwitchesandLEDsusethesamecontrolmessage.ThisensuresthatanLED
alwayssharesanIDwithitscorrespondingswitch.
AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation 243
V-Pots
Received: None
Transmitted: B0,1i,XX V-POTsturnedbyuser
iV-POTID(00–07)
XX deltavalueintheformof(0svvvvvv)
sdirectionbit:
0=clockwise,
1=counterclockwise
vv numberofticks
Examples:
ÂB0,10,01=V-POTCh.1isbeingturnedclockwisebyonetick.
ÂB0,17,47=V-POTCh.8isbeingturnedcounter-clockwiseby7ticks.
V-PotLEDring
Received: B0,3i,XX SetLEDringdisplay
Transmitted: None
iV-POTnumber(0thru7)
XX V-POTdisplaycontrolbyteintheformof
(0pxxvvvv):
pV-POTdisplaycenterLEDstate
(1=on,0=off)
xx V-POTmode(00thru03;seediagramsbelow)
vv V-POTdisplaypositionvalue
00=allLEDsinringoff;
01thru0Bseediagramsbelow
Example:
ÂB0,31,06=V-POT2displayshowsLEDsatposition6.
Note:InanyV-POTdisplaymode,areceivedLEDpositionvalueof00willturnoffallof
theV-POTLEDs.
244 AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation
V-POTDisplaymodesavailable:
AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation 245
ExternalController
Received:None
Transmitted: B0,2E,vv ExternalControllerchanged
vv ExternalControllerpositionvalue(00–7F)
Example:
ÂB0,2E,07=ExternalControllervalue=07
JogWheel
Received: None
Transmitted: B0,3C,XX Jogwheelturnedbyuser
XX deltavalueintheformof(0svvvvvv)
sdirectionbit:0=clockwise,1=counterclockwise
vv numberofticks
Examples:
ÂB0,3C,01=Jogforward.
ÂB0,3C,41=Jogreverse.
246 AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation
LCD
Received: <Hdr>,12 ,oo,yy,…,F7 UpdateLCD
Transmitted: None
oo Displayoffsettowritefrom:
00thru37forupperline,
38thru6Fforlowerline.
yy Data:ASCIIequivalentsfordisplaycharacters—writtenfromlefttoright—
andincludinglinewrappingbetweenupperandlowerlines.Upto100data
bytesmaybesentinonemessage.
Example:
ÂThefollowingmessagewrites“Hello”tothetopleftoftheLCDonaLogicControl
mastersection.
F00000661012 0048656C6C6FF7
Notes:
ÂThereare7displayedcharactersperchannel,withtheexceptionofchannel8,which
islimitedtodisplayingthefirst6characters.Internallyhowever,theLCDstores2x56
characters.
ÂInmostcases,youwillusetheLCDinascribble-stripfashion(textaboveeach
channel).Inthisscenario,youshouldonlyusethefirstsixcharactersperchannel,
thusallowingforspacesbetweenthetextofeachchannel.
ÂThelowerlinecanbeswitchedintometermode.See“Metering”onpage249for
furtherdetails.
ÂWhiletheLCDswitchesbetweenhorizontalandverticalmeteringmodes,itignores
LCDmessages.YoushoulddelayLCDmessagesforatleast600msaftersendingan
LCDmeteringmodechangemessage.
AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation 247
TimeCode/BBTDisplay
Received:
<Hdr>,10,yy,…,F7 Updatemultiplecharacters
B0,4i,yy Updatesinglecharacter
Transmitted: None
iDigitID:0=right-most,9=left-most
yy Databytesrepresentingcharactertobewritten(See“7-SegmentDisplay
CharacterTable”onpage248).UptotencharacterscanbesentintheSysEx
message.
Examples:
ÂThefollowingmessagewrites“109.02.01.126”totheTimeCodedisplay(notedecimal
points).
F0000066101036323171307230793031F7
ÂB040304131=writes“10”intothelasttwodigits.
Important:ThedigitsintheTimeCodeandAssignmentdisplaysarewrittenRIGHT-TO-
LEFT,whichhelpstoconservebandwidth.
Assignment7-segmentdisplay
Received:
<Hdr>,11 , yy,yy,F7 Updatemultiplecharacters
B0,4i,yy Updatesinglecharacter
Transmitted: None
iDigitID:A=right,B=left
yy Databytesrepresentingcharactertobewritten(See“7-SegmentDisplay
CharacterTable”onpage248).TwocharacterscanbesentintheSysEx
message.
Example:
ÂB04B104A4E=writes“Pn.”totheAssignmentdisplay.
Important:ThedigitsintheTimeCodeandAssignmentdisplaysarewrittenRIGHT-TO-
LEFT,tohelpconservebandwidth.
248 AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation
7-SegmentDisplayCharacterTable
Hint:
ÂCharacters@(40h)thru`(60h)=(ASCIIvalue)−40h
ÂCharacters!(21h)thru?(3Fh)=ASCIIvalue
Note:Thedecimalpointoneach7-segmentcharactercanbelitbyadding40Hexto
thevalueofthedata.
AppendixBLogicControl—MIDIImplementation 249
Metering
Received:
D0,XX Peaklevel
<Hdr>,20,ii,mm,F7 Channelmetermode
<Hdr>,21,yy,F7 GlobalLCDmetermode
Transmitted: None
XX Meterlevelintheformof(0hhhllll):
hh Channeltobeaddressed(0thru7)
ll Meterlevel:
0thruC=levelmeter0%to100%
Overloadnotcleared!
E=setoverload
F=clearoverload
ii ChannelID(0to7)
mm modebitmapintheformof(00000lps):
lEnablelevelmeteronLCD
pEnablepeakholddisplay(horizontalonly)
sEnableSignalLED
yy 00=horizontal;01=vertical
Notes:
ÂThereisonlyonelevelmeterperchannel.Forstereotracks,usethemaximumofleft
andrightlevels.
ÂOnlytransmitpeaklevels.LogicControlautomaticallydecreasesthelevelmeterbars,
andswitchesofftheSignalPresentLED(overtime).ThisapproachensuresthatMIDI
bandwidthtakesonlyafractionofthatrequiredbyimplementationswherethe
currentlevel(andpeaklevel)istransmittedconstantly.
ÂDecayrateisapproximately300mspermeterdivision(1.8secondstofallfrom100%
to0%).
ÂTheLCDmetervalueandthedurationoftheSignalPresentLEDarecontrolledbythe
samedatabyte.
ÂWhiletheLCDswitchesbetweenhorizontalandverticalmeteringmode,itignores
LCDmessages.YoushoulddelayLCDmessagesforatleast600msaftersendingan
LCDmeteringmodechangemessage.
251
C
Appendix
CLogicControl—
ControlSurfaceLayoutandIDs
ID Switch LED Function
00 • • REC/RDYCh.1
01 ••REC/RDYCh.2
02 • • REC/RDYCh.3
03 • • REC/RDYCh.4
04 • • REC/RDYCh.5
05 • • REC/RDYCh.6
06 • • REC/RDYCh.7
07 • • REC/RDYCh.8
08 • • SOLOCh.1
09 • • SOLOCh.2
0A • • SOLOCh.3
0B • • SOLOCh.4
0C • • SOLOCh.5
0D • • SOLOCh.6
0E • • SOLOCh.7
0F • • SOLOCh.8
10 ••MUTECh.1
11 ••MUTECh.2
12 ••MUTECh.3
13 ••MUTECh.4
14 ••MUTECh.5
15 ••MUTECh.6
16 ••MUTECh.7
17 ••MUTECh.8
18 ••SELECTCh.1
19 ••SELECTCh.2
252 AppendixCLogicControl—ControlSurfaceLayoutandIDs
1A • • SELECTCh.3
1B • • SELECTCh.4
1C • • SELECTCh.5
1D • • SELECTCh.6
1E • • SELECTCh.7
1F • • SELECTCh.8
20 • V-SelectCh.1
21 • V-SelectCh.2
22 • V-SelectCh.3
23 • V-SelectCh.4
24 • V-SelectCh.5
25 • V-SelectCh.6
26 • V-SelectCh.7
27 • V-SelectCh.8
28 ••ASSIGNMENT:TRACK
29 • • ASSIGNMENT:SEND
2A • • ASSIGNMENT:PAN/SURROUND
2B • • ASSIGNMENT:PLUG-IN
2C • • ASSIGNMENT:EQ
2D • • ASSIGNMENT:INSTRUMENT
2E • FADERBANKS:BANKLeft
2F • FADERBANKS:BANKRight
30 •FADERBANKS:CHANNELLeft
31 •FADERBANKS:CHANNELRight
32 ••FLIP
33 ••GLOBALVIEW
34 • NAME/VALUE
35 • SMPTE/BEATS
36 • F1
37 • F2
38 • F3
39 • F4
3A • F5
3B • F6
3C • F7
3D • F8
ID Switch LED Function
AppendixCLogicControl—ControlSurfaceLayoutandIDs 253
3E • GLOBALVIEW:MIDITRACKS
3F • GLOBALVIEW:INPUTS
40 • GLOBALVIEW:AUDIOTRACKS
41 •GLOBALVIEW:AUDIOINSTRUMENT
42 • GLOBALVIEW:AUX
43 • GLOBALVIEW:BUSSES
44 •GLOBALVIEW:OUTPUTS
45 • GLOBALVIEW:USER
46 • SHIFT
47 • OPTION
48 • CONTROL
49 • CMD/ALT
4A • • AUTOMATION:READ/OFF
4B • • AUTOMATION:WRITE
4C • • AUTOMATION:TRIM
4D • • AUTOMATION:TOUCH
4E • • AUTOMATION:LATCH
4F • • GROUP
50 • • UTILITIES:SAVE
51 ••UTILITIES:UNDO
52 • UTILITIES:CANCEL
53 • UTILITIES:ENTER
54 • • MARKER
55 ••NUDGE(LogicProonly)
56 • • CYCLE
57 • • DROP
58 ••REPLACE
59 ••CLICK
5A • • SOLO
5B • • REWIND
5C • • FASTFWD
5D • • STOP
5E • • PLAY
5F • • RECORD
60 • CursorUp
61 •CursorDown
ID Switch LED Function
254 AppendixCLogicControl—ControlSurfaceLayoutandIDs
62 • CursorLeft
63 •CursorRight
64 • • Zoom
65 • • Scrub
66 • UserSwitchA
67 • UserSwitchB
68 • FaderTouchCh.1
69 •FaderTouchCh.2
6A • FaderTouchCh.3
6B • FaderTouchCh.4
6C • FaderTouchCh.5
6D • FaderTouchCh.6
6E • FaderTouchCh.7
6F • FaderTouchCh.8
70 • FaderTouchMaster
71 • SMPTELED
72 • BEATSLED
73 • RUDESOLOLIGHT
76 • Relayclick
ID Switch LED Function
255
D
Appendix
DLogicControl—
MIDIImplementationChart
Mode1:OMNION,POLY,Mode2:OMNION,MONO,O:Yes
Mode3:OMNIOFF,POLY,Mode4:OMNIOFF,MONO,X:No
Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Channel,Default:
Changed:
1
1
1
1
EachLogicControlunitshouldbeinstalledona
separateMIDIport.
Mode,Default:
Messages:
Altered:
X
X
X
X
X
X
NoteNumber
TrueVoice:
O0–127
X
O0–127
X
Velocity,NoteOn:
NoteOff:
Ov=1–127
Xv=00
Ov=1–127
Xv=00
AfterTouch,Keys:
Chan’s:
X
X
X
O
PitchBend O O Usedformotorfaders
ControlChange O O
ProgramChange
True#:
XX
SYSTEM
EXCLUSIVE:
OO
SYSTEM
COMMON:
XX

Navigation menu